Mechanical Specifications

Project: Demolition of existing building, Construction, Completion and Maintenance of
Commercial Building Consist of 4 basement, Ground floor & mezzanine floor+ 16 Typical floors
Consultant: PAN EMIRATES CONSULT
GENERAL & PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS FOR MECHANICAL WORKS
ABU DHABI COMMERCIAL ENGINEERING SERVICES L.L.C

(ADCE)
Project:
Demolition of existing building, Construction, Completion
and Maintenance of Commercial Building Consist of
4 basements, Ground floor
& mezzanine floor + 16 Typical floors
Abu Dhabi / Sector: 2 west,
Plot No. C13
File No. 607
Volume 2 / Part 2 B: Mechanical works / General & particular
Specifications
August 2012
Owner:
Obaid Ali Obaid Al Khmairi
&
Meara Ali Obaid Al Khmairi
Consultant:
Po. Box: 3414, Abu Dhabi

-1-

Tel : 02-6772705
Fax: 02-6778272
Index:
Volume 1 : Part 1: Iinstruction to Tenderers
And forms
Part 2: Standard Construction Contract
Volume 2 : Part 1: Civil works / General & particular
Specifications
Part 2: MEP works / General & Particular
Specifications
Volume 3
: Bill of Quantities
Volume 4 : Part 1: Architectural & Structural Drawings

Part 2: MEP Drawings
-2-

Volume 1 Part 1 Contents:

Division (I) General Specification
Division (II) Particular Specification
Division (III) Approved List of Manufacturer
-3-

INDEX
General Specifications for Electro-mechanical Works
General Specifications for Elevators
Particular Specifications for Mechanical Works
Particular Specifications for Fire Fighting Works
Appendix A List of Approved Manufacturers / AC works
Appendix B List of Approved Manufacturers / Plumbing works
Water Storage Tanks
Plumbing Indicating Instruments
Plumbing and Drainage Service Connections
Submersible Sump Pumps
Domestic Water Booster and Transfer Pumps
Fire Protection General Requirements
Fire Protection Piping and Accessories
Fire Hose Cabinets
Fire Pumps
Appendix_A new version
-4-

INDEX FOR GENERAL SPECIFICATION FOR ELECTRO - MECHANICAL WORKS
.
ITEM
TITLE
1.0
Uniformity of Products
2.0
Quality of Products
3.0
Qualification of Manufacturers
4.0
Workmanship
5.0
Tags and Directory
6.0
Identification
7.0
Inspection
8.0
Concealed Work
9.0
Accessibility
10.0
Exposed Work
11.0
Avoidance of Tree Roots
12.0
Installation of Equipment
13.0
General Requirements for Piping and Fittings
14.0
Hangers in General
15.0
Fixing Steel Work
16.0
Foundation Fixing
17.0
Fixing to Walls
18.0
Escutcheons
19.0
Warning Tapes
20.0
Inserts
21.0
Notes on Installation
22.0
Inspection, Testing and Adjustments
23.0
Testing of Piping & Accessories
24.0
Testing on Site
25.0
Operation & Maintenance Manuals
26.0
Guarantee & Warrantees
27.0
Regulations for Ventilation and Air-conditioning
28.0
Access Panels and Doors
-5-

29.0
Pipe and Cable Trays/Ducts Hangers and Supports
30.0
Access to Valves, etc.
31.0
Drip Pans
32.0
Installation of Pipes, Conduits and Ductwork
33.0
Pipe and Duct Sleeves
34.0
Unions, Flanges and Valves
35.0
Flexible Connections
36.0
Gaskets
37.0
Piping Joints Capillary
38.0
Piping Supports
39.0
Expansion of Piping
40.0
Drainage Piping Requirements
41.0
Fixing of uPVC Pipe work Installations
42.0
Cleaning Drains on Completion
43.0
Flashing
44.0
Disinfection of Water System
45.0
Motors
46.0
Electrical Characteristics
47.0
Cable Ducts Laying
48.0
Test: Low and Medium Voltage
49.0
Pressure Gauges
50.0
Thermometers
-6-

1.0 UNIFORMITY OF PRODUCTS
a. Coordinate with the sections of this division and other divisions of the specification to
supply products of the same manufacturer when these products have similar functions
and characteristics. When the same manufacturer cannot provide for all sections; for
a similar product; and the product is installed in finished areas; the products shall be
similar in style and finished as directed by the Specification and or the Consultant.
b. The following are examples but not limited to products which should be cocoordinated
for all sections:
1. Access doors and panels
2. Valves
3. Motors
4. Products with special surface treatment or finish and color.
5. Thermometers and gauges
6. Vibration and sound control devices
7. Hangers
8. Electrical fittings and accessories
2.0 QUALITY OF PRODUCTS

a. The Contractor shall indicate in the Tender which manufacturers have been selected
for the supply of the various equipment giving technical description and performance
data of same.
b. Manufactured products supplied and installed under the work of the sections of
Mechanical and/ or Electrical Division shall be; new, the best of their respective kind,
free of any defect, and in accordance with the Contract Documents. All materials,
products and equipment shall be suitable for local weather and climatic conditions.
c. Fabricated products shall be assembled from new materials, free of defects,
complying with applicable "codes" and specified "standards" and in accordance with
the Contract Documents. All materials and products shall bear approved labels as
required by local code, inspection authorities and/or the Consultant.
d. Where materials or equipment are not specified in detail, they are to be of the best
quality available and shall comply with the appropriate British Standards. The
Contractor shall submit drawings and or samples of such materials or equipment to
the Consultant for his approval before use in the Contract Works.
e. All equipment, fittings and materials shall conform to the appropriate and relevant
British Standard current at the time of execution of the Contract Works. Reference to
a British Standard herein is deemed to be the relevant standard and any revisions
current at the time of execution of the Contract Works. Materials not covered by a
British Standard at the time of execution of the Contract Works shall be agreed in
writing by the Consultant before execution of any work with such material or materials.
f. Any schedule of equipment appended clearly defines the class and quality of materials
to be employed in the Contract Works. The Contractor's tender shall include for
materials of same or equivalent quality together with itemized prices for above.
g. The Contractor shall not re-use or re-install apparatus, fittings or materials removed
from any existing installation unless specified or otherwise instructed in writing by the
Consultant.
-7-

3.0 QUALIFICATIONOF MANUFACTURERS
Products specified shall be manufactured by manufacturers regularly engaged in the
production of the specified product.
4.0 WORKMANSHIP
Workmanship shall conform to the appropriate and relevant British Standard Codes of
Practice current at the time of execution of the Works and shall be deemed to be mandatory to
the Contract as though they were included herein.
5.0 TAGS AND DIRECTORY

Each valve controlling mains, risers and branches but not individual shut-off or local control
valves on fixtures only, must be tagged with a brass tag for outdoor units and multi-layer, white
and black "Trifoliate" for indoor units not less than 100x40 mm with numbers and code letters
as possible for identifying service. Tags shall be of approved neat design attached to valves by
means of brass chains.
Equipment shall be clearly labeled. The labels shall be brass for outdoor units and multi-layer,
white and black plastic for indoor units, front engraved, securely fixed to the equipment by
means of stainless steel screws or blind rivets. Equipment labels shall be engraved with a
number, name of equipment and service the legend on the face only in English and Arabic.
Prepare directories and drawings of parts of mechanical systems giving number and purpose
of each tagged valve and its location and use. Drawings shall be approximately 600 mm x 600
mm and mounted in glazed frames. Leave on job, upon completion the number of copies of
each as determined by the Consultant.
Each item of equipment shall be provided with the manufacturer's name, giving the name and
address of the manufacturer, type and model numbers, rated duty of equipment, date of
manufacture, and all other relevant data to facilitate ordering of spares. The lettering shall be
in English and Arabic.
6.0 IDENTIFICATION
a. After finished painting is completed, identify each piped and ducted service. Locate
identification and flow arrows:
1. Behind each access door.
2. At each change of direction at all jointing pipes and ducts.
3. At not more than 12000mm apart in straight runs of pipes and ducts behind
removable enclosures such as lay-in type ceiling, but on both sides of sleeves.
4. Above each floor or platform for vertical exposed pipes and ducts, preferably 1520
mm above floor and platform.
b. Use stencils and stencil paint on all piping and ductwork. Use minimum 25mm high
letters. Provide the Client with stencils for each service.
Identification shall be at 2M intervals and all branch connections. The color coding
shall be to BSS 1710.
c. Use wording shown on the description portion of the legend on the Drawings or as
instructed by the Consultant.
d. Use the existing color coding system in accordance with British Standards.
e. All pipes, covered and uncovered, except soil waste and vent piping, including electric
feeder conduits shall be marked with stencils to indicate the use of the particular pipe
or conduit. Where water pressure changes occur the stencil shall also indicate the
other pressures. Where pipes are adjacent to each other, stencils shall be properly
-8-

lined up and shall be so located as to be legible from the floor. Letters on covered
pipes and uncovered galvanized pipes shall be black or red, and on uncovered black
pipes shall be white.
f. Fans, pumps, exposed ducts, controls, cabinets, circuit breakers, panels, motors and
other equipment shall be similarly stenciled. The exact location of stencils shall be as
directed by the Engineer. Where apparatus is too small for stencils, use small
nameplates made of brass with identification etched or stamped and filled in with
suitable black paint.
g. The Contractor shall clearly label to the Consultant's requirements all main switches,
sub-main switches, switch fuses, fuse switches, isolating switches, fuse boards,
starters, meters, etc., with non-inflammable labels fixed by brass headed instrument
screws or other satisfactory permanent and approved means.
Labels shall be fixed to the outer face to indicate the phase and function of the
particular unit or circuit controlled.
h. All bus bars and similar connections shall be marked in strict accordance with BS
5486, part 1 and published supplements.
i. All data engraved or printed on labels shall agree with schedule and drawings
prepared as record drawings.
Circuit Lists and Labels
All boards shall be equipped with circuit lists, which shall be typed on stiff cards held in
transparent compartments fitted inside the covers of each distribution board and shall indicate
the circuit reference, the current rating and the service. Alternatively the circuit lists are to be
mounted adjacent to the distribution boards in a metal backed frame behind clear perspex.
The Contractor shall provide in all switch rooms, at positions to be decided later, framed
diagrammatic drawings showing the circuits controlled.
Each circuit, and sub-circuit shall have circuit identification markers as manufactured by
Critchley Bros. Ltd. of their 'O' type range or equal approved installed to each end of the cable,
including neutral and earth cables.
Additionally, the Contractor shall provide cable number discs at the end of each run of main
cable. Discs shall be of brass with numbers stamped with metal dies.
The engraving on the labels and the inscriptions on the circuit lists shall be approved by the
Consultant before the work is carried out.
Electrical shock safety notices in English and Arabic shall be supplied and fixed adjacent to
each LV panel and all the boards.
All designation and circuit labels, whether fitted to the inside or the outside of switchboards,
fuse boards and all other electrical equipment, shall be of laminated plastic type with the
lettering in white on a black background. All 380 volt switchboards fuse boards etc. shall be
clearly labeled on the outside "DANGER - 380 VOLTS". The danger labels shall be of the
laminated type with the lettering in white on a red background, both in English and Arabic.
Labels Generally shall be:
Not less than 75mm x 50mm;
In both English and Arabic:
Supplied and fixed by the Contractor, where not already fixed by a manufacturer.
Any labels exposed to the weather shall be of stainless steel with the lettering in black.
-9-

7.0 INSPECTION
Inspect surfaces and structure prepared by other trades before installing products supplied
under this specification. Verify that surfaces or the structure, to receive materials or products,
have no defects or discrepancies which would result in poor application or cause latent defects
in installation and workmanship. Report same in writing to the Consultant. Installation of any
product shall constitute acceptance of such surfaces as being satisfactory.
8.0 CONCEALED WORK

Except where directed or specified otherwise conceal piping, conduits and ductwork in
partitions, walls and between floors and ceilings. Install piping, conduits and ductwork to run
parallel or at right angles to building and so as to require the minimum amount of furring.
9.0 ACCESSIBILITY
a. Concealed: Controls, regulators, expansion joints, valves, strainers, unions, cleanouts,
balancing dampers, fire dampers, mixing boxes, and other "products" requiring
accessibility for service, maintenance, or adjustment shall be accessible through
access doors or panels.
b. Services shall be installed, positioned and located to allow proper and sufficient space
for service, maintenance and adjustments.
10.0 EXPOSED WORK

a. Except where directed or specified otherwise exposed piping and ductwork shall be
neatly lined up parallel or at right angles to building structure.
b. Services shall be neatly installed, symmetrically arranged, and located to conserve
space.
11.0 AVOIDANCE OF TREE ROOTS

The Contractor shall establish from Drawings, the actual or proposed positions of trees within
the site. Where possible the positions shall be confirmed by a site survey. The Contractor shall
include the tree positions within the Drawings provided. The minimum clearance to roots shall
be 1 meter.
12.0 INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT

a. Unless otherwise indicated manufactured products shall be installed in accordance with
the manufacturer's printed instructions.
b. Equipment shall be accurately set, plumbed and leveled.
c. Provide foundations for all machinery and tanks, etc., including fans and pumps, etc.
Foundations generally shall be built up from structural floor slabs and shall be made of
concrete. All exposed surfaces, except where steel protection is indicated, shall be
finished with cement mortar toweled smooth.
d. Machines shall be secured to foundations with anchor bolts of ample size. Bolts shall
have bottom plates and pipe sleeves and shall be securely embedded in the concrete. All
machines shall be grouted under the entire bearing surface of the bed plate or frame.
After the grout has set, all wedges, shims and jack bolts shall be removed and the space
filled with grout.
- 10 -

e. Foundations for machines having no reciprocating parts may be heavy welded structural
steel frames in lieu of concrete, unless otherwise specified. Bases for machines and
motors shall be integral.
f. Each electric motor shall be mounted on the same foundation as the driven machine.
g. Foundations for other moving machinery, such as fans, pumps, compressors, etc., shall
be set on standard, factory made isolation units mounted on concrete sub-bases except if
otherwise specified elsewhere.
h. Isolation units shall be steel banded natural cork of machinery corkboard pads, and
adjustable spring units or rubber in shear units selected with proper consideration of the
prevailing machine frequencies and guaranteed by the manufacturer to prevent
transmission of objectionable noise to the building structure.
i. All builders work shall be done by the Contractor who is also responsible for the proper
position of all foundations.
13.0 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR ALL PIPING AND FITTINGS

All piping and fittings to be supplied and installed shall be first class and comply with the
requirements of the relevant British Standards ISO or DIN Specification.
All piping, run in floor construction, suspended ceiling space or roof space, shall be run
parallel with the lines of the building unless otherwise shown or noted on the drawings. Water
supply pipes where practicable shall be placed at the same elevation and hung on suitable
hangers.
Insulated pipes shall be so installed that there will be not less than 12mm clear space between
them.
Except as otherwise specified, hangers shall be spaced not more than 3 meters apart.
Vertical lines shall be adequately supported at each floor and at their bases by a suitable
hanger placed in the horizontal line near the riser. Also vertical lines shall be adequately
braced to the satisfaction of the Consultant to vertical walls, etc.
All pipe connections with fittings shall be made hydraulically tight with approved materials.
All pipework shall be thoroughly cleaned to remove dirt and grease or oil. The inside of
pipework shall be thoroughly flushed with fresh water.
Fittings i.e. stopcocks, valves, flexible connectors, bends, etc., shall be provided where
necessary and in accordance with good practice.
Main valves and switches on pipework shall be stenciled to indicate their use.
All piping shall be tested before used.
Fittings on Chromium plated brass pipe shall be cast brass, malleable iron pattern, finished
and chromium plated.
A friction wrench shall be used on plated pipe and fittings. Cut, dented or bruised pipe will not
be allowed, and if found installed, shall be removed by the Contractor.
Cut pipes shall be reamed to completely remove the inside burr. If burrs are found in one
small section of the works during installation, the Consultant will require the remaining works
to be dismantled for inspection.
All hot, cold and chilled water piping shall be installed so as to pitch to drain to accessible
locations.
Generally, all piping in toilet rooms shall be run concealed in chases or pipe spaces adjoining
fixtures or shall otherwise be concealed in walls, unless otherwise indicated.
Air chambers, set 800mm high full size of branch shall be installed at the end of all hot and
cold water supplies to fixtures. Shock arrestors shall be provided for all water lines to
equipment with quick opening and closing valves.
All exposed piping valves and fittings in toilets shall be chromium plated and shall be covered
according to the Specification.
During the progress of the work, open ends of pipes, tees etc. must be closed with metal
plugs, copper caps or PVC plugs appropriate to the pipe material. Plugs made from paper or
- 11 -

other material will not be allowed. Work not protected in accordance with this clause, will not
be accepted. Storage of pipes on site must be in racks and suitable measures must be taken
to prevent corrosion. Corroded pipework will be rejected.
All soil, waste and drain water piping shall grade with a fall not less than 1:50 unless otherwise
indicated.
Air gaps shall be provided on all plumbing fixtures, such as sinks, etc., and where water is
discharged over drains.
Swing joints, shall be made up of not less than three fittings on risers and on run outs from
mains to risers.
Swing joints, expansion joints or loops, or long offsets shall be provided wherever necessary
to allow for expansion of piping within the building.
Broken pipes or fittings due to stiff connections must be replaced at the Contractor's expense.
Dielectric fittings shall be used to connect non-ferrous pipe and equipment to ferrous pipe and
equipment.
All metal pipework conveying water shall be protected from electrolytic action by the
installation of non-conductive or fiber type nipples to mechanically separate copper pipes from
galvanized tanks or galvanized steel pipework. Where the water is acidic, approval shall be
obtained of the solution to avoid possible corrosion due to electrolytic action.
In areas where certain water or soil conditions could cause dezincification on brass fittings,
valves, etc. then the gun metal type shall be used throughout.
Approval shall be obtained prior to ordering materials, which may be affected by
dezincification, and the correct materials shall be used throughout the system.
Ample provision shall be made for expansion of pipework and expansion loops constructed
from steel pipe and fittings. Purpose made expansion joints and anchor points shall be
provided on the drawing or as directed by the Consultant or his representative.
All expansion loops or breaks shall be 'cold stressed'. All pipe runs shall be approved by the
Consultant before installation.
All pipework passing through walls, ceilings and floors shall be provided with sleeves of
suitable size to allow free movement of the pipes and constructed of a similar material to that
of the pipe.
Sleeves shall be of sufficient length to finish flush with finished face of wall or ceiling and 13
mm proud of the finished face of all floors except where shown otherwise on the drawings.
Sleeves shall be retained in position before making good by lugs or plates.
Cold water rising mains shall rise continuously to roof storage tanks. Localized high points
which could cause entrapment of air pockets shall be avoided, wherever possible.
Hot and cold water down services shall fall continuously to draw-off points. Where localized
low points are unavoidable they shall be provided with drain cocks to allow the complete
draining of the system. Automatic air vents shall be fitted on all high points of the systems
where air release is required for the efficient venting of the installation. Automatic vents shall
be of type B automatic air eliminator as manufactured by Charles Winn and Co., or equal and
approved, and shall be fitted on top of an air bottle formed by a square tee, short nipple and
blank cap tapped 15mm.
HWS and CWS shall be run directly to taps on sanitary fittings etc. The hot tap shall be on the
left when facing the fitting.
The Contractor shall connect up the appropriate service to all bib taps, sinks, showers, basins
and closets where required and shown on the Drawings, and fix valves for isolating purposes
on each individual draw-off.
Float pipes serving one or more draw-offs may be carried through at constant size and
terminate with a capped end.
Except where otherwise indicated, rigid pipe connections to basins shall be 15mm diameter
and 22 mm diameter to sinks.
Where chilled water pipes are indicated as being directly buried below ground, a Brunn and
Sorensen pre-thermally insulated, 6mm polyethylene sheathed pipe system, or equal and
approved shall be used.
- 12 -

14.0 HANGERS, GENERAL
All piping, run in floor construction, suspended ceiling space or roof space, shall be run
parallel with the lines of the building unless otherwise shown or noted on the drawings, and in
general as agreed by the Consultant.
Water supply pipes where applicable shall be placed at same elevation and hung on multiple
hangers.
Electrical services where possible, shall be hung above any other service pipes. The different
service pipes, valves, fittings, etc., shall be so installed that after the covering is applied there
will be not less than 15 mm clear space between the finished covering the other work between
the finished covering of parallel adjacent pipes.
Except as otherwise specified, hangers shall be spaced not more than 4 meters apart.
Hangers on different service lines running parallel and close together shall be in line and
parallel to the lines of the building. Exact location of the electric outlets, piping, ducts, etc.,
shall be coordinated between Contractors so that there will be no interference between lighting
fixtures, piping, ducts, grilles, etc.
All piping shall be supported from the building structure by means of approved hangers and
supports. No strap hangers shall be used. Piping shall be supported to maintain required
grading and pitching of line to prevent vibration and to secure piping in place and shall be so
arranged as to provide for expansion and construction. Pipes, valves shall be used where is
required to allow free movement of the pipes.
All hangers shall be secured to approve inserts wherever possible and practicable. Expansion
shields may be used in special cases. Hanger inserts shall be set in place before concrete is
poured.
All pipework located in main buildings and supported from slabs shall be isolated by means of
spring hangers.
Spring hangers shall contain a steel spring and 8mm deflection neoprene, elements in series.
The neoprene element shall be mounted with a rod isolation bushing that passes through the
hanger box. Spring diameters and hanger box lower hole sizes shall be large enough to permit
the hanger rod to swing through a 30 degree arc before contacting the hole and short
circuiting the spring. Springs shall have a minimum additional travel to solid equal to 50% of
the rated deflection. Hangers shall have a static deflection of 20 mm for pipe sizes up to and
including 80 mm diameter and 40 mm for pipe sizes up to and including 150 mm diameter.
In any case the spacing of hangers shall not be greater than the following:
a. Steel pipe - 4 meters on centers for pipe 75 mm, or larger, 3 meters for pipes 40 mm, 65 mm and 2.50 meters for pipes smaller than 40 mm.
b. Vertical lines shall be adequately supported at each floor and at their bases by suitable
hangers placed in horizontal line near the riser. Also vertical lines shall be adequately
braced to vertical walls, etc.
c. PVC pipe - depending on type as recommended by manufacturer but with following
minimum requirements.
Pipes shall be fixed to the structure at 2m centers for vertical runs and 1m centers for
horizontal runs. Brackets shall be painted galvanized mild steel and fixings shall be stainless
steel screws into raw plugs.
All brackets, supports, drop rods, nuts, bolts, hanger clips, etc., shall be either nylon coated or
galvanized and painted as described in this specification.
Provision shall be made for expansion by ensuring that spigot and socket joints are put
together with the recommended 10mm gaps.
- 13 -

15.0 FIXING STEEL WORK
The Contractor shall not drill/cut holes in structural steelwork. Where supports from steelwork
are necessary, welded or clamped brackets shall be used and provided by the Contractor in a
manner or of patterns to be agreed by the Consultant.
Where drilling of structural steelwork is unavoidable the Contractor shall obtain the express
consent of the Consultant who will require to be assured that the Contractor has sufficiently
competent and experienced workmen to execute the work in each and every case. For such
instance the Tender shall be deemed to include for all drilling.
16.0 FOUNDATION FIXING

All foundation bolts, plates, nuts, washers and packing pieces which are normally supplied for
fixing the equipment on foundations shall, unless supplied by the manufacturer of the
equipment, be provided by the Contractor. All foundations, ducts and pipes in the foundations
and concrete cable troughs with covers will also be provided by the Contractor.
The Contractor shall level and adjust the equipment on its foundations preparatory to grouting,
and all packing required for the adjustments shall be provided by the Contractor. All bedding
and grouting into walls shall be carried out also by the Contractor.
17.0 FIXING TO WALL

White bronze plugs shall be used where plugs are required for fixing equipment to concrete
block work or concrete walls. All holes for plugs shall be rotary drilled. Stainless plated steel
screws shall be used for fixings into these plugs the use of brass screws will not be permitted.
For heavier fixings into block work or concrete stainless steel projecting bolts shall be used
grouted into the walls or block work if necessary.
For heavy equipment mounted above block or concrete walls, appropriate frames shall be
fabricated and installed by the Contractor.
Stainless steel raw bolts shall be used for fixing floor mounted equipment. All other nuts, bolts,
washers etc. used for these installations shall be stainless steel.
Fixings to structural steelwork shall, wherever possible be effected by the use of stainless
steel clips approved by the Consultant. Should the Contractor wish to adopt drilling, welding or
any other method of fixing, he shall submit full details to the Consultant for approval.
18.0 ESCUTCHEONS
a. Where exposed pipes or ducts pass through floors, walls or ceilings, they shall be fitted
with a neat heavy spun or stamped brass escutcheon of an approved type firmly secured
to the pipes or duct. Escutcheons shall be of sufficient outside diameter to cover up the
sleeved openings for the pipes or ducts.
b. Escutcheons abutting against tile or terrazzo and at wall and floors shall be chromium
plated; all others shall be painted to match the color of the walls, ceilings or floors as the
case may be. Where escutcheons are not furnished, the Contractor shall provide them.
c. Where necessary to cover beads of fittings, special cast brass deep escutcheons shall be
provided.
d. Hangers for piping 50 mm or smaller shall be the split iron ring type with fastening device.
Hangers for piping larger than 50 mm shall be of the adjustable clevis hanger type.
Hanger rods shall have machine threads. Brackets of approved type may be used along
walls.
e. Any piping which has been insulated having an outside vapor barrier shall have hangers of
adequate size to include the vapor barrier.
- 14 -

19.0 WARNING TAPES
The Contractor shall install approved warning tapes during backfilling work over buried pipes,
cables, conduits and ducts, as required. Warning tapes shall be colored and suitably inscribed
for identification. Colors shall be as follows, or otherwise as approved by the relevant authority.
SERVICE TAPE COLOUR
Electrical cables/ducts Red
Telephone ducts Green
Sewers and drains Yellow
Water Pipes/ducts Blue
Irrigation pipes/ducts Orange
Warning tape shall be approved high quality, acid and alkali-resistant polythene film 250mm
wide, with a minimum thickness of 150 microns. Tape shall have minimum tensile strength of
125 kg/cm longitudinally and 105kg cm laterally with an elongation factor of 350%. Where the
service is of a non-magnetically detectable nature, approved metal-backed tape shall be used.
Tape shall be printed with 50mm high black lettering, alternatively in Arabic and English.
Wording shall be as directed. The complete wordings shall be repeated every 2m along the
tape. The colors shall be vivid, glossy and permanent with a life expectancy of 40 years.
Warning tapes shall be placed with the inscriptions facing upwards. The level of the tape
relative to the top of the service shall be in accordance with the requirements of the relevant
authority or as indicated on the Drawings.
20.0 INSERTS
Inserts for securing pipe hangers, etc., to concrete floor construction shall be set before slabs
are poured and shall be of cast iron or steel and must be of a design which will permit use of
the full strength of the bolt. They must permit adjustment of bolt in one direction and must
also permit removal or insertion of bolt or nut after installation of the insert so that different
sizes hanger rods may be used without changing the insert.
21.0 NOTES ON INSTALLATION

a. Flux
The suitability of the flux is most important.
b. Making One End Only
It is possible to make one end only if so required. Simply insert a short piece of uncleaned
tube of the correct size into the end(s) to be left un-jointed and keep cool by
wrapping a wet rag around them whilst heating the remaining joint(s).
c. Re- Making of Joints
Joints can be taken apart by re-heating the fitting and withdrawing the tube.
To re-make, flux the tinned portion of the tube and re-insert into the fitting.
Heat the assembly until the tube can be pushed fully home and the solder forms as a
ring at the mouth of the fitting.
Extra solder can be end fed if necessary. If new tube is to be used, treat as for a new
fitting, cleaning and fluxing before inserting into the socket. Solder should then be fed in
at the mouth of the socket when the new tube is in position and the assembly has been
re-heated.
Compression Joint
a. Select the correct size of tube and fitting. Ensure that the ends of the tubing are cut
square. With a fine toothed hacksaw remove burr inside and outside and check that tube
is free from reeds, deep scratches or other surface imperfections. Insert the tube up to
- 15 -

the tube stop in the fitting.
b. Tighten the compression nut by hand.
c. Complete the joint by tightening the nut a "Kuterlite" spanner is recommended. In sizes
up to 28 mm 1 to l 1/4 turns of the nut are required to key the ring on to the tube. Above
this size, experience will indicate how much additional tightening is necessary to ensure
the ring firmly grips the tube. An arrowhead is stamped on each nut as a guide to how far
it should be tightened.
Joint to Male Iron Threads
Standard male iron connections for jointing pipework to appliances (such as boilers, cylinders
or pumps, etc.) are taper male BSP threads. Before assembling these fittings, jointing
compound such as ICI 'stag' or PTEE tape (or paste) is required on the MI thread. Some of
these fittings are available with parallel male BSP threads (denoted by a P in the 'Compression
Fittings AG' catalogue).
When connecting these fittings jointing washer should be used before screwing the fitting
firmly home. It is important to observe these recommendations when installing all pipelines,
particularly when connecting airlines, as this is a most searching medium.
Joints can be re-assembled after taking apart providing this is done with care and the
components are kept clean. When re-tightening the compression nut, apply only enough
torque to 'nip' the ring. Do not over tighten.
Pipelines should always be assembled in such a manner that the joints are under neutral or
compressive stresses.
Bending
Wherever used and approved by the supervisor the bending shall be made as follows:
For the installation for plain tube between 12 and 22mm table X tube can be easily bent either
on a bending machine or with approximately sized bending springs. The spring bending shall
consist of an external and internal bending.
Bends and offsets shall be to the dimensions and provision of BS 659 or 2871. Tubes having
nominal bores up to 22 mm may be bent cold. Cut larger sizes shall be annealed before
manipulation.
In all cases, tubes shall be loaded prior to bending with springs, low melting point alloys or
inert sand, care being taken that contamination of the tube material is avoided. Where bending
Machines are used these shall have smooth clean guides and formers; any scored or
damaged tools being rejected.
Pulled bends and offsets which show flattening, rippling or contraction of the bore will not be
accepted.
For the installation of all sizes of the plastic covered tubes and for plain tubes over 22 mm
appropriately sized bending machines shall only be used, with accurately machined, matched
formers and guides, which should always be used in matched pairs.
Light Gauge Copper Pipes Welded or Brazed Joints
a. Half hard or fully annealed copper pipes having bronze welded, autogenously welded, or
brazed joints on the run shall be prepared for jointing in a manner suitable for the method
employed.
b. Bronze welding shall be to BS 1724 using bell type butt joints; the filler rod shall conform
to the requirements of BS 1453.
- 16 -

c. In instantaneous where autogenously welding is employed for welding pipes having a
wall thickness of 1.5 mm or less, joints shall be prepared by flanging out the pipe ends to
square shoulders, the projection being not more than one and half times the wall
thickness.
The flanges shall then be arranged to butt closely together and the joint by fusion of the
flanges without the use of filler rod. Where pipes have a wall thickness in excess of
1.5mm, joints shall be prepared by flaring one pipe end at an angle of approximately 30
degrees and entering the other pipe end into the socket so formed. The joint shall be
made by fusion using a copper filler rod, the rod used being to BS 1077.
d. Brazed joints shall be prepared and made to BS 1723 using brazing alloy CP 1 (15%
silver content) as specified in BS 1845.
e. All such joints whether made by bronze or auto-genius welding or by brazing shall be of
first quality. To improve the structure and homogeneity of the fused materials, welds shall
be hammered lightly whilst still red hot.
Where copper pipes are laid in floor screeds, trenches, or ground should be plastic
coated and they shall be wrapped in extra heavy-duty "Denso" tape or approved equal.
The tape shall be continuously wrapped with a 10mm overlap, and after installation shall
be wiped to a smooth finish.
22.0 INSPECTION TESTS AND ADJUSTMENTS

a. The Contractor shall test all of the equipment installed under this Specification and
demonstrate its proper operation to the Consultant. No shop or final inspection of test
results will be accepted without the prior formal notice, by letter of telefax to the
Consultant and requesting his presence during the test.
b. The Contractor shall furnish all necessary labour, fuel, and appliances required for the
tests and shall meet all expenses of said tests.
The Contractor shall furnish the electricity (generator or otherwise) and water required for
the testing of all the equipment under this Contract
The Contractor shall take all necessary measurements for the safe execution of the tests
and shall bear all the responsibility for any damage or losses that might be the result of
his actions.
c. If tests show that the work is in defective condition or at variance with the specification
requirements the Contractor shall immediately make all changes necessary to correct the
same and remedy defects to the satisfaction of the Consultant. In the event the
Contractor does not remedy all defects and make all changes demanded by the
Consultant within a reasonable time, the right is reserved to have defects remedied or
changes made and to charge the cost of same against the account of the Contractor.
d. All piping that is to be painted shall be thoroughly cleaned to remove dirt and grease or
oil. All piping shall be flushed out prior to testing of equipment and all strainers shall be
cleaned. All ducts and apparatus casings shall be thoroughly cleaned before Fans and
filters are operated. After the equipment has been tested all filters shall be cleaned or
renewed.
e. After the systems have been completed, and before each system is accepted, capacity
and general operating tests on the systems shall demonstrate the specified capacities of
the various pieces of equipment. All equipment shall be adjusted so that it will perform as
specified and required to give satisfactory operation.
The entire temperature control system shall be adjusted and placed in operation by the
manufacturer and all adjustments necessary to accomplish the specified results during
the first year of operation shall be made without cost to the Client.
- 17 -

f. Air duct systems shall be adjusted and balanced so that air quantities at all outlets are
as indicated and so that distribution from outlets is free from drafts and uniform over the
face of each outlet. Settings of dampers and other volume adjusting devices shall be
permanently marked so that they can be restored if disturbed at anytime. A written record
of final balanced air quantities shall be submitted to the Consultant for consideration.
g. Upon completion and prior to acceptance of the installation, the Contractor shall subject
the system to such operating tests as may be required by the Consultant to demonstrate
satisfactory functional and operating efficiency. Operating tests shall cover a period of
not less than eight (8) hours for each system, and all tests shall be conducted at such
times as the Consultant may direct. All instruments, facilities and labour required to
properly conduct the tests shall be provided by the Contractor at no additional cost to the
Client.
h. The entire system of soil, waste, drain and vent piping, including the interior downspouts,
shall be tested with water or air, as hereinafter described, and proved tight to the
satisfaction of the Consultant before the immediate connection is made to sewer,
trenches backfilled or fixtures connected. Testing instruments must be furnished by the
Contractor.
For water test wooden plugs are not to be used in making tests. The connections
between the building and the sewer and the drainage system below the ground floor are
to be tested separately.
i. When water is used for testing, public health systems, each connection from building to
the drainage system above or below ground floor shall be filled with water to top of a
vertical section of pipe 3 meters high temporarily connected to the highest point of the
lines to be tested. The water shall be allowed to stand at least 30 minutes for inspection,
after which, if the lines prove tight the water is to be drawn off, and connections made
with the sewer.
j. All plumbing and drainage piping, above the ground floor line must have the openings
plugged where necessary and be filled with water to the level of the main roof or tops of
vent pipes. The water shall be allowed to stand at least 30 minutes for inspection, after
which, if the lines prove tight, the water is to be drained off the fixtures connected.
k. If air is used to test the drainage systems, a pressure of not less than 500 mm must be
maintained without leakage for at least 15 minutes. A mercury column gauge must be
used in air pressure tests.
l. After piping tests all cold and hot water systems, including the hot water tank and heater
shall be tested at a hydrostatic pressure of 8 bars, before covering.
m. Any water piping run in chases in walls, or in any way concealed by structural work must
be tested to above pressure and proved tight before the pipes are concealed.
n. After the interior wiring system installation is completed and at such time as the
Consultant may direct the Contractor shall conduct an operating test for approval. The
equipment shall be demonstrated to operate in accordance with the requirements of this
Specification. The test shall be performed in the presence of the Consultant. The
Contractor shall furnish all instruments and personnel required for the tests.
23.0 TESTING OF PIPING & ACCESSORIES

Before being covered over, furred in or insulated, all piping systems shall be completely tested
and proved tight as follows:
a. Completely fill with water and hydraulically test all water circulating systems with a
pressure of at least 11/2 times the actual working pressure, but no less 106pascals.
- 18 -

b. Maintain the test pressure on each system for a 4 hour period.
c. Should any leaks or defects show up during the test, the defective sections, fittings, etc.,
shall be removed and replaced after which the system shall be retested until the results
are to the satisfaction of the Consultant.
d. Remove pressure sensing devices prior to tests.
e. The test pressure to be applied to the various services shall be as follows, and the
pressure gauge readings for these tests shall be taken at the lowest points in the
respective systems:1. Domestic hot water flow and return lines 10 bars
2. CWS and cold feed lines 10 bars
3. Drinking water lines 10 bars
4. Cold water rising mains 13.5 bars
5. Refrigerant lines 20 bars
All plugs, caps, tees, drain fittings etc. required to enable the tests to be carried out shall
be supplied by the Contractor.
f. An air test shall be applied to all waste and vent pipes as follows:
A gauge in the form of a glass U tube shall be connected to the drain plug in the section
of pipe under test. Air shall be blown into the section of the pipe until a pressure
equivalent to 100 mm of water is indicated on the gauge. Without further blowing or
pumping, the pressure shall not have fallen below 75mm after a period of 5 minutes.
g. Drains shall be water tested to the first manhole or inspection chamber outside the
building by filling to a head of 1.5m. Tests shall be carried out after jointing, after
backfilling and on completion. The tests shall be held for ten minutes without a discernible
drop in the water level.
h. The types and grades of valves etc., shall be subject to hydraulic tests at manufacturer's
works in accordance with the requirements of the respective British Standards. Valves
and fittings unless specified otherwise shall be suitable for working pressure of 10
Pascals minimum.
Body tests shall be applied with the fitting in the open position and each side opened to
atmosphere alternatively where appropriate.
24.0 TESTING ON SITE

Before testing and commissioning, the Contractor shall ensure that all electrical equipment
and installations are thoroughly cleaned both internally and externally.
Site tests shall be carried out for approval and recorded on standard test certificates and shall
include the following:
(All tests shall be agreed with the respective manufacturers).
LV Switchgear and Distribution Gear
a. Power-frequency voltage on 380V bus-bars 50HZ in accordance with BS 5486 and BS
5490.
b. Visual inspection of equipment and protective treatment including functional checks of
operating devices.
c. Phase rotation check.
d. Earth loop impedance of each phase and conductor.
- 19 -

e. Post energization voltage checks between phases and between phase and neutral.
f. Ammeter, voltmeter and energy meter calibration.
Low Voltage Cables
a. Continuity of all conductors.
b. Insulation resistance test between each conductor and between conductors and earth at
1000V DC for one minute.
External Lighting
a. Insulation resistance checks on all equipment.
b. Post-energisation functional check of lamps, contactors and associated controls.
c. Flood light must earth system tests in accordance with BS CP 1013.
Mechanical Services
a. Overload relays supplying motor drives of 15HP and above shall be injection tested as
follows:
100% relay setting current- no trip in ten minutes.
200% relay-setting current - trip time to comply with manufacturer's specifications.
120% relay- setting current with one phase removed trip time to comply with
manufacturer's specification.
b. Electric motor insulation resistance tests between windings and between windings and
earth.
c. Post-energisation test of operating and safety devices.
d. Record full-load running current of motors.
Lighting and Small Power
a. Insulation resistance test to earth and between phases on sections of the installation as
completed and also on the whole of the installation when completed in accordance with
the I.E.E Regulations Part 6, Appendix 14 and 15.
b. Earth continuity tests on each sub-main circuit and sub-circuit installed.
c. Polarity of switches and continuity of ring main circuits.
d. Discharge tests on all emergency lighting units.
In addition to these tests the Contractor shall provide readings of potential drop at various
points in the installation and current balance across the phases on all mains.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the provision of all labour and instruments
necessary for the successful execution of these tests.
e. D.C pressure tests on all armored cables in accordance with the requirements of B.S.
6364 Appendix 'B'.
25.0 OPERATION & MAINTENANCE MANUALS

I Submit three sets of each manual.
- 20 -

II Include the following documentation in the Hard & Software:
1. General description and cut sheets for all components.
2. Detailed wiring and installation illustrations and complete calibration procedures for
each field and panel device.
3. Complete trouble-shooting procedures and guidelines.
4. Complete operating instructions for all systems.
5. Maintenance Instructions: Document all maintenance and repair/replacement
procedures.
III Include the following documentation in the DDC Software Manual:
1. Sequence of Operations
2. Program listing of software source code or flow chart diagrams of programming
objects.
3. Printed listing of controller and operator work station database files.
4. Software Point Name Abbreviation List Including Name, Description, Controller Where
Located, Point Type and Point ID.
6. I/O Point List Including Point Name, Controller Location, Point Number, Control
Device, Range and Span.
7. Printouts of all Reports, Group Listings and Alarm Messages.
8. Index of all DDC point names with documentation manual page number references.
IV Provide three copies of all manufacturers manuals covering the installed system. This
shall include, as a minimum:
1. System Engineering Manual
2. System Installation Manual
3. Programming Manual
4. Engineering and Troubleshooting Bulletins
5. Operator Workstation Software Manual
6. All other pertinent manuals published by the control system manufacturer.
V Record Drawings
26.0 WARRANTY
All the MEP Maintenance will be 24 months from the date of complexion. This include routine
completion add & cleaning filters etc., shall be free from defects in material and workmanship
under normal use and service. If within twenty four (24) months from the date of completion
any of the equipment herein described is defective in operation, workmanship or materials, it
will be replaced, repaired or adjusted at the option of the Contractor free of charge.
27.0 REGULATIONS FOR AIRCONDITIONING ANDVENTILATION

a. ASHRAE "American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air conditioning Engineers,
Inc."
b. SMACNA (Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association - USA)
"Low Velocity Duct Standards".
c. British Standards CP 413 "Design and Construction of Ducts for Services".
d. NFPA (National Fire Protection Association - USA) 90-A "Installation of Airconditioning
and Ventilating systems" and / or British Standards for Fire Protection.
e. ULC (Underwriters Laboratories of Canada) S112.
f. Any fire protection local codes applicable, which will prevail over any other code.
- 21 -

28.0 ACCESS PANELS AND DOORS
a. Access doors shall be flush type with concealed hinges and screw driver operated
type lock. Doors shall open 180 degrees and have rounded safety corners, and shall
be of the following styles.
Access doors installed in masonry, concrete, tiles, brick, shall be constructed of 12
gauges steel and prime coated finish.
Access doors installed in plaster or drywall shall concealed frame and recessed
door suitable to receive plasterboard panel.
b. Lay-in type ceiling tiles, properly identified, may serve as access panels. Identify
access panel by inserting a colored pin in each of the four Corners of the panel.
c. Access doors and panels shall not be less than 300 mm x 300 mm for reach-in
application, 500 mm x 500 mm for crawl-in application and 500 mm x 1220 mm for
walk-in application.
d. Access panels located in fire walls shall have a fire rating equal to the wall
construction in which they are installed. Access panels shall be provided and installed
by the Contractor for access to conceal valves, P-traps, cleanouts, unions expansion
joints, dampers, etc where no other means of access is provided.
29.0 PIPE AND CABLE TRAYS/DUCTS HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

a. Piping and cable trays/ducts hangers, supports and swag braces shall be fabricated in
accordance with the British Standards. The Hanger rods, supports, and supporting
devices and accessories shall be capable of supporting at least twice the live loads of
the products being supported. All supporting devices shall not soften or corrode and
shall be suitable for local weather conditions.
b. Clevis hangers shall be adjustable, of yoke and lower U strap design with cross bolt,
and manufactured from stainless steel. Cross bolt shall have a double locking nut.
Vertical adjustable supporting rod shall have a load nut below the yoke and a locking
nut above the yoke.
c. Roller hangers shall be yoke and pipe roll design with cast iron roller and carbon steel
yoke. Vertical adjustable supporting rod shall have a load nut below the yoke and a
locking nut above the yoke.
d. Pipe rollers, where required and/or shown for use in connection with horizontal pipe
runs shall be constructed from cast iron and be of such proportions that a reasonable
area of contact with the pipe or other surface is provided.
e. Concrete inserts shall be factory made stainless steel poured in place type, screwed
or toggle style.
f. Concrete anchors shall be factory made stainless steel expansion shield type.
g. Pipe covering protection saddles shall be curved stainless steel plate 300 mm long
and subtend an angle of 60 degrees at the pipe center, with a radius suitable for the
pipe size and thickness of insulation specified.
h. Insulation shields shall be curved stainless steel, not less than 16 gauges thick or shall
be molded fiberglass reinforced polyester. Shield shall be complete with a saddle type
supporting segment of high density, pre-compressed fiberglass insulation and vapor
barrier, permanently affixed to the shield. Shield and saddle shall be designed to
- 22 -

support pipe without deflecting more than 3 mm.
i. Welded steel brackets for supporting loads upto maximum of 390 kg shall be carbon
steel coated with a corrosion resistant paint, and designed to accept standard hanger
rods and pipe supporting devices.
j. Riser clamps shall be stainless steel bands shaped to tightly fit O.D. of pipe, secured
with stainless steel bolts.
k. Steel screws when used are to be stainless steel. All wood screws are to be of an
approved finish and springs whenever used are to be of non-rusting materials, e.g.
phosphor bronze or nickel, silver, as far as possible.
l. When used, woodwork is to be free of sap and wane, warp, knots, faults and other
blemishes and thoroughly resistant to fungal decay and terminate attacks.
m. Nuts and bolts for incorporation in the installation are to conform to the requirements
of the appropriate British Standards. When in position, all bolts and studs are to
project through the corresponding nut at a minimum of two threads, but such a
projection is not to exceed 3/8 of an inch. All washers are to be included under this
sub-contract, including locking devices, and anti-vibration arrangements.
n. The Contractor shall include in this Tender for the supply of all necessary bolts,
screws, clips, brackets holding down bolts and all other supports including nuts,
anchor plates, washers and lugs for apparatus, fittings and materials supplied under
the Contract.
o. Holes or fixing shall not be made in ceramic tiles or similar unless tipped drills
specifically manufactured for the purpose are used. The Contractor shall report
immediately any damage to tiles arising there from to the Consultant and making good
shall be executed at the Contractor's expense.
p. The Contractor shall ascertain the thickness of all or any screeds to floor finishes and
any similar horizontal or vertical surfaces allowed by the Consultant in his designs and
shall make all the necessary adjustments to the layouts of conduits, trunking or cableways
to obviate crossovers in any one or more of these items liable to deleteriously
reduce the thickness of any screed. The Client will not allow any claim for additional
costs arising from any alterations caused by this after the submission of the
Contractor's Tender.
30.0 ACCESS TO VALVES, ETC.

Furnish and install chain operated valves, extension handles, extension oil cups or such
similar fittings for appliances as may be required to permit easy access for proper operation,
lubrication, etc of all equipment where the same is not easily accessible.
31.0 DRIP PANS

Provide an isolated 3mm thick galvanized sheet metal baked enamel epoxy coated drip pans
under water, soil, waste, return or drip piping which runs over electric switchboards, panel
boards, or electric motor starters. Drip pans shall also be installed under all lines that run
through any food preparation areas, corridors, bedrooms, window type air conditioners, valves,
etc., whether exposed or installed above suspended ceilings and below all valves which are
located in false ceilings. Each drip pan shall have a drain pipe, to discharge over nearest
available open drain.
- 23 -

32.0 INSTALLATION OF PIPES, CONDUITS AND DUCTWORK
The Contractor shall provide and fix all pipe work, conduits and ductwork required for the
complete installation. The pipe, conduit and duct runs shall be agreed with the Consultant
before the installation is commenced. The Contractor shall fix pipe work at such levels and at
such gradients as is necessary to permit the complete draining of the system and to allow any
air entrained within the system to escape.
Adequate measures shall be taken at structural expansion joints to allow for movement.
No pipework offsets will be allowed in the pipework except where unavoidable. Where
pipework is required to change direction, this shall be achieved by the use of standard fittings.
Only in cases where the change of direction is too small to use standard fittings shall an offset
bend or spring be used. Care shall be taken to allow spacing for hangers, insulation etc. The
Contractor shall match pipework, conduits and ducts, correctly where bends and offsets must
of necessity be used. Adjacent pipework for other services, where this follows the same route,
shall be fitted in the same manner and approval by the Consultant shall be obtained before
proceeding with the work.
a. Install piping and conduits promptly, capping or plugging open ends as work progresses
and making pipe generally level and plumb, free from traps, and in a manner to conserve
space for other work.
b. Routes and positions of cables and conduit, and positions of all other equipment shall be
marked out by the Contractor and approved by the Consultant before such items are
installed. These items shall be installed in the positions shown on the drawings, but
reasonable variations may be made on site to suit the steelwork, reinforced concrete
beams etc., as erected and to avoid obstructions.
c. Install drain valves at low points and automatic vents at high points of piping systems.
d. Inspect each piece of pipe, tubing, fittings, and equipment for defects and obstructions;
promptly remove all defective material from the job site.
e. Install pipes to clear all beams and obstructions; do not cut into or reduce the size of load
carrying members without the approval of the Consultant.
f. Exposed pipe, conduits and ductwork shall be lined up parallel or at right angles to
building walls.
g. Concealed pipe, conduits and ductwork shall be installed neatly and close to building
structure so that furring dimensions may be kept to a minimum.
h. Insulated pipes and ductwork shall be installed with sufficient clearance to permit
insulation to be applied continuously and unbroken around pipe.
i. Hanger rods shall be in true vertical alignment.
j. Separate dissimilar metals shall be kept from making direct contact with each other. The
supply of necessary gaskets, dielectric couplings, metal screws and clamps shall be of
same metal and finish as materials supported.
33.0 PIPE AND DUCT SLEEVES

a. The Contractor shall furnish and install sleeves in connection with all piping or ducting
passing through foundations, grade beams, walls, slabs, partitions, or other building
construction. Sleeves shall be set in concrete construction before pouring and in masonry
during construction, including priming for all wooden sleeves.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the locating, setting and anchoring of sleeves in a
- 24 -

substantial manner so that they will not become displaced. The Contractor shall consult
with the Consultant and receive his agreement before sleeving into any structure, installing
supports, etc.
b. All sleeves installed in a vertical or horizontal position and through beams shall be
constructed from heavy duty UPVC or other material as may be agreed by the Consultant.
Annular space in pipe sleeves and space around duct sleeves not greater than 50 mm
shall be tightly packed. At the end of each sleeve shall be fitted approved set screw
pattern CP cover plates. Pipe work isolation/ vapor seal shall be installed through the
annular spaces between sleeves and pipes.
c. Sleeves in exterior walls, slabs and ground beams below grade shall be installed with
approved caulking between sleeve and piping or ducting to make them waterproof.
d. Sleeves shall be of heavy duty PVC pipe for piping passing through walls and number 22
gauge galvanized iron for piping through floors except as noted below. Floor sleeves shall
be flush with upper and lower faces of floor construction. Sleeves for piping passing
through equipment room floors, not on grade, shall be heavy duty PVC pipe and shall
extend 100 mm above finished floors. Sleeves shall be of sufficient size to accommodate
pipe insulation. Pressed steel chrome plated floor and ceiling plates, split type with set
screw shall be used on un-insulated exposed pipes passing through floor, ceilings and
walls.
34.0 UNIONS, FLANGES AND VALVES

a. No union or flange shall be placed in a location which will be inaccessible after
completion of the building unless so shown on drawings or specified. Unions and/or
flanges shall be installed on each side of all special valves, regulators, etc., on the side of
each check valve, and at all pieces of equipment such as pumps, compressors, tanks,
coils, etc., in order that such equipment may be readily disconnected.
Where flange valves, regulators, etc., do not permit the removal of flange bolts, two such
devices must be separated by spool.
b. Where unions are required in lines 65 mm and under, they shall be made with brass
seated heavy pattern unions having ground joints and both sides hexagonal. All union
connections 75 mm and up shall be made with flanged unions.
c. Valves of the type as required by the service provided shall be installed on all piping
connections, supply and return, on all pieces of equipment and coils.
35.0 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS

Flexible connectors shall be installed at the suction and discharge ends of all rotating
mechanical equipment including pumps, water chillers, cooling towers and condensing units.
These connections shall be installed horizontally where possible. Flexible connections shall
also be installed where ducts cross on expansion joint in the structure.
36.0 GASKETS
The gaskets used in piping systems shall be best grade for type of service as approved.
37.0 PIPING JOINTS - CAPILLARY

Fittings shall have a solder ring. Any other or addition shall be made with 40/60 tin/lead,
solder. The following assembly shall always make:
a. Select the correct size of tube and fitting. Ensure that the ends of the tubing are cut
square.
- 25 -

b. Clean outside the tube and socket of fitting fine 'sand paper' or steel wool.
c. Apply adequate but not excessive, flux to both the outside surface of the tube and inside
surface of the fitting.
d. Insert the tube into the fitting until it reaches the tube stop and wipe off any excess flux.
e. Heat the fittings and tube, continuing until a complete ring of solder appears at the mouth
of the fitting.
f. Allow the joint to cool without disturbance.
g. Clean the joint generally.
Cleanliness is very important in soldering operations. Only 'sand paper' or steel wool should
be used, not emery cloth. If for any reason it is wished to use an oxy-acetylene torch to make
761 mm and 108 mm joints, the regulator should be adjusted to give a large soft flame,
neutral or slightly oxidizing. Keep the flame moving continuously and do not overheat.
38.0 PIPING SUPPORTS

The Contractor shall supply the pipe brackets throughout the installation. Supports shall be
suitable for continuous insulation and vapor seal. Galvanized iron brackets shall be used
above ground level at intervals not exceeding the maximum centers recommended in Table
163 CIBS Guide 1970, but maximum as specified in this specification.
All pipes shall be supported from the building structure in a neat and workmanlike manner and
wherever possible. Parallel runs of horizontal piping shall be grouped together on a trapeze
type hanger. Vertical risers shall be supported at each floor line with steel pipe clamps. The
use of wire or perforated metal to support pipes will not be permitted. Hanging pipes from
other pipes will not be permitted.
Intermediate supports should be provided for long lengths of pipe where necessary in
accordance with the following table:
NOMINAL
SIZE IN
MM
12
15
20
25
30
40
50
65
75
MAXIMUM INTERVALS
FOR VERTICAL RUNS
METERS METERS
MAXIMUM INTERVALS
FOR HORIZONT.RUNS
1.2
1.8
2.4
2.4
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.6
1.0
1.2
1.8
1.8
2.4
2.4
2.7
2.7
3.0
Copper pipework shall be fixed or supported at intervals not exceeding the following:
15mm bore : 1200mm
22mm bore : 1200mm
28mm bore : 1500mm
35mm bore : 1500mm
Exposed copper pipework shall be supported by chrome plated cast brass screw-on brackets
with round base plates, fixed with chrome plated screws.
Concealed copper pipework shall be fixed with copper saddle bands, brackets and brass
screws. Alternatively nylon material can be accepted.
ABS pipework shall be surface fixed with polypropylene saddle clips and stainless steel
- 26 -

screws. ABS pipework shall be fixed or supported at intervals not exceeding the following:
15mm bore : 600mm
15mm bore : 675mm
28mm bore : 750mm
Pipework, in the plant rooms and pump house shall be supported off "approved" cantilever
brackets built in or bolted to the structural walls having galvanized threaded drop rods where
necessary, on single ring band clips or from galvanized threaded drop rods supported from
roof beams etc. Pipework drop rods in pump houses or plant rooms shall have kinetic hangers
built into the drop rods for vibration control as manufactured by Sound Attenuators, and/or
approved equal.
Pipework installed in ceiling voids shall be supported from galvanized drop rods and band clips
carried off "cantilever brackets" bolted to the floor slab over.
Pipework installed in ceiling ducts and floor trenches shall be supported from galvanized drop
rods and band clips carried off "Unirack" bearers.
The Contractor shall supply all supports to carry all piped services covered in this
Specification.
Pipe supports, in ducts, trenches, ceiling voids and plant rooms shall be galvanized and
painted in accordance with the Specification.
Pipework shall accommodate, without distortion, all thermal linear expansion. Pipe supports
shall be of a type that allows full movement of the pipes except at fixed points that should be
provided as necessary between expansion bends or sets. Here the pipework shall be fixed by
means of anchors of approved design.
Pipe supports shall allow continuous integrity of the insulation valves and vapor seal to be
maintained.
Where anchors are used, the insulation/vapor seal shall be extended for 150 mm over the
anchor and bonded to it with coolag CP 99 or an approved equivalent compound.
Ceiling suspended and floor supported piping connected to mechanical equipment shall be
isolated from the building structure throughout the plant room areas for an external distance
run of 15 meters in the following manner.
Ceiling suspended piping shall be isolated by a combination spring and neoprene-in-shear
hangers.
The first four hangers located adjacent to mechanical equipment shall be capable of
supporting the piping at a fixed elevation during installation regardless of load changes. Floor
supported piping shall be isolated by a spring flex mounting.
39.0 EXPANSION OF PIPING

Expansion couplings and/or expansion loops, on branch offs and on distribution mains should
be provided between fixed points. Manufacturer instructions for thermal movement shall be
followed.
Where piping is installed in such a way as to prevent slight movement a seal ring shall be
used between the fixed points.
Where boss or branch connections are made into the stack the maximum distance between
that entry and the nearest fixed point shall not exceed 510 mm. For all other support and
fixing centers see table below. Where pipework penetrates fire barriers, the pipework must be
fire stopped but capable of thermal movement.
The fixed points on the stack are the drain connections and the WC branch on the first floor.
Provision for thermal movement must be made between these points. Where there are no
ground floor connections a 'Key Terrain' number 132 or number 133 caulking bush should be
used for the drain connection or approved equal.
Where a sink or other connection is made to this stack, it is preferable to use a 'Key Terrain'
number 111 expansion coupling above the connection (if access is required use a number
111). 'Key Terrain' A4 with a number 134 caulking ring on the foot of the stack or approved
equal. The WC branch should be fixed to ensure stability at this point. The vent pipe above
the bossed connections shall be provided with:
- 27 -

a. Expansion coupling above the highest boss on the stack OR
b. Seal the ring adaptor fitted to the lowest socket of the off-set.
40.0 DRAINAGE PIPING REQUIREMENTS

Access Pipes
Access pipes shall be provided at the foot of soil vent stacks 300mm above floor level, and at
bends above this level.
Long Radius Pipes
A long radius bend shall be fitted at the base of all soil, waste and rainwater stacks. Horizontal
bends in pipes below floor slabs shall have a 1000mm radius.
Rainwater Inlets
Rainwater stacks shall terminate at roof level with purpose made inlets to allow an efficient
water entry but with some provision to discourage the ingress of sand. Proprietory ferrous
inlets shall be plastic power coated and fitted with appropriate adaptors to uPVC rainwater
stacks.
Cleanouts
Cleanouts shall be provided for all drainage piping as required and directed by the Consultant.
41.0 FIXING OF UPVC PIPEWORK INSTALLATIONS

The fixings used shall comply with the following minimum requirements:
a. The wall thickness of fixings manufactured from PVC shall in no case be less than that of
the pipe with which they are to be used.
b. In the case of eared fixings the center to center dimension fixing of the holes should be
such as to avoid damage to the pipe when installing the system with the pipe in position.
c. When assembled the pipe and fixing shall provide a secure installation.
d. Where UPVC pipelines incorporate ferrous or nonferrous valves or other heavy fittings
these shall be supported independently so that their weight is not carried by the plastic
pipe. Pipe supports shall also be provided on either side of flanged connections,
especially where metal backing plates are used.
Molded plastic fittings shall also be supported.
e. Provide heat trap by extending metal when UPVC pipe, connected to the metal pipe, near
the heat exchanger(s) or boiler, and also installed positive check valves.
- 28 -

f. Every length of pipe shall be independently supported. Intermediate supports shall be
provided for long lengths of pipe where necessary in accordance with the following table:
NOMINAL
SIZE
12 mm
15 mm
20 mm
25 mm
30 mm
40 mm
50 mm
65 mm
75 mm
100 mm
150 mm
MAXIMUM
SUPPORTS
DISTANCE
HORIZONTAL
MAXIMUM
SUPPORTS
DISTANCE
VERTICAL
0.45 m
0.53 m
0.61 m
0.68 m
0.76 m
0.84 m
0.90 m
1.05 m
1.20 m
1.35 m
1.50 m
0.90 m
1.06 m
1.22 m
1.36 m
1.52 m
1.68 m
1.80 m
2.10 m
2.40 m
2.70 m
3.00 m
MAXIMUM
EXP.JOINT
DIST.VERT.
& HORIZ.
METERS
1.8
1.8
1.8
3.6
3.6
3.6
3.6
g. Any metal fixings shall be suitably protected against corrosion.

h. Screws for use in brickwork, concrete or masonry should be stainless steel, not less than
45 mm long and of minimum size number 12.
i. Pipe shall be fixed at a minimum distance (from the outside of the barrel of the pipe) of
25mm from walls.
j. Seal ring expansion joints shall be provided on fittings by means of a seal ring adaptor so
that thermal movement between fixed points can be taken up.
k. Care must be taken to anchor each unit or pipework to prevent accumulative movement
or escalation, which in extreme cases can load to pulling out of joints.
l. Seal ring joints shall be used between fixed points if they are more than 900 mm apart.
m. In suspended horizontal pipework the brackets at expansion points must be braced to
ensure fixed points. Suitable brackets are available as proprietary items or can be
purpose made. It is essential that the width of the clamping ring should not exceed 22
mm for size number 160 mm socket and 15 mm for number 110 mm or number 75 mm
socket.
n. All horizontal drainage piping shall have minimum slope of 1:50 except as otherwise noted
on the drawings.
o. Waste pipes shall be fixed to the structure at 1m centers with polypropylene pipe clips,
stainless steel screws and rawlplugs.
p. Provision shall be made for expansion by ensuring that spigot and socket joints are put
together with the recommended 10mm gaps.
42.0 CLEANING DRAINS ON COMPLETION

The Contractor shall, on completion of the work and immediately before handover, cleanse the
whole of the drains with rods and accessories, cleanse all traps and gullies, bolt down all
access covers etc. and shall leave the whole of the drainage system complete, in sound
condition and efficient working order.
- 29 -

43.0 FLASHING
a. Flashings is required but not limited to for all vent pipes through roof, A/C unit roof curbs,
under fan roof curbs shall be provided by the Contractor.
b. 50 mm or more concrete curbs shall be cast in place around duct penetrations through
slabs. After installation of fire dampers and ducting these shall be sealed with a
removable sheet metal plate and insulation.
All openings in walls and or slabs after installation is completed and have not been used,
or being necessary for return air flows should be sealed by the Contractor, as directed by
the Consultant.
44.0 DISINFECTION OF WATER SYSTEM

Upon completion of all tests and necessary repairs or replacements, all water piping systems
shall be subjected to a disinfection procedure as herein specified. The systems to be
disinfected shall include hot, cold and recirculating water piping and any other systems that
may be connected to the same supply source. The disinfection shall be applied to all piping
included in the contract from the main cut-off valve through pumps and other appurtenances
connected thereto.
These systems shall be thoroughly flushed with water to remove sediment. Following this
flushing they shall be disinfected in accordance with one of the following methods:
a. The systems shall be filled with a solution containing 50 parts per million of available
chlorine. The solution shall be retained in the systems for not less than four (4) hours
and then drained.
b. The systems shall be filled with a solution containing 100 parts per million of available
chlorine. The solution shall be retained in the systems for not less than two (2) hours, and
then drained.
After the systems are drained, they shall be thoroughly flushed with fresh water, and returned
to service.
Disinfection of services shall be carried out in accordance with the method described in BS
CP310 and the requirements of the water supply authority.
45.0 MOTORS
a. Motors:
Motors over 500w shall be in accordance with British Standard 5000 Part 99 'The
Electrical Performance of Rotating Electrical Machinery' or IEC-34-1, in respect of
mechanical details and British Standard 2757 'Classification of Insulatory Materials for
Electrical Machinery and Apparatus on the basis of Thermal Stability in Service' or
IEC-85 in respect of electrical details and the windings shall be as Class F, derated as
necessary in respect of the operating conditions.
All motors shall be in accordance with the requirements of the British Standards. All
motors shall operate satisfactorily under rated load at 10% rated voltage. Motors shall
be suitable for high ambient temperature of 60 degrees Celsius. Class "F", except
where they are in equipment that may be subject to higher temperatures e.g. air
handling units, where they shall be suitable for the operating conditions.
b. Load:
Motors shall be capable of continuous operation at rated full load horsepower or
current without exceeding rated temperature rise at site conditions.
c. Service Factor:
Motors, except totally enclosed, shall have a rated service factor of 1.15 minimum.
Totally enclosed motors may have a service factor of 1.0. Rated motor hp shall
- 30 -

exceed the calculated required Bhp of the driven equipment by 15% for single phase
motors and 10% for three phase motors.
d. Bearings & Wound:
Shall be mounted in protective housing and shall include fittings for adding, draining
and replacing the lubricant and removing cleaning and replacing the bearings. Design
shall prevent lubricants from entering the motor space during normal operation and
during lubrication.
Two speed motors shall be double wound.
e. Electrical Characteristics:
Up to 500W motors except as specifically noted shall be 50 Hz, 1 phase. 220 Volt,
motors 500W and over shall be 50 Hz, 3 phase, 380 Volt.
f. Enclosures & General:
Open, drip-proof motor or totally enclosed, fan cooled motor unless otherwise
specified.
Split, package, room and small chilled water unit compressor motors shall be special
refrigerant gas cooled 3 phase motors arranged integrally with the compressors.
Motors up to and including 5kw shall be arranged for direct-on line starting and over
5kw shall be arranged for star/delta starting, except if otherwise required by local
authorities and/or approved by the Consultant.
The cold water pumps and centrifugal fan motors shall be specially arranged for quiet
running and have one size larger frame than standard to reduce magnetic hum.
Generally, motors driving centrifugal fans through V-belts shall be arranged to run at
nominally 950 r.p.m.
Generally, motors driving pumps and compressors shall be arranged to run at
nominally 1450 r.p.m. and shall be non-overloading.
g. Standby Motors (Spares):
The Contractor shall supply one spare motor of each type used.
h. Motor Starters:
All motors shall be supplied with combined starter/ isolator switch units. Where it is
necessary to fit a second isolator, due to the remote location of the motor from the
starter/ isolator, it shall be supplied by the Contractor. The starters shall be supplied
by the manufacturer of all the panel and control boards.
Where motor starters are supplied by others the Contractor shall install and connect
as a part of the Contract Works.
All starters shall be automatic unless otherwise specified.
Care shall be taken in installing each starter to ensure that it will not be subjected to
excessive vibration during operation and ensure that overload settings are correctly
calibrated against the motor load after connection.
The Contractor shall demonstrate that the overload trips are correctly set to afford
protection to the motor.
Each starter shall be housed in a dustproof casing, having front access door. Each
starter shall be complete with the following:
On-load isolators to isolate all power and control circuits simultaneously.
Thermal trips for overload.
Single phase preventors.
No-volt trip coils with auto reset.
All necessary auxiliary contacts, switches, etc.
Contactor coil arranged to operate off 220V line voltage A.C Supply.
- 31 -

An interlock relay fitted inside. The relays shall have a 24V A.C. 2 Watt maximum
coil, contacts rated for line voltage and equipment controlled, sealed transparent
cover, pin contacts and plug in base. The relays and the wiring shall be arranged
to bring the starter control in operation.
Ammeter with protective fuse for all 3 phase starters only.
Auxiliary contacts and fuses for feeding filter motors etc.
Control circuit fuses.
Remote/local control switch. This switch shall work in the 24volt control circuits
only and not the 220v line voltage contactor coil circuit.
Local ON/OFF or where duplicate motors with automatic changeover
ON/DUTY/STANDBY/OFF or where two-speed motor the ON shall be replaced
with HIGH/LOW switch. This switch shall work in the 24 volt control circuit only
and not the 220V line voltage contactor coil circuit.
220/24 volt double wound transformer. This transformer shall be supplied from
the switched side of the on-load isolator to ensure correct control and signal
indication. This transformer shall feed the control circuits and pilot lights in the
starter and the various control panels associated with the starter.
RUN/DUTY/STANDBY/FAULT or RUN/FAULT pilot lights or if a two speed
motor, then the RUN shall be replaced with HIGH/LOW.
The Contractor shall supply and fix all automatic starters for each item of equipment and these
shall be built into control panels.
Starters for motors rated at 5Kw and over shall be star/delta.
Where particularly specified the Contractor shall supply and install an isolator switch adjacent
to each starter so arranged to achieve total isolation of the starter for maintenance and other
purposes.
Each motor frame shall be provided by the Contractor with a substantial terminal box so
arranged for the reception of not less than 25mm OD Conduit. The Contractor shall install
circuits to the motors comprising PVC or Bytul rubber insulated cable in conduit to a fixed
position adjacent to each motor on the wall, column steelwork or plinth. From each location to
the motor terminal box the end of the cable conductors shall be enclosed in PVC covered
flexible conduit will be provided by inserting a BESA through box drilled to receive a bare
copper earth wire connected to the corresponding earth terminal provided on the motor frame.
All starters shall be equipped with suitable run/trip indication lights.
46.0 ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS

a. Building voltages for this project will be:
220 volts
1 phase
50 Hz
380 volts
3 phase
50 Hz
b. All motors 1/3 HP and lower shall be 220 volt, 1 phase, 50 Hz, unless otherwise
specified.
- 32 -

c. All motors 1/2 HP and above shall be 380 volt, 3 phase, 50 Hz, unless otherwise
specified.
47.0 CABLE DUCTS LAYING

a. Ducting
UPVC ducts, including split ducts shall be Class C to BS 3506. Asbestos cement ducts
shall be Class 12, to ISO R 160 made with sulphate resisting cement. All ducts shall be
obtained from an approved proprietary supplier. Ducts shall be laid and jointed in
accordance with the general requirements for pipework, except that snap-on collars shall
be used. Longitudinal joints of split ducts shall be sealed to prevent the ingress of grout
during the placing of concrete surround.
Ducts for telephone cables shall be PVC, supplied by ETISALAT, and laid in accordance
with Etisalat requirements.
b. Trenches for Ducting
The bottom of the trench shall be leveled and rammed. If the duct is on varying gradients,
the bottom of the trench shall rise or fall gradually, and the change in slope shall not be
greater than that given by the maximum permissible deflections at joints as specified by
the duct manufacturer.
c. Bed, Surround and Backfill to Ducts
The bedding and surround for ducts shall be Zone 1 or 2 sand in accordance with Table
2 of BS 882, 1201: part 2: 1973, unless concrete surround or other details are specified
or indicated on the drawings.
The bedding material shall be tamped around the duct to a depth of 300mm above the
crown for rigid ducts or 150mm for flexible ducts, unless detailed otherwise. Filling above
this level shall be approved excavated material free from large stones or sharp objects,
and shall be compacted in layers. In multiple duct runs the spaces between the ducts
shall be filled with zone 1 or 3 sand and compacted and specified depth shall be achieved
over the uppermost ducts. Surplus excavated material shall be disposed of.
d. Depth of Cover to Cable Ducts
The minimum cover between the road surface and the crown of the uppermost duct shall
be as stated on the Drawings, but in any case should not be less than 1.0m. If this cover
cannot be achieved the ducts shall be encased in concrete.
e. Laying of Cable Ducts
Cable ducts shall be laid to the lines and at the levels shown on the Drawings or as
directed, and laid and jointed in accordance with this specification and the
recommendations of the manufacturer.
If ducts are to be laid to curves, or with small changes in direction the deflection at the
joint of each duct shall not be greater than the maximum permissible deflection
recommended by the manufacturer. Joint spacing may be reduced to a minimum of 600
mm to achieve the required curves or changes in direction.
f. Multiple Runs of Cable Ducts
Cable ducts in multiple runs shall be laid at the centers shown on the Drawings and/or as
directed by the Consultant. The final jointing of ducts shall be made in the trench; the
ducts shall be lowered and jointed singly and not in groups and joints shall be staggered
by approximately half the duct length in alternate lines.
g. Bell mouths
Electrical duct entries to draw pits, cable trenches and the like shall be provided with an
approved bell mouth.
h. Cutting of cable Ducts
Ducts may be cut as required for the work. Except where ducts enter a cable pit at an
- 33 -

angle, cuts shall be made at right angles, using a cutting guide. The inside edges of cuts
shall be rounded off and dressed to prevent damage to cables.
i. Proving of Ducts
The Contractor shall notify his intention to carry out proving tests on ducts. Cable ducts
shall be cleaned on completion by passing a mop or pig of appropriate size through twice
in each direction. Any obstructions found shall be removed and defects remedied. Ducts
for a particular service shall be proved in accordance with the requirements of that
particular service authority.
j. Draw Ropes
Cable ducts exceeding 3 meters in length shall be provided with draw ropes of pigmented
stranded polypropylene of not less than 5.3 KN breaking load. The length of draw ropes
shall be such that not less than two meters of rope protrudes from each duct end. After
the ends of ducts have been sealed the free ends of the ropes shall be securely attached
to stainless steel loops cast in to the underside of concrete slabs, as detailed on the
Drawings.
k. Sealing of Ducts
As soon as a duct or set of ducts has been proved and draw ropes installed, the ends
and bell mouths shall be stopped with approved split tapered hardwood plugs. Spare
ducts shall then be sealed to a depth of 50 mm with approved mastic sealant or by other
approved method, and a coat of bitumastic paint shall be applied over the seal.
Remaining ducts shall be sealed similarly after installation of cables.
Immediately after sealing, both ends of ducts shall be marked with suitable stakes until
permanent markers are installed.
l. Duct markers
The Contractor shall provide and fix to the road surfacing, markers to indicate the line of
each duct. Duct markers shall be of aluminum of approved design, and shall clearly
indicate the name of the service authority. The method of fixing shall be as approved by
the Consultant.
m. Cable Tiles
All un-ducted HV and LV cables laid or exposed during the contract shall be provided with
protective cable tiles.
Cable tiles shall be of PVC as manufactured by Interplast.
Each tile shall be impressed with the words 'CAUTION ELECTRIC CABLE BELOW' in
lettering 25mm high.
Cable tiles shall be laid at the depths indicated on the Drawings, or as instructed. Tiles
shall overlap cables by a minimum of 150mm on each side.
48.0 TEST: LOW AND MEDIUM VOLTAGE

Upon completion of the works, it remains the responsibility of the Contractor to test the
installation and obtain approval by local authorities.
The Consultant will require test to be carried out during the installation progress for insulation
resistance, continuity of conduits and earth connections and the ability to withdraw any single
cable. Such test will be witnessed by the Consultant.
The whole of the installation shall be tested by the Contractor in accordance with Chapter 61
of the IEE Regulations and local authorities demands and readings shall not be less than the
minimum set out in those regulations before the installation is certified as satisfactory,
provided that insulation test for mineral insulation non ferrous metal sheathed cables shall be
required to show results of at least 50 mega Ohm. At least the following tests will be required
as guidance:
- Continuity of ring final circuit conductor.
- 34 -

- Continuity of protective conductors, including main and supplementary equipotential
bonding.
- Earth electrode resistance.
- Insulated resistance.
- Insulation of site built assemblies.
- Protection by electrical separation.
- Protection by barriers or enclosures provided during erection.
- Insulation of non conducting floors and walls.
- Polarity.
- Earth fault loop impedance.
- Operation of residual current devices and fault voltage operated protective devices.
The Contractor shall serve notice on the Consultant not less than 7 days in advance of the
date upon which the Contractor will be ready to carry out the tests.
The accuracy of these tests is to be to the satisfaction of the Consultant whose decision will be
final. All tests shall be in accordance with the relevant regulations Code of Practice and byelaws
current at the time. If so required, the tests specified herein shall be carried out again at
the expiration of the Defects Liability Period in the presence of the Consultant.
Additional test for any other purpose shall be carried out and in any other way that the
Consultant may reasonably consider necessary.
The Contractor shall be responsible for and shall provide all test equipment and supply all
necessary attendance assistance materials and if so required shall demonstrate the accuracy
of the instruments used by producing on demand certificates of their accuracy. Earth continuity
shall be checked by a full current earth loop impedance tester. Insulation resistance test will
be performed using a voltage of 1000 volts. The Contractor shall execute a thorough
inspection of the complete installation to ensure its safety and that all holes in trunking
starters, switches, etc. are efficiently blanked. Where with the consent of the Consultant, the
Contractor is instructed to carry out a test or tests in the absence of the Consultant he shall
send to the Consultant certificates in duplicate of each test within 7days of each witnessing
and testing
49.0 PRESSURE GAUGES

Pressure gauges shall be provided on each cold water supply and return zone, on the outlet
of the pressurized unit, fire pumps, softener feed pumps, and anywhere else required and/or
shown on drawings.
All pressure gauges shall have a brass case with flanged neck. The movement shall be
mounted on an independent frame and shall be free from strain caused by transit, or when
fixing. The tube shall be of specially treated bronze and shall have a removable back plate to
facilitate inspection or adjustment. The gauges shall be complete with an isolating bronze
and/or stainless steel cock.
Gauges diameter of dial shall not be less than 100mm diameter. Pressure range shall not
exceed system working pressure more than 1.5 times.
- 35 -

50.0 THERMOMETERS
Thermometers shall be provided on each domestic hot water supply and return zone on cold
water feed pipe and anywhere else required on shown on drawings.
Thermometer shall be straight or angle pattern, red mercury filled 250mm scale 0oC to 120oC.
- 36 -

General Specifications for Elevators
- 37 -

GENERAL SPECIFICATION OF MACHINE ROOM LESS ELEVATORS;
PART 1 INTRODUCTION
1.0
PURPOSE
The document herein is intended to establish design requirements that shall provide a comprehensive reference
text and efficient working document.
1.1
ELEVATOR MODEL
1.
Elevator shall be new traction type machine-room-less passenger elevator.
2.
Control system shall be variable voltage variable frequency motor drive and distributed computerized
car controller series G, for low speed elevator [VFGL].
3.
The new MRL shall use a new flat type traction machine, slim type control panel and compact door
operator. Traction machine, Controller and governor shall be located at the top of the elevator well. A
hall inspection panel, which shall be used for inspection operation and emergency operation, shall be
provided at the highest landing serve behind hall button panel.
PART 2 STANDARDS
2.0
GENERAL
Comply with applicable provision of following Codes and/or Authorities, including revisions and changes in
effect on date of these Elevator Specifications:
(i)
Safety Codes for Elevator EN81-1(1998) including all relevant parts and codes of practice.
(ii)
The CENELEC cable regulation.
(iii)
The Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive (Emission of Immunity)
PART 3 GENERAL
3.0
PERFORMANCE
The following performance criteria shall be met.

A.
Capacity: Safely lower, stop and hold up to 125% of rated capacity.
B.
Stopping Accuracy: +/-10 mm under any loading condition.
C.
Acceleration: 0.55 m/s2 +/-0.1
D.
Deceleration: 0.7 m/s2 +/-0.1
E.
Starting Shock: 0-P max. 0.6 m/s2 (60 gal)
F.
Stopping shock: 0-P max. 0.6m/s2 (60 gal)
G.
Floor-to-Floor Performance Time: Performance figure shall be measured from start of doors closing
until doors are 75% open at the next landing.
900 mm single panel center opening 10.7 sec
- 38 -

This performance time shall based upon the following conditions:
Speed
1.6m/sec
Floor height
3300 mm
Landing Open
No
H.
Noise Level: Note more than 55dBA in passenger car (50dBA for 95% period) under rated speed
condition including blower noise. Noise level relating to landing floor shall be limited to max. 50dBA.
I.
Start Frequency: 1.0m/sec: 120 times/hr

1.6 m/sec & 1.75 m/sec: 150 times/hr
3.1
SPECIFICATION
A.
Rated Speed: Refer particular specification.
B.
Rated Capacity: refer particular specification
C.
Max Travel: 1.0 m/sec: 60 m;

1.6 m/sec & 1.75 m/sec: 80 m
D.
Control System: AC variable voltage variable frequency (VVVF) inverter controller
E.
Operation System: Simplex/Duplex selective collective control, for single and duplex elevators.
F.
Traction Machine: Flat type, gearless traction with permanent magnet [PM] motor.
G.
Door System: Single panel center opening (CO) or Two panels side opening (2S)
H.
Environment:
Temperature: -5C to 40C
Humidity: Less than 90 to 95% on a daily average.
I.
Power supply: Power source for elevator shall be 380-400 V/200V AC, 3-phase, 50/60 Hz, and 200240V/100-120V AC, single phase 50/60 Hz for lighting.
J.
Design Life: Equipment and wiring shall be designed for 25 years if adequately maintained.
3.2
ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY [EMC]
Elevator would include all necessary equipment to ensure that the elevator installation complies with Electro
Magnetic Compatibility (EMC) directive, EN12015 (Emission) and EN12016 (Immunity).
PART 4 CONTROLLER
4.0
CONTROLLERS CONTROL PANEL
1.
All control equipment shall be enclosed in sheet steel enclosure, with swing door at the front.
2.
The enclosed equipment shall be ventilated to prevent overheating.
3.
Provided fan and air filter to all ventilation inlet area on controllers.
4.
All drive and control equipment shall be designed to operate reliably with variations in incoming three
phase supply voltages up to 10% to +5% of normal supply voltage.
- 39 -

5.
All cabling etc., shall be routed through entries in the base of cabinet.
6.
Mount control panel on top of elevator well. The grade of protection of the control panel shall be IP21
4.1
CONTROLLERS SINGLE CAR OPERATION (2BC)
1.
Controller shall be microprocessor based simplex selective car control.
2.
The registration of hall call, when the car is parked shall automatically start the elevator and dispatch it
to the corresponding floor.
3.
If a call is registered at the floor where the car is parked, the doors shall automatically open.
4.
Once the direction of travel has been established, the car shall not reverse direction until the car calls
have been answered or until all hall calls, ahead of the car and corresponding to the direction of car
travel, have been answered.
5.
The car shall slow and stop automatically at floors corresponding to registered calls, in the order in
which they are encountered in each direction of travel.
6.
As slowdown is initiated for a hall call, that call shall be automatically cancelled and hall button for that
direction of travel at which the car is remain ineffective, until the car leaves that floor. Car calls shall
be similarly cancelled.
7.
The car shall only answer calls corresponding to the direction in which the car is traveling except that it
may answer a call in the opposite direction if that call is highest (or lowest) call registered.
8.
Registration of a car or hall calls shall cause the appropriate button to illuminate.
9.
When the call is answered the illumination of the button shall extinguished.
10.
Two hall call buttons shall be provided at each hall fixture in order that passengers may register their
intended direction of travel except at terminal floors.
4.2
CONTROLLERS GROUP OPERATION (AI-21) (OPTIONAL FEATURE)
Microprocessor based duplex selective collective control for 2 to 4 car groups.

Elevator shall operate from buttons located at each floor and in each car.
Registration of hall calls shall be assigned in accordance with self-optimising traffic supervisory system.
Car shall slow down automatically at landings corresponding to calls registered on car or hall buttons.
Car shall stop in the natural order of floors for each direction of travel irrespective of the order in which calls are
registered.
Only stop one car in response to any particular hall call.
Simultaneous to initiation of slow down to answer a hall call, cancel that call.
Hold hall button ineffective until car leaves that floor. Cancel car call in the same manner.
Cancel car call upon direction reversal.
If a car fail to respond by moving to its assigned calls, the calls shall be transferred to the remaining cars.
Upon failure of the group controller then each car shall continue to serve in back up operation.
- 40 -

4.3
CONTROLLERS FEATURES
Control features
1.
Hand Operation (HAND)
The car shall be removed from normal operation and is available in inspection operation by using
UP/DOWN button for the maintenance and etc. The UP/DOWN buttons are installed in the car and on
the car top.
2.
Load weighting start (LWS)
The car shall safely and smoothly start in spite of the unbalanced load.
3.
Safe Landing (SFL)
If there is a malfunction of power source failure and the elevator stops between floors, controller shall
perform a diagnostic check prior to moving the car to the nearest floor. In case of a power source
failure, the check is performed either after normal power has been restored or emergency power
supplied.
4.
Stop Open (SO)
When a car lands at a hall, doors shall start opening after the car stops completely.
GROUP CONTROL FEATURES

1.
Peak traffic control (PTC)
To alleviate temporary traffic congestion, cars shall be automatically assigned (in preferential order) to
floors with the heaviest traffic.
2.
Strategic overall spotting (SOHS)
After servicing all car and hall calls, the system shall forecast demand and assigns cars accordingly.
DOOR OPERATION AND FEATURES

1.
Car door switch failure
After successive door reverals or obstruction lasing longer than 25 seconds (adjustable) the doors shall
close against any obstruction exerting a controlled force limited by EN81-1
2.
Landing door interlock failure
Failure of the landing door interlock to make up if the elevator is committed to a journey shall within 8
seconds initiate a door open cycle.
3.
Door open button
At all times the `Door Open button shall be in control of door reversal and it shall be wired to and act
directly upon the door open contact via the microprocessor I/O circuits.
4.
Door close button
Operation of the `Door Close button shall initiate a door close cycle when the threshold is clear.
- 41 -

5.
Timer adjustment
All timing associated with door operation shall be adjustable on site.

6.
Normal operation
For all elevators on normal operation doors open automatically when the car arrives at a floor to permit
transfer of passengers. Door opening on passenger elevator as required meeting performance time.
7.
Expediting of door-close (EDC)
When the car is waiting with door open and the `door close button is pushed, the dwell time or notinterference time shall be ignored and door-closing operation shall be expedited.
8.
Double door operation (DDOP)
While the doors start their closing and car direction is reversed, the doors shall be re-opened.
9.
Not door open feature (DONG)
If the malfunction is detected while doors are opening, the doors shall start their closing immediately.
10. Door load detector (DLD)
If the doors are prevented from opening or closing properly, door direction shall be reversed.
11. Door sensor self-diagnosis (DODA)
If a non-contract door sensor fails, the system shall automatically determines the door closing timing to
maintain the elevator service.
12. Auto door-open time adjustment (DOT)
Door open time is automatically adjusted taking into consideration whether the call is hall call or car
call. The door interference timing shall be modulated as follows:
2 seconds if a stop caused by a registered car call. (Adjustable in the range 2-5 seconds)
4 seconds if a stop is caused by a registered hall call. (Adjustable in the range 2-15 seconds)
4 seconds if a door reopen is caused by registered hall call.
13. Auto door speed control (DSAC)
The system monitors the actual door load conditions at each floor and automatically adjusts door
closing speed and torque-limit accordingly.
14. Door nudging feature without buzzer (KNDG)
If the doors remain open longer than the pre-set period, a temporary override automatically closes the
doors.
15. Repeated door-close (RDC)
In the event that the elevator doors cannot be closed completely within predetermined time due to
presence of dust etc. in the groove of the car or landing sill, the elevator doors shall repeat their doorclosing action in order that the obstruction is taken off.
- 42 -

16. Reopen with hall button (ROHB)
While the elevator doors are closing, it is possible to re-open them by pressing the hall call button.
17. Safety ray (SR)
One infrared-light beams shall cover the full width of the door as it opens or closes to detect passengers
or objects. (Cannot be used with Multi-beam door sensor)
OPERATION FEATURES
1.
Car Call canceling (CCC)
When a car responds to the final car call in up or down direction, the system shall automatically checks
and clears remaining calls from memory.
2.
Next landing (NXL)
If the doors are unable to open fully at a destination floor for any reason, the doors shall close and the
car shall go to the next floor.
3.
Overload holding stop (OLH)
This feature sounds a buzzer to prevent an overloaded car from leaving the floor.
4.
Not start operation (NST)
When the car cannot start to respond to the calls registered for predetermined period, the abnormal lamp
shall be illuminated, and the abnormal bell shall ring on the supervisory board only.
5.
Hall computer back up operation (HCBK)
Failure of the hall controller shall immediately render the elevator system malfunction. The car shall
park at the next stop with door opened.
6.
Car computer back up operation (CCBK)
Failure of the car controller shall immediately render the elevator system malfunction. The car shall
park at the next stop with door opened.
7.
Continuity of service (COS)
A car experience trouble shall automatically withdrawn from the group operation to protect overall
group performance.
8.
Automatic hall call registration (FSAT)
If a car cannot carry all waiting passengers because it is full, another car shall automatically be
dispatched for the remainder.
9.
Backup operation for group control microprocessor (GCBK)
The backup function prevents the loss of group control due to a microprocessor or transmission line
failure.
10. Power on re-leveling (PORL)
- 43 -

If the elevator doors cannot open fully at the designation floor for any reason, the doors shall close and
the elevator proceed to the next floor.
SIGNAL FEATURES
1.
Direction arrows in car (DAC)
Arrows shall inform the car service direction of elevator at car.

2.
Direction arrows on halls (DAH)
Arrows shall inform the car service direction of elevator at halls.

3.
Click-type car/hall call buttons (CBE/PIE)
For the convenience of visually impaired passengers, soft-click touch and tactile buttons shall be
standard.
SERVICE FEATURES
1.
Independent service (IND)
A car shall be isolated from group service and used without interruption using the button combination
(standard) or the override switch in the car operating panel (Optional).
4.4
CONTROLLERS CAR RESCUE OPERATION
1.
An emergency electrical operation shall be provided which under define emergency conditions takes
over the normal control of the elevators from the base controller.
2.
The changeover shall be smooth and bumbles at the onset of operation when the base control system
changes from the car to hall control at the top floor hall panel.
3.
This operation shall not affect the base control system, which shall remain resident at all times.
4.
It shall be possible to manually control the direction of travel up or down from the hall operation panel.
5.
With manual rescue the brake release by pushing the BKD switch in the hall inspection panel.
6.
An indication (marking on governor rope) is given to the maintenance personnel through inspection
window, whilst they are by the hall inspection panel.
7.
Inside the car there are no car call buttons etc. operative.
PART 5 TRACTION MACHINE

5.0
DRIVE SYSTEM
A.
All drive system shall be close loop AC variable voltage variable frequency (VVVF)
B.
Power system (VVVF)

1.
Simultaneous control of voltage and frequency allowing smooth, accurate control of a purpose
manufactured permanent magnet motor shall be provided.
2.
Speed feedback shall be direct driven pulse encoder connected to a digital speed regulator circuit.
- 44 -

C.
3.
Motor speed-signals shall be fed back and compared to the speed reference signal and the drive
shall generate voltage reference signals.
4.
Voltage reference signals shall drive the gate control and thus the output voltage of the IGBT stack
by pulse amplitude modulation.
5.
Current from the inverter shall be controlled by pulse width modulation ensuring high power factor
performance.
6.
The current waveform shall be controlled to provide a sinusoidal waveform in order to minimize
torque ripple in the motors and provide smoother ride quality.
7.
The complete drive unit shall be dead each time the elevator stops.
8.
The drive controls shall ensure that once a elevator is committed to a journey there shall be
immediate movement when the landing locks have made up.
INVERTER DESIGN
1.
Inverter shall be of substantially low noise flux vector control type utilizing IGBT (Insulated Gate
Bipolar Transistor) technology with a matched power filter for reducing high frequency noise.
2.
The forward converter for AC to DC shall utilize diodes with smoothing capacitors.
3.
A true high frequency sine wave PWM (Pulse Width Modulation) regulator shall be used for the
gate control circuit.
4.
a modulated frequency to 10 kHz shall be used.
5.
A fully digital 32-bit speed regulator shall be utilized to supply the current command for variable
frequency.
6.
The following minimum provisions shall be demonstrated:
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
Over current detection and protection circuit shall be incorporated for inverter.
Over voltage protection device for suppression of surge voltages in the main supply.
Speed monitoring circuits to continuously police and so prevent elevator over speed.
Single phase protection device shall be incorporated in control panel.
Diode converter shall be provided to protect reverse phase.
5.1
FLAT TYPE GEARLESS TRACTION MACHINE
1.
Only gearless traction machine shall be used, and located at the top of the elevator well.
2.
Each gearless traction machine shall be capable of having 180 degrees of single roping arrangement
and incorporate an AC permanent magnet motor, brake system, and rope retainers mounted in proper
alignment on a common, isolated support.
3.
All gearless machines shall be equipped with inboard bearings and four, five or six of 8mm diameter
hoist ropes shall be used. The number of hoist ropes shall be chosen to meet the requirements of Owner
specification.
4.
Provided digital pulse encoder for close-loop motor-control mounted on each hoist machine. The drive
arrangement shall be direct type drive.
5.
Isolated the machine and support as a whole assembly from the guide rails with isolation rubber shear
resilient mountings.
- 45 -

6.
Sheave diameter shall be 410mm. The insulation resistance of any conductor to the motor frame or
earth shall not be less than 0.5 Megaohm at 50 degrees centigrade. Class F insulation shall be provided.
7.
The traction sheave shall have V shaped profile grooves.
8.
The fail safe brake shall be adjusted at the manufacturers works to provide a braking torque per EN811 required to elevator full load plus 25% in the up direction.
5.2
PM MOTOR
Means shall be provided for easily lubricating the inboard bearings in the traction machine.
5.3
DOUBLE DRUM BRAKES:
1.
All brakes shall be electrical mechanical type.
2.
The brake shall be able to release in order to bring the car to the floor level in an emergency operation.
5.4
STOPPING ACCURACY
1.
Automatic stopping accuracy
2.
Stop car within 10mm above or below the landing sill.
3.
All elevators shall avoid over travel as well as under travel and maintain accuracy regardless of load in
car or direction of travel.
PART 6 HOISTWAY EQUIPMENT

6.0
GUIDE RAILS
1.
All guide rails shall be T-profile type for car and counterweight. The ends of guides shall be tongue
and groove joints.
2.
All guide rails supplied shall comply with the ISO 7465/97 standard.
3.
T89/B guides rails size shall be used.
4.
Each section of guide rails shall have a minimum of two fixings. The pitch of fixing shall be 2,500 mm.
5.
Manufacturer shall supply all clips, inserts, guide rail bracket, fishplate etc. as necessary for guide rail
fixings at and between floors to achieve necessary pitch of fixings, requisite ride quality, compliance
with standards and this specification.
6.
All fishplates and bolts supplied shall be proposed manufacturer steel block construction. The fishplate
shall be identical unit modulus to the guide rail section itself.
7.
The manufacturer shall ensure that there is sufficient length of guide to ensure that no part of the car or
counterweight guide shoes could run off the guides.
8.
All guides, sole plates and fixings shall withstand the forces imposed on them when safety gear operates
under full contract load in over speed condition. Adequate sole plates shall be fitted to the foot of each
guide.
9.
Provided automatic rail lubrication devices with purpose made fixing arrangement.
- 46 -

6.1
BUFFERS
1.
Provided all elevators with oil buffers complete with blocking to suit pit depth.
2.
Mount buffer on continuous steel channel securely fixed to pit floor.
3.
Provided electric safety switches on buffers per EN81-1 to ensure elevator cannot operate if buffer is
compressed.
4.
There shall be no permanent deformation of the buffer when it absorbs the impact of stopping the car
(with up to 125% of the car load) or counterweight at contracted speed with contract capacity.
6.2
SHEAVES
1.
Sheaves with machine grooves and ball bearings.
2.
Provided all necessary mounting means to support sheaves on guide rails, car and counterweight
structural member.
3.
Provided rope retainers on all sheaves.
4.
Provided all underslung sheaves with steel frame incorporating buffer striking plate and mounting it on
the car sling.
5.
All sheaves shall be manufactured from grey iron casting.
6.3
GOVERNORS
1.
The governor shall be centrifugal-type, car and counterweight driven with bi-directional electrical
shutdown switch.
2.
Provided overhung supports required for attachment to guide rails. Governor shall be within bounds of
the top of the elevator well.
3.
Governor rope gripper shall provide adequate pull through force to enable satisfactory operation of
safety gear.
6.4
GOVERNOR PIT-TENSIONING SHEAVE
1.
The tension sheaves shall be mounted to the rail support, and each provided with vertical guide
assembly to enable free vertical movement. The governor tension weight pulley shall be pivoted.
2.
The tension weight pulley shall be restrained by a stopper to prevent the rope being pulled up a
significant distance.
3.
A broken/slack rope switch shall be fitted to the governor tensioning sheave. The switch would operate
in both in the case of the rope breaking or the rope being stretched.
6.5
HOIST AND GOVERNOR ROPES
1.
The 6 x Fi(25) + IWRC ordinary lay, dual tensile construction, 8mm diameter shall be used for all hoist
ropes.
2.
Governor rope shall be 6mm diameter to suit manufacturers governor specification.
3.
Dead-end hitches shall be provided with rope shackle rods having screw adjustment to equalize tension
in all ropes. Provided shackle rods with compression springs to equalize tension during running.
- 47 -

4.
The minimum factor of safety shall be 12.
6.6
NORMAL AND FINAL TERMINAL STOPPING DEVICES
1.
Normal and final terminal stopping devices shall be supplied and fitted per EN81-1 para10.5.1.
requirements.
2.
Switches at terminal levels shall be operated by a fixed ramp attached to the car sling.
3.
The ramp shall extend half the height of the car sling.
4.
A limit switch shall be situated at the top of the shaft to work in conjunction with the inspection control
station when the elevator is traveling on inspection.
5.
Operation of this limit switches by a fixed ramp on the car shall ensure that the elevator car stops with
sufficient headroom above it.
6.7
TRAVELLING CABLES
1.
The 300/500 V grade elevator traveling cables shall be used and they shall comply with EN 50214.
Cables shall be located in the hoistway. The traveling cables shall be terminated in car top station.
2.
Manufacturer shall fix the positioning of the traveling cables in ensuring the static balance of the car is
maintained at all time.
3.
Restraining points shall provide adequate secure to traveling cables in all car station compartment so
that their weight is not transferred to any of the electrical connections.
4.
All traveling cables shall have a flame retarding and moisture resistant outer cover.
5.
All traveling cables shall be flat type.
6.
A traveling cable shall consist of 24 cores and cross section area of each conductor is 0.75 sq. mm.
6.8
COUNTERWEIGHT
1.
Counterweight shall be of steel channel frame construction with steel and cast iron sub-weight.
2.
All counterweight sub-weights shall be checked to ensure they are securely fixed to the counterweight
frame such that no noise emanates from the entire assembly during travel.
3.
All counterweight frames shall be constructed as to withstand the impact of buffer operation.
6.9
PIT STOP SWITCH, PIT LIGHTING AND INTERCOM
1.
Provided a pit stop switch per EN 81-1 accessible from landing of lowest level served (by other).
2.
Provided a substation intercom in the pit in accordance with EN 81-1.
3.
The lowest hoistway lighting fitting shall be within 500mm of the pit floor.
6.10
LOAD SENSING
1.
Provided at shackle mounted a pulley system device to detect the movement of traction rope at pulley
rope ends to weight passenger load in each elevator.
2.
Manufacturer control system design shall provide a load sensing system that shall be able to detect the
gross weight of passenger during a time period when there is no acceleration or deceleration of the car.
- 48 -

PART 7 HOISTWAY ENTRANCE EQUIPMENT

7.0
HOISTWAY DOORS
1.
The door emergency release key mechanism shall be of EN 81-1 approved type and standardized
throughout the station.
2.
The emergency release mechanism shall be located such that it is easily operated using the release key.
3.
The release key aperture shall be triangle type. The release key mechanism shall utilize the rear face of
the door as a mounting position.
4.
All landing hanger rollers shall be of metal and rubber construction and two rollers fitter per landing
door.
5.
No metal to metal contact shall exist between rollers and top of track.
6.
All hanger rollers shall be 48 mm diameter fitted with bearings with rubber tyres.
7.
they are universal and individually replaced by on site maintenance personnel and fitted at the extreme
ends of each door panel.
8.
The fixing of any landing door hanger roller bracket to the door panel shall employ tapped holes in a
steel block, which has been welded to the rear of the door panel/
9.
All bottom door guide pieces shall be adjustable and have small clearance between guide piece and sill.
All bottom door guide pieces shall be designed for easy removal and renewal.
10.
The running clearance between car and landing sill shall not exceed 30 mm.
11.
All normally visible surfaces of landing door panels and architraves etc. shall not display any method of
fixing eg. Pop rivets, cover strip, etc.
12.
Each panel of center opening landing door arrangement shall be mechanically linked (belt) to adjacent
panel, the panel that is not mechanically locked being biased closed by suitable and separated closer
such that it shall remain in the closed position if the (belt) breaks.
13.
The center opening arrangement shall be electrically and mechanically interlocked in one landing door
panel.
14.
The landing door coupler mechanisms shall be of all metal construction except for the rollers, which
shall be manufactured from hard rubber. For two panels center opening arrangements couplers shall be
provided on one door as both doors shall be positively driven.
15.
Means shall be provided so that subsequent to final adjustment each landing door coupler unit is pinned
in its position.
16.
The coupler roller assembly shall be manufactured from steel and the emergency release mechanism
shall be so located such that it is easily operated using the release key. The release key aperture shall be
adequately reinforced.
17.
Closer shall be weight type only. Bias weight closer arrangement apply closing force at a low level
upon the door panel.
- 49 -

7.1
TOE GUARDS, DUST AND HANGER COVERS
1.
All shall be manufactured from steel and flat on each vertical edge.
2.
Header support plates to which the top track is formed shall be sufficiently thick.
3.
Pan type screws shall be used for securing the apron to the landing sill.
7.2
ARCHITRAVES
1.
All architraves shall be of manufacturer material, pattern and design.
2.
They shall be fixed as in integral part of the landing entrance assembly running from the slab fixing
upwards.
3.
They shall be fixed to the entrance sill by means which ensures that tracks is clear over the whole length
of the sill, thus allowing debris free movement over the whole distance of the sill.
7.3
SILLS AND SILL SUPPORT ANGLES
All sills (car and landing) shall be single piece, and solid aluminium extruded type or optional formed stainless
steel.
They shall extend over the full bottom door guide pieces operating distance (open to close).
All sills shall be capable of taking 400 Kg moving trolley across without deflection.
PART 8 CAR DOORS AND DOOR OPERATORS

CAR DOORS, HANGERS AND TRACKS
1.
All as indicated in hoistway entrance doors, hanger and tracks.
2.
All door panels shall withstand a thrust of 300 N without deformation complying with EN 81-1 strength
requirement.
3.
Car door panels shall be designed so that they overlap the clear opening by a minimum of 20 mm.
4.
Car door hanger rollers shall be located at the extreme ends of the top of each car door pane.
CAR HEADER
Car header shall be constructed of metal, shaped to provide stiffening flanges, securely mounted to the car top.
CAR DOOR CONTACT

1.
A car door contact shall be fitted to each panel of the car door.
2.
It shall be located in a position above the hanger that is inaccessible to interference by passengers.
3.
The car door contacts shall be wired such that the hoistway interlock circuit is dead once the car door
opens.
- 50 -

DOOR OPERATOR AND OPERATION
1.
All door operators shall have close loop control and accomplish reversal of door movement after door
open button is pressed.
2.
Facilities shall be available to adjust the opening, closing and nudging speed profiles.
3.
Provided three phase A.C. slim type permanent magnetic motors with VVVF speed control and RISC
microprocessor (i.e. reduced instruction set computer) to detect the door load and adjust the door speed
and torque. A compact type motor shall be coupled to the mechanical link directly.
4.
This shall be the means of motor size reduction that afford a compact type door operator.
5.
All car door operating equipment shall be supported by the car sling member.
6.
If the doors remain open longer that the pre-set period, a temporary override automatically closes the
doors.
E.
DOOR REOPENING DEVICES
1.
Door reopening device shall be accomplished on all elevators by a solid state, electronically operated
infra red device mounted on the car door.
2.
It shall utilize one beams of invisible infra red (SR) passing across the car threshold which shall detect,
through the breaking of any beam by an opaque object that may be placed in its path, the presence of
any person or object in the threshold and cause door reversal.
3.
Mechanical door edges (SDE) shall be an option. The sensitive mechanical door edges detect
passengers or objects upon contact during door closing.
4.
An optional independent form of detection system of which must scan well in front of the landing
threshold shall be capable of detecting the presence of persons or trolleys etc.
5.
Multi beam type infra red device shall be an option.
PART 9 CONTROL AND SIGNAL FIXTURES

CAR OPERATING PANELS AND PUSH BUTTONS
1.
Destination floor buttons incorporating illuminating alarm button, door open and close buttons, car
direction indicator, intercom (with speaker and microphone) etc. shall be located upon the car operating
panel provided in each elevator car.
2.
The alarm button shall be of plastic (yellow) and letter mark is grey. It shall send a distress signal to the
supervisory room where the intercom facility is located and automatically enable voice communication.
Optional feature except in EN 81-1 type.
3.
Each car operating panel shall be equipped with door open and door close buttons.
4.
These two buttons shall be mechanically actuated push buttons and shall be partially illuminated.
5.
All push button shall be manufactured to withstand intensive use by passengers.
6.
The illumination of these destination buttons shall be LED illuminated.
- 51 -

7.
There shall be minimum operating clearance between the mechanical actuated push buttons and the car
operating panel.
8.
The face surface of all button shall however always be set above the surrounding surface of the car
operating panel.
9.
All operating fixtures shall incorporate an earthing stud to which an earth wire shall be attached.
10.
Name plate of all elevators shall be displayed with the capacity and number of person.
11.
Each elevators shall contain a service panel mounted at a low level height within the car operating
panel.
12.
It shall be stainless steel, vandal resistance, hinged, lockable door matching exactly the car operating
panel finish.
13.
The service panel are able to contain the following controls with each control and its operating position
identified by letters:
(i)
A cab light and fan on and off switch (Optional)
(ii)
An independent service (IND) selection switch to permit the selection of independent or
automatic operation (Optional)
(iii)
Inspection service (HAND) operating switch, up and down pass and door control
buttons for passenger elevators (Optional)
(iv)
A start button for closing the doors and starting the elevator when operating on independent
service (Optional)
9.1
CAR POSITION INDICATORS/MESSAGE INDICATORS
1.
Digital position indicator combined with separate car direction indicator and car message indicator shall
be provided.
2.
They shall be installed, flush mounted, at high level, in the car operating panel behind coloured glazed
panel.
3.
The indicator shall consist of arrays of LED.
4.
These indicators shall indicate car position at all times, direction of travel at all times, and its status
changes if not on normal service.
5.
Provide back lit indicator for up to 3 messages.
6.
On all car position indicators, when a car leaves or passes a floor, illuminate floor legend representing
position of car in hoistway.
7.
Illuminate proper direction arrow to indicate the direction of travel.
9.2
HALL PANEL AND PUSHBUTTONS
1.
Hall buttons shall be micro movement push buttons with LED illumination on button.
2.
Push buttons shall illuminate corresponding direction of travel upon push button.
3.
Provided permanent no illumination of buttons when calls are not registered.
9.3
HALL INSPECTION PANEL
1.
Provided at a location specified by the manufacturer (behind the top landing hall panel) a panel with
control fixtures, indicators and window for rescue purpose.
- 52 -

2.
Panel shall contain buttons and switches for maintenance use of list and provided all facilities for
emergency rescue.
3.
Panel shall contain the following:

(i)
Up and down, run command
(ii)
Brake release
(iii)
Main power on and off key switch
(iv)
Door on/off command
(v)
Inspection hand/auto selection feature
(vi)
Rescue on/off command
(vii)
Emergency light
(viii)
Well light
(ix)
Emergency stop
(x)
Status indicators
(xi)
Inspection window
(xii)
Emergency electrical operation on/off command
PART 10 CAR EQUIPMENT

10.0
CAR FRAMES
1.
Car frames shall be welded, rolled and formed steel channel construction.
2.
The elevator car sling shall be of substantial proportions to withstand operation of the safety gear
without permanent deformation.
3.
Car sling shall substantially extend over the whole of the platform and additional support shall be
provided by four turn buckle bracing rods extending from the stile to the extremities of the sling ensure
the platform is maintained level and uniform.
4.
The car frame shall not extend above the cross members of the car sling to accommodate sliding guide
shoe assemblies at maximum displacement upon the car sling.
5.
The design, construction and engineered factor of safety of all car sling shall be manufacturer type with
damping elements between car sling and car enclosure.
10.1
CAR PLATFORM
1.
Provided rubber isolated type platform, constructed entirely of steel.
2.
Manufacturer shall provide a reinforced base to the platform of all passenger elevators.
10.2
GUIDE SHOES
1.
The car and counterweight of all electric traction elevators shall be fitted with four sets of sliding guide
shoes.
2.
The sliding guide shoes assemblies shall be above and below the cross member of the car sling.
3.
Each guide shoe shall incorporate a replaceable high polymer polyethylene resin.
10.3
INSPECTION CONTROL STATION
One unit, meeting EN 81-1 requirements, shall be fitted to car top of each elevator in a position such that it is
within each reach of the landing sill.
- 53 -

10.4
CAR TOP CONSTRUCTION
1.
All car top wiring shall be so arranged that no damage to it can result from two persons working
anywhere on the car top.
2.
This shall be achieved by the construction. That is, above the elevator car roof, of car top, working
platform shall be extended over the whole top of car area which shall adequately support the weight of
two average persons standing at any point on it without such weight causing permanent damage to the
elevator car ceiling.
3.
A permanent collapsible car top handrail shall be mounted around the car top.
4.
It shall comprise of left and right balustrades, horizontal member together with one interlocks to detect
fully erected balustrade, and one for fully collapsed and secured position.
5.
The permanent car top rail shall be electrically interlocked such that only when fully collapsed can the
car move on full speed.
6.
The clear standing area on the car roof shall have at least 0.12 m2 in which the lesser dimension is at
least 0.25 m.
10.5
SAFETY GEAR
1.
The safety gear cams shall be positively interlinked and depend for their operation upon an independent
steel wire rope actuated by tension from the tripping of the over speed governor.
2.
A break switch not dependent upon springs shall operate when the safety gear cams are engaged.
3.
A flexible guide clamp safety gear shall be used on all elevators.
4.
The design of all operating rods, pivots, linkages etc. which serve to operate the safety gears shall be
made by manufacturer.
PART 11 ELEVATOR CAR ENCLOSURES

11.0
CAR CONSTRUCTION
1.
The side walls and rear of the car shell substructure shall be constructed of metal panel and shall be so
arranged that they may be removed individually for replacement purposes when damaged in service.
2.
These panels shall be bolted together from the exterior.
3.
Skirting panels shall be integrated with the floor, extending 75 mm above the car platform.
11.1
CAR ROOF
1.
Reinforced steel backed with channels.
2.
Suitable to withstand weight of two mechanics working anywhere on the car roof without causing
damage to ceiling finishes or any permanent deformation.
3.
The car internal panel shall be painted as per manufacturers standard.
11.2
VENTILATION
1.
Fitted a 100V 2-speed or 200C 1-speed ventilator mounted on the cab ceiling.
- 54 -

2.
The flow of ventilator is aversely 4.5 +/-0.5 cube m. per min.
3.
The whole assembly shall be mounted on rubber grommets for isolation.
4.
The blower shall draw the hoistway air into the cab.
5.
Car shall have a natural ventilation located in car side wall at low level in accordance with EN 81.
11.3
FLOORING
1.
Hard wearing vinyl tiles 2 mm thick or rubber tiles (Optional), mounted to the platform with suitable
adhesives.
2.
Kick plates / Skirting shall be used along the sides and rear of the car at low level abutting the flooring.
11.4
CAR LIGHTING
Provided ceiling design complete with all necessary lighting and wiring.
11.5
CAR DOOR PANELS
All as indicated in hoistway door

11.6
CAR OPERATING PANEL
1.
Provided stainless steel finish, 2 mm thick, shall be reinforced such that it shall not deform or deflect at
any point when subjected to hand pressure.
2.
The entire units are shall be mounted on the side wall.
- 55 -

GENERAL SPECIFICATION OF OVERHEAD TRACTION ELEVATORS:
ELEVATOR INSTALLATION
REQUIREMENTS:
The Elevator shall be supplied and installed BY AN APPROVED MANUFACTURER TO
CONSULTANTS APPROVAL.
The work will be carried out concurrently with the work of the Building Contract and the
Main Contractor will be required to carry out certain work in connection with the Specialist
Sub-contract.
BUILDER'S WORK AND ATTENDANCE
The main contractor is to allow for all builders work as per requirements of the Elevator Subcontractor listed elsewhere in connection with the elevator installation.
The Main Contractor shall also provide normal attendance including all usual facilities for the
execution of the Specialist Sub-contract.
AS-FITTED DRAWINGS AND SERVICE MANUALS
On completion of the elevator installation and at least one week prior to the date of inspection,
the contractor shall hand over to the Engineer as-fitted elevator installation drawings. Two
sets of instruction manuals for general running and maintenance and repair are to be provided.
GENERAL
The contractor shall supply, install., test and commission and hand over the complete elevator
installation as specified
The general requirements of the elevators and particular specifications are given in the
Schedules at the end of the specification.
The Contractor shall commence the electrical installation from the circuit breakers provided
in the machine room for this purpose. All the works shall be co-ordinated with the other
Contractors prior to installation, so that there will be no areas of incompatibility.
The elevator system shall be equipped with traction machinery and associated traction
equipment, elevator cars, solid state control systems and all other equipment and accessories
required to provide a complete, modern, durable and efficient vertical transport system.
All the electrical equipment shall be compatible with the available electrical system of the
building, as specified under Electrical Section.
- 56 -

All the components shall be selected to provide satisfactory operation under prevailing
environmental conditions at site.
The contractor shall be responsible for the complete maintenance of the elevator for a period
of 12 months from the date of acceptance by the Engineer of the complete elevator installation
and shall include for cleaning, oiling and inspection of the elevator and all the associated
equipment at periods of one month and to include for all emergency calls throughout the 24
hours of the day through the failure of the elevator to operate normally.
A monthly inspection sheet shall be submitted to the Engineer immediately after each
monthly inspection and cleaning and greasing.
The Contractor shall also give notice that any fault notified will receive immediate attention
on the day of the notification.
CAPACITY
Each Elevator shall have a safe carrying load inclusive of weight of complete car cable and
ropes and in accordance with the attached schedule.
SPEED
The rated speed of the elevators shall be as specified in the Schedule.

ELECTRIC ELEVATOR
TRACTION MACHINE
The elevator shall be equipped with variable voltage and variable frequency controlled geared
motors, having stepless, smooth speed time characteristics.
The traction machines shall be designed to meet the severe service condition encountered in
the elevator operation.
Traction sheave, hoisting motor, electromagnetic holding brakes etc. shall be mounted on a
heavy steel bed plate. The steel bed frame shall be mounted on a suitable vibration damper to
isolate the machines from the structure of the building.
All rotating parts shall be statically and dynamically balanced to ensure smooth running. All
the rotating electrical machinery shall be fitted with microtherms, to provide overload
protection.
The winding insulation levels of the motors shall be of Insulation Class `b'.
MOTOR DRIVE
The variable voltage, variable frequency motor drive [VVVF] unit will control the motor
speed using a microprocessor.
- 57 -

The VVVF system will be provided with a converter which performs AC-to-DC conversion
and an inverter which is designed to invert DC to three-phase variable voltage variable
frequency AC. The inverter will give an output of sinusoidal current with zero [0] through
fifty [50] hertz by application of pulse width modulation technology.
The inverter will control voltage and frequency continuously and accurately in accordance
with speed command signal which is performed by a microprocessor in the elevator
controller.
The VVVF drive unit will be capable of keeping the elevator service under the following
condition:
Supply line voltage fluctuation:
Frequency variation
- 10% to +5% from the rated voltage.

- + 2% from the rated frequency
The VVVF drive unit will be provided with contactors for removing the power from the
motor of the traction machine. The contactors will open each time the car stops. The brake of
the traction machine will be applied while the contacts drop out.
A pulse rotary encoder will detect the actual speed of the car. The difference between the
speed command signal and the actual speed measured by the pulse rotary encoder will control
the motor speed while the car is accelerating, decelerating and landing.
Protective devices will ensure to open the main circuit between the VVVF unit and the motor
of the traction machine to stop the elevator when one of the following conditions occurs:
Phase reversal, phase failure, failure of supply voltage, overcurrent, overheating of
thyristor and transistor, operation of any safety device.
CONTROL SYSTEM
The control system will consist of the VVVF motor drive unit and a computerized controller.
A computer controlled regulator will control the car speed by comparing the actual car speed
detected by a pulse-rotary encoder with an ideal speed pattern generated by a microprocessor.
While the car is accelerating, the ideal accelerating pattern will be generated by the
microprocessor to obtain the smooth and optimum acceleration.
While the car is decelerating, the microprocessor will calculate and provide the ideal speed
pattern to obtain the comfortable and stable riding performance.
At landing, a smooth landing pattern will be generated by a microprocessor, and as soon as
the car has stopped, the mechanical brake will be applied to hold the car.
- 58 -

OPERATION:
A)
IF SINGLE CAR:
1.
The operation will be of UP/DOWN selective collective type.

The operating equipment will consist of a series of micro touch buttons in THE car
numbered to correspond to the various landings, a single riser of "Up" and "Down"
buttons at the intermediate landings and single button at the terminal landings, all
connected electrically with the microprocessor governing floor selection and direction
of travel to supply the operation described below.
2.
THE car will be normally parked with doors closed at the main floor.
3.
THE car will answer its car calls of all floors respectively.
4.
Response to hall calls will be on the basis of same direction priority response, long
waiting time prevention etc.,
B)
IF TWO CAR GROUP AND ABOVE:
1.
The operation will be of GROUP selective collective type.

The operating equipment will consist of a series of micro touch buttons in each car
numbered to correspond to the various landings, a single riser of "Up" and "Down"
buttons at the intermediate landings and single button at the terminal landings, all
connected electrically with the microprocessor governing floor selection and direction
of travel to supply the operation described below.
2.
One car will be normally parked with doors closed at the main floor and the other will
be a "Free" car which parks with doors closed at its last call floor.
3.
Each car will answer its car calls of all floors respectively.
4.
The microprocessor calculates penalty values for such things as by-passing, reversal
and response by distantly positioned elevators and assigns the call to the elevator that
will minimize the total penalty value.
5.
Response to hall calls will be on the basis of same direction priority response, nearest
cage response, long waiting time prevention, car bunching prevention etc.,
HOISTWAY EQUIPMENT
A)
GUIDE RAILS
For smooth running of the counterweight and the elevator car, guide rails with steel
tee sections shall be installed, covering the entire height of the elevator shaft. The rails
shall rest on the hoistway pit to prevent exerting any physical forces on hoistway
ceiling or walls of the building.
- 59 -

Proper expansion joints shall be provided to withstand forces created on temperature
variations.
B)
HOISTING ROPES
Bright steel wire ropes with fibre cores of adequate cross-section manufactured or
steel wire ropes with adequate cross-section, manufactured.
C)
GOVERNOR ROPES
These shall be manufactured similar to hoisting ropes. The two ends shall be securely
linked to the car and attached to the safety gear operating level. The governor ropes
shall be tensioned by a weight-loaded device located in the pit.
D)
COUNTERWEIGHT
Cast iron blocks enclosed in a steel framework shall be provided to balance the weight
of the car and the specified capacity.
E)
BUFFERS
OIL type buffers shall be fitted in the hoistway pit beneath both car and the
counterweight. These shall be securely mounted on continuous RS channels and
correctly disposed relative to the car and the counterweight.
The plunger shall be of mild steel, accurately machined and designed to provide very
high safety factor. A toughened rubber bumper shall be fitted to the top of the plunger
to withstand the impact of the steel buffer plates mounted on the underside of the car
and the counterweight. An oil gauge shall be provided to check the oil level.
Spring type buffers shall be provided for speeds 60 MPM and below only.
TRAVELLING CABLES
The travelling cables shall be 450V/750V grade multi-core with stranded high conductivity
copper conductors, especially designed for elevator duty. These cables shall be properly
supported by retaining straps and individual cable clamps.
SAFETY EQUIPMENT
The gradual type safety system, comprising of a close loop roping system, over-speed
centrifugal governor, safety gear equipment etc. shall be provided.
The operation of the system shall be such that if the car overspeeds in the downward
direction, the governor jaws shall trip, operating the safety gear. It shall, in sequence, cut off
the motor power supply, apply normal brakes and engage the safety gear gibs when the safety
gear gibs engage with the car guides. It shall apply a constant retarding force to bring the car
to a gradual and smooth stop within defined limits.
- 60 -

Re-setting of the safety devices shall be possible by moving the car in upward direction.
a)
Over Travel
Over travel limit switches shall be provided at the top and bottom of the terminal
landings to disconnect the power supply and apply brakes to bring the car to safe stop
position in the event of an over travel in either direction.
b)
Evacuation Devices
Provision shall be made to move the car manually from the machine room to a nearest
landing in either direction to facilitate evacuation of passengers during a power failure.
c)
Fireman Emergency Operation

Fire Emergency Operation Button enclosed in a breaking glass shall be installed near
the entrance on the main landing and shall operate any one of the elevator under
conditions of emergency, in the event of fire.
When the Fireman Emergency Call Button is pressed, it shall immediately disconnect
the elevator under normal automatic operation and the car shall return to the main
landing. It shall not register any hall calls, so that the passengers will not wait for the
elevator. The car shall then only operate on the attendant operation and it shall start
registering the hall calls.
ELEVATOR CAR
The size of the car, interior design and decorations, ceiling and lighting and other
facilities shall be as called for in the schedule.
the car shall be of rigid steel framework with sound isolation designed and
manufactured all in accordance with relevant Sections.
The operating buttons and keys shall be as given in the relevant Section of the
Specification. The following facilities shall be provided for each car, in addition to
the items already specified.
a)
Ventilation
Electric Ventilator mounted on car roof with proper vents to be provided.
b)
Emergency Lighting
Self contained, non-maintained emergency light, with a trickle charger.
c)
Emergency Exit
An Emergency Exit shall be provided on car roof. This door shall be able to open
either inside or outside. A safety electrical switch shall be provided to prevent the
car travelling when this emergency exit is open.
- 61 -

d)
Intercommunication System
Intercommunication system between the car, main landing and the machine room.
e)
Working Platform
A working platform shall be provided on the roof of the car.
f)
Car and Landing Doors

The car and landing doors shall be fully automatic, two panel, automatic sliding doors.
The TYPE AND finish of the doors shall be as specified in the Schedule.
g)
Door Operator
The door operator shall be high speed heavy duty, with a VVVF controlled AC Motor.
The inverter shall include high speed switching device which inturn shall provide a
smooth sine curve of output current to assure smooth, quite and precise door control.
The opening and closing speeds of the doors shall be adjustable. The landing and car
doors shall operate in full synchronism. Advance door opening during car's approach
to a landing could be used to speed up passenger transfer.
h)
Safety Features
Emergency unlocking key from landing side for evacuation and maintenance work.
Manual opening of the doors from inside the car, within landing zones during power
failure.
Full door height safety-edge device in the leading edge of the car doors to reverse the
doors when there is any obstruction for closing.
Electrical interlock to operate in conjunction with the car doors, so that elevator
cannot operate unless doors are closed.
Overload indicator with buzzer. If the car is overloaded it shall prevent from starting.
The blinking overload indicator and the sounding buzzer shall signal the overload
condition to the passengers.
Emergency light with trickle charger.
TESTING
On completion, a thorough test of the elevators under the working conditions shall be
carried out in the presence of and to the approval of the Engineer.
All materials used must be of the highest quality and the best of their respective kinds
and must comply with the relevant . All weights necessary to carry out the full load
and overload tests must be provided by the Contractor and removed after use.
- 62 -

The tests will include the following:
No load current and voltage readings both on Ùp` and `Down` Circuits.
Full load current and voltage readings both on Ùp` and `Down` Circuits.
One and quarter load current and voltage readings both on Ùp` and `Down` Circuits.
Stalling current and voltage and time taken to operate
overload.
Overload protection.
Gate sequence relays, if provided and installed.
All interlocks.
Collective control and priority sequences, if installed.
Safety gear mechanism.
Speeds on Up and Down travel with loadings and empty.
Door contacts.
Final terminal stopping device.
Normal terminal stopping device.
Insulation and earth continuity.
OPERATING PANELS AND INDICATORS
a)
Car Operating Panel

The car operating panel of each elevator shall contain the following:
Operating buttons numbered to correspond to the landing served with acknowledge
light for each button.
Emergency call button.
Door Open and Door Close Buttons.
Intercom Station.
Overload indicating lamp with buzzer.
- 63 -

b)
Landing Position Indicator

Car position indicator shall be provided for each car, in the car and over the main
landing entrance of each elevator. As the elevator travels through the hoistway, its
position shall be indicated by the illumination of the numeral/letter corresponding to
the landing at which the elevator is stopped or passing. Indicators shall be properly
designed for better recognition with colour filters to provide good contrast. Travel
direction indicators shall also be included in this indicator.
c)
Push Buttons and Indicator for Landing
1)
Up and Down call buttons with indicator lights to show that the call has been
registered.
2)
Hall Indicators/Call Buttons to be provided as specified in the schedule.
3)
Fire Alarm call button in a break-glass fixture at the main landing.
CAR AND LANDING SILLS
Sills manufactured as specified in the schedules shall be fitted at every landing entrance and
on the car platform for the entire width of the door opening.
These sills shall be with integral grooves to act as guide for the bottom of the door panels.
The car sill shall be securely fitted to the car platform and the landing sills securely fitted to
the entrance threshold. These sills shall be flushed with the finished floor level.
The sills shall be designed to provide adequate strength to support the loads excerting on
them, in addition to the safety and decorative entrance plate appearance.
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION OF ELEVATORS
General wiring throughout the installation shall be carried out as specified in the Electrical
Specifications. GI trunking shall be used wherever possible instead of multiple conduits. GI
conduits and flexible conduits shall be used between trunking and apparatus.
Earthing of all the equipments shall be carried out as specified in Electrical specification and
as per IEE Regulations.
Distribution Equipment shall contain all protection equipment for motors and circuits. These
shall include overload protection, short-circuit protection, single phasing protection, etc. as
appropriate.
- 64 -

FOLLOWING SHALL BE PROVIDED BY THE MAIN CONTRACTOR AS PER
REQUIREMENT OF ELEVATOR CONTRACTORS.
1.
Related builder's works, including wire mesh partition, shaft lighting and ladder in pit,
rail guard/mesh/safety chain in the machine room.
2.
Air-conditioner of suitable capacity, permanent 3 Phase 415V 50 HZ and 1 PH 240V

50HZ TPN + SPN circuit breakers of required capacity etc., in the lift machine room.
3.
Hoisting beam/hooks in the machine room roof slab.
4.
Steel separator beams in between hoistway at approx. every 2.0 mtrs interval.
5.
Concrete sill projections/angle support at all landings.
6.
Emergency standby generator of required capacity to run the elevator(s) in the event of
power failure.
7.
Normally, closed type voltage free sensing contact(s) [rating of contact 125V DC 5A]
with wiring from ATS/Generator panel to elevator control panel.
8.
Provision of conduits with draw wire between elevator shaft and security/reception for
elevator interphone/supervisory panel.
9.
Sufficient weather proof lockable storage accommodation to store the elevator

materials at ground floor near elevator shaft.
10.
Normally open free sensing contact(s) with wiring from fire alarm panel to elevator
shaft, if automatic recalling of elevators during fire is required.
11.
Supply and installation of tubular free standing scaffolding to our requirement inside
the elevator shafts with working platform and removal thereof.
12.
Cranage facility for unloading lift materials from containers and shifting the same to
various floors and machine room.
13.
Temporary power supply for installation and testing purposes upto shaft and machine
room with breakers.
14.
Corian/Marble flooring in the lift cabin.
- 65 -

INDEX OF MECHANICAL WORKS
.
SECTION
TITLE
SECTION A
AIR CONDITIONING WORKS
SECTION B
PLUMBING AND PUBLIC HEALTH
SECTION C
SEWAGE AND DRAINAGE
SECTION D
Elevators
SECTION E
Electrical works
SECTION E
FIRE FIGHTING
- 66 -

Mechanical
SECTION A
INDEX
INDEX
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM

CHILLED WATER SYSYEM
1. Scope
2. Preliminaries
3. General specifications
4. Chillers
5. Chilled water pumps
6. Air handling units
7. Fan coil units
8. Fresh air intake and outdoor air louvers
9. Chilled water expansion tank
10. Duct work
11. Registers, Grilles and diffusers
12. Pipe work and fittings
13. Duct insulation
14. Pipe work thermal insulation (indoors & outdoors)
15. Hangers & supports
16. Ventilation Fans
17. Distribution board and electrical work
18. Water treatment
19. B.M.S Controls
20. Testing and commissioning by third party
- 67 -

AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM

CHILLED WATER SYSTEM
1.
Scope
The works covered under this contract include all the supply, installation, testing and delivering in
good operating condition of complete air conditioning and ventilating system described in these
specifications and show on the drawings.
The contractor shall provide all materials, labor, equipment, tools, appliances, services, hoisting,
scaffolding, supervision and overhead for the furnishing and installing of all the ventilating and air
conditioning and related work complete; In accordance with the drawings, schedules and
specifications including but not limited to the following: -
2.
1.1
To check the design and undertake the responsibility of giving the design
Conditions in the occupied areas.
1.2
To supply, install and commission the air conditioning plant to the satisfaction of
The supervising officer.
1.3
To connect air handling units / fan coil units drains to the nearest drain point.
1.4
To provide power supply to the individual air handling units / fan coil units.
Electrical power supply terminating in an isolating switch located within 3 meters
Of the unit shall be provided by the electrical contractor.
1.5
To provide complete control wiring, empty conduits shall be laid on walls by the
Electrical contractor.
Preliminaries
2.1
Interpretation of documents and drawings
The engineer's specification and drawing shall be interpreted in accordance with good
installation practice relevant to the circumstances. The guidelines of codes of practice of the
British standards institution and ASHRAE standard where such codes are relevant shall take
precedence over all others unless stated in these documents.
Where the engineer's drawings are to a small scale and/or are expressed in symbolic terms or
are in the form of an explanatory diagram then indication of the
Exact location or detail of pipes, ducts, cables, valves or other components shall not be
inferred. Any details not shown or specified but necessary for the proper installation and
operation shall be included in the work.
2.2
Coordination of work done by others
Due to the type of the installation, a fixed sequence of operations is required to properly install
the complete system. It shall be the responsibility of the contractor to closely schedule his
work so that this work will be installed at the proper time and without delaying the completion
of the entire project or the work of other trades, and the contractor shall, without extra charge
- 68 -

or time modification in the layout as needed to prevent conflict with other trades for proper
execution.
2.3
Ceiling Heights
Architectural drawings shall be checked for ceiling height requirements.
deviations from these must be approved by the Architect.
Request for
2.4
Cutting and patching
The contractor shall ensure that the necessary pipe and duct opening for this work are built
into the floors and walls in time.
The contractor shall set sleeves for pipes and ducts accurately before the concrete floors are
poured. Details of sleeves are given hereinafter. Should the contractor neglect to perform this
preliminary work, and should cutting be required in order to install his piping, ductwork or
equipment. The expense of this cutting and restoring of surface to their original condition shall
be borne by the contractor.
3.
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
3.1
APPROVALS
Wherever hereinafter the works "for approval" or "approved" are used in regard to
manufactured specialties, or wherever it is desired to substitute a different make or type of
apparatus for that specified, any information pertinent to the suitability of the proposed
apparatus shall be submitted to the engineer for approval.
Approvals for equipment specified herein will be given merely upon the submission of the
manufacturer's names. Notwithstanding anything to the contrary in this specification,
approvals for equipment will be given only after the receipt of complete and satisfactory
performance date (covering the complete range of operating conditions) in tabular and
graphical form as required by the engineer. Complete and satisfactory information shall also
be furnished relating to equipment dimensions, weight etc. It is to be understood, however
that approvals for all equipment not specified or shown on the drawings will be granted if each
equipment in the opinion of the engineer conforms to the performance requirements, space
requirements, any additional costs whatsoever (electrical, structural, architectural, plumbing
etc.)To the owner as a result on any approved substitution shall be borne by the contractor.
3.2
Drawings and information to be provided by the contractor for mechanical and

Electrical plant and equipment.
3.2.1
Within one month of the acceptance of the tender the contractor shall submit the
Following in triplicate for approval by the engineer: a.
Preliminary arrangement drawings in plan and sectional elevation of the

Plant to be supplied.
b.
Out line and sectional drawings as necessary to indicate the leading

features of the main items.
C.
A detailed specification of the various items.
d.
The schedule (s) of technical information fully completed, the proposed

Source of supply and maker of any item not of the contractor's
Manufacture and the name and address of any subcontractor the
Contractor intends to amply for the works.
e.
Where appropriate, estimated performance curves.
- 69 -

f.
The net weight of each major item of plant.
g.
The heaviest lift and hook headroom required (I) for section (ii) for
Normal maintenance.
3.2.2
Within three months of the acceptance of the tender the contractor shall
submit
The following in triplicates for approval by the engineer: a.
Detailed drawings of the general arrangement of the plant showing all

Apertures, holes, chases, trenches and ducts required in the concrete and
Block work structure for the completion of the installation.
b.
Drawings of electrical and electronic plant and equipment given details,

Dimensions and schematic diagram, circuitry and component details shall
Be submitted for approval by the engineer in writing before manufacture is
Commenced.
c.
Additional drawings of particular items shall be submitted for approval by

The engineer before manufacturing is commenced if called for in the
Specification.
d.
Any costs resulting form failure to comply with this requirement shall be
Borne by the contractor.
e.
If the drawings are not approved one copy will be returned to the
Contractor and marked to indicate the alternations required.
f.
Upon final approval one copy will be marked "approved" by the engineer
And returned to the contractor.
g.
The contractor shall, before starting work on the drawings for approval,
Ascertain from the engineer whether any modifications have been made
Since the date of the tender to any of the relevant tender drawings.
h.
After approval of drawings further four copies shall be provided for the
Use of the engineer.
3.2.3
Six months prior to the issuing of the maintenance certificate the

contractor shall
Provide the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Three copies of detailed revised specifications and schedules of the plant

As actually installed.
Three copies of instructions for the maintenance and overhaul of the plant
Installed.
Three copies of recommendation for consumable supplies, (e.g. packing,
Lubricants etc.) For the plant installed.
Drawings of permanent nature showing the internal construction of the
Major items. With parts lists and reference numbers for ordering spares.
Complete assembly drawings of machinery and auxiliary plant showing all
Pipe connections and fittings.
f.
General arrangement drawings showing all equipment cabling, trade work

Etc.
g.
Detailed arrangement of any conduit work buried in floors, walls or

Ceilings in any building or concrete work.
- 70 -

h.
Detailed wiring diagrams of the main circuits.
I.
Diagrams for connections between all items of equipment (e.g. main and
Auxiliary switch boards, control boards, motors, starters, batteries, meters,
Instruments, relays, electronic and allied equipment etc. With component
Values and types suitable marked there on).
When d,e,f,g,h & I have been approved by the engineer the contractor shall
provide three black and white prints of each on thick paper for the use of the
employer and one full plate negative of each for the use of the engineer.
The provision of sections 3.2.1, 3.2.2 and 3.2.3 of this clause shall supersede
the provisions of any other contract clauses relating to mechanical and
electrical work where they are in conflict.
DESIGN ELEMENTS
The installation is based on the following design conditions; capacities and
dimensions given in the specifications or drawings will be considered as the minimum
to be accepted and it is the responsibility of the subcontractor to select all unspecified
equipment to attain the required design and guarantee conditions.
a.
External Design conditions

Summer 115 F dry bulb and 85 F wet bulb.
b.
Internal design conditions
Factory area: Summer 87.8 F +/- 2% dry bulb and approximately 50% +/- 5%
Relative Humidity. Other Areas 75 F +/- 2% dry bulb and approximately 50% +/- 5%
Relative Humidity
c.
Power Supply
415/3/50
240/1/50
3.4
Products and executions - Operating and maintenance instructions

Three sets of operating and maintenance instruction, on cloth, covering completely
the operation and maintenance of the ventilating and air conditioning, automatic
control and refrigeration equipment, shall be furnished to the owner.
In addition, one set of operating and maintenance instructions for each article of
mechanical equipment shall be neatly framed behind glass and hung where directed.
The contractor shall, upon completion of the contract, furnish a list of names of local
manufacturer's representatives. With telephone numbers in order to expedite the
future ordering of replacement parts.
3.5
Cleaning and Commissioning

The contractor will be responsible for cleaning out each system or part of work and
maintaining such attention until the handing over. This work must be carried our
notwithstanding the fact that the installation may be in partial use or the premises in
occupation.
- 71 -

After completion of all required tests the contractor shall start commissioning the
system and prepare for temperature, humidity and sound level.
3.6
Operating services and maintenance

After completion of all installation and required tests, the contractor shall be
responsible for and shall effectively maintain and uphold in good working condition to
the satisfaction of the engineer every part of the work for the period of 24 calendar
months from the date of issue of the substantial completion certificate for the whole
period.
The contractor shall at his won cost make good all defects due to faulty design, bad
workmanship or the use of defective or improper material which shall occur during the
said period, and shall replace at his own expense such parts or materials which in the
opinion of the engineer found unsatisfactory. during the said period the contractor is
required to carry on all maintenance work including cleaning, oiling, greasing,
adjusting controls, checking oil levels, and pressure etc. and repainting at the end of
the maintenance period.
3.7
Equipment Test and Origin certificates:Test certificates for chillers, and pumps to be provided.
The contractor shall submit certificates of origin for chillers, pumps, air side and other
equipments.
3.8
Installation tests:
The contractor shall give the engineer in writing a note at least ten days prior to the
date of commencement of any test.
The contractor shall supply skilled staff and all necessary instruments and apparatus
and carry out any test required by the engineer for determining specified or
guaranteed data, under the supervision of the engineer. Should the contractor fail to
attain satisfactory results or make these tests, the engineer may himself proceed to
make the tests at the risk and expense of the contractor.
Any damage to the building or plant resulting from the tests shall be repaired to the
satisfaction of the engineer, at the contractor's expenses.
All theists, balancing and final adjustment shall be made in accordance with the
chartered Institute of Building Services guide to commissioning.
Piping system will be hydraulically tested before connection of equipment appliances
and before applying insulation. The test pressure should be twice the working pressure
or 150 lbs./sq.in whichever is the larger. Hydraulic test pressure shall be maintained for
a minimum period of 24 hours and witnessed by the engineer.
Duct work shall be tested in accordance with HVAC standard D-144.
Fan Coil Units shall be tested and balanced together with the controls to deliver the
specified air quantities and temperatures.
On completion, all systems will be properly balanced and left in working order and the
trial of the whole plant shall take place during the appropriate season when design
conditions are met or approximated.
The trial of the plant shall last for a period of one calendar month under normal
conditions of operation without any further adjustments or balancing. If any major
defects or deviations occur in the readings or guaranteed figures, they shall be
remedied by the contractor and a further month's tests shall be carried out.
During the said month, the following readings shall be taken:
- 72 -

"D.B." and "W.B." temperatures of conditioned spaces.
Water temperature entering and leaving Chillers.
Pressures of refrigerant both sides, oil pressure and water pressure drop across
chillers.
Volumetric flow rate of air at all supply air diffusers and fresh air inlet grilles.
Quantities of chilled water circulating and entering each coil.
Speed of all fans, motors, pumps etc.
As soon as all tests prescribed are carried out satisfactorily, the official taking over
certificate will be issued by the engineer.
3.9
Noise and Vibration

GENERAL REFERENCE
Noise level shall be 35 DB for Office areas. Other Areas as per ASHRAE Standards.
This Section gives the general details of Vibration and Noise Controls and Installation. For
specific requirement for the project refer the relevant drawings
All water chillers, pumps, motors and fan coil units shall be mounted on vibration isolators
suitably designed to eliminate any vibrations to be transferred to the building structure.
The contractor shall be fully responsible for preventing noise and vibration throughout each
system and in the environment surrounding the building.
Flexible neoprene connection shall be used in all connections between ducts and all fans or
fan coil units.
Flexible rubber connection appropriate to the working pressure and medium, shall be used to
connect all pipe work to pumps and chillers.
The contractor shall prepare and submit to the architect detailed shop drawings showing the
complete details of all foundations. Including the necessary concrete and steel work, vibration
isolation devices etc.
All floors mounted equipment shall be erected on 100 mm high concrete pads over the
complete floor area of the equipment providing 2" thick cork sheet unless specified to the
contrary herein, wherever hereinafter vibration eliminating devices and concrete inertia blocks
are specified. These items shall in all cases be in turn mounted upon 100 mm high concrete
pads unless specified to the contrary herein.
All mounts systems shall be protected with factory applied corrosion resistance. All metal
parts of mountings (except springs and hardware) shall be hot dip galvanized. Springs shall
be cadmium plated and neoprene coated. Nuts and bolts shall be cadmium plated.
Steel spring isolation systems shall be with spring diameter not less than 0.8 of the loaded
operating height of the spring. Each spring isolator shall be designed and installed so that the
ends of the spring remain parallel. The spring deflection before becoming solid shall be at
least 50% greater than the specified minimum deflection.
- 73 -

Springs provided for chillers should be restrained spring isolator type.
For chilled water pumps an inertia base should be provided.
isolators as described above.
Mounted on open spring
All fan coil units shall be mounted on anti-vibration packages and approved made appropriate
to the respective fan coil type.
The installed vibration isolation systems for each floor of ceiling support equipment shall have
a min. Lateral stiffness under equipment start up or shut down conditions of 75% of the
vertical stiffness motions in excess and shall be restrained by approved spring type
mountings.
PRODUCTS
MATERIALS
All vibration isolation devices, factory built silencers and acoustic plenums shall be provided
by an approved manufacture.
Retain the services of an independent Acoustical Consultant to select the noise and vibration
attenuating devices.
- 74 -

This company shall be independent from the material supplier.
The supplier shall submit all calculations provided by the Acoustical Consultant for each piece
of equipment.
The calculations shall show step by step noise analysis and the final insertion losses required to
be provided in order to achieve the above noise criteria in the occupied space. Adequately
isolate and attenuate all equipment to maintain acceptable noise levels in the occupied areas of
the building as specified elsewhere.
On completion of installation, take noise pressure measurements over the complete octave bands in
each of the occupied zones, including under, above and beside mechanical equipment rooms and
where indicated by the Engineer.
Submit a report, complete with resultant sound pressure curves to the Engineer substantiating that all
equipment has been adequately isolated and that acceptable noise levels exist in the occupied zones
have been achieved.
EXECUTION
General
Provide, to the Vibration and Noise Control Manufacturer, one copy of all shop drawings of equipment
to be isolated.
Supply shop drawings of the Vibration and Noise Control Equipment being supplied.
On system start-up, inspect the complete installation and report in writing.
Floor-mounted centrifugal fans, mounting type 1

All fan mountings shall have static deflections equal to or larger than 25mm.
Mount each fan and motor on an integral structural steel fan and motor base, reinforced as necessary
to prevent base flexure and supported on neoprene-in-shear or unconfined spring mountings. Motor
slide rails shall be welded to the structural base.
Design each spring mounting so that the ends of the spring remain parallel during deflection. Each
spring mounting shall be set on 6mm thick natural rubber or neoprene vibration isolation pad and shall
be complete with leveling device. Horizontal spring constant shall be equal to vertical spring constant.
All hardware shall be zinc chromate painted or galvanized.
Provide horizontal stabilizers for fans with horizontal movement larger than 19 mm and to the limit the
horizontal movement to maximum 19mm.
Ceiling Suspended Fans, Mounting Type 3

All fan hangers shall have static deflections equal to or larger than 25mm.
Each fan shall be suspended by means of spring hangers consisting of a steel housing or retainer
incorporating a steel spring and neoprene-in-shear.
If the fan to be suspended is not furnished with integral structural frame and external mounting lugs of
suitable strength and rigidity, install approved structural base with lugs in the field.
Support of Piping
Suspend all piping in mechanical rooms on spring hangers. Weld brackets to the piping and support
on floor mountings pipe work.
- 75 -

For piping connected to vibration isolated equipment, pipe supports within 10 pipe diameters of the
equipment shall have a static deflection of twice the deflection of the vibration isolated equipment. All
other piping supports shall have a static deflection of 25mm minimum.
Floor-Mounted Centrifugal Pumps Larger than 3 hp

Mount each pump with motor on a spring supported steel and concrete inertia base reinforced if
necessary, of thickness as follows,
Pumps up to 5 hp
Pumps 7-1/2 to 25 hp
Pumps 30 hp and above
- 150mm
- 250mm
- thickness to suite requirement
Each base for horizontally split pumps shall include supports for base elbows for the discharge and
suction connections and for vertically split pumps shall include support for base elbow for suction
connection. Bolt and grout base elbows to the steel and concrete pump base.
Mount the steel and concrete base on spring mountings. Where the concrete base is 'T' shaped or
other than rectangular, locate the spring mountings under the projections as well as the main body of
the base.
Spring mountings shall be self-contained concrete inserts with flush openings on the side of the base
for spring adjustment or removal.
Pour bases on roofing felt and elevate 50mm with mounting adjustment bolts after the pumps are
grouted to the base. Alternatively, the bases may be constructed as specified for 'Floor-Mounted
Centrifugal Fans, Mounting Type 2'.
No damping or snubbing materials shall be used. Spring deflection shall be at least 25mm and all
mountings shall have 6mm thick neoprene vibration isolation pads at the bottom.
Pump and motor shall be on one-piece base. Base of two or more sections welded or bolted together
is not acceptable.
Floor-Mounted Centrifugal Pumps 3 hp or less

Bolt and grout each pump to neoprene-in-shear supported reinforced concrete base which is a
minimum of 150mm thick.
Neoprene-in-shear mountings shall have a minimum static deflection of 6 mm. All metal surfaces shall
have friction neoprene pads both top and bottom so they need not be bolted to the base or the floor.
Basement Floor-Mounted Centrifugal Pumps

Bolt and grout each pump to a steel and concrete base supported on 25mm thick neoprene-steelneoprene pads. The neoprene-steelneoprene pads shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions for the size and weight distribution of the pump supported. The minimum concrete base
thickness shall be:
Pumps less than 5 hp

Pumps 7-1/2 to 25 hp
Pumps 30hp and mp
requirement
- 150mm
- 200mm
- thickness to suite
- 76 -

Factory-Built Silencers or sound attenuators
All silencers shall be completely pre-fabricated of noncombustible materials and shall have a minimum
insertion loss to suit equipment and required terminal noise levels and a maximum air pressure drop of
62 Pa.
Acoustic media shall be packed under compression and protected from air erosion by minimum 22 G
perforated galvanized sheet metal
Silencers with internal air velocities above 22.86 m/s shall have acoustic media additionally protected
from erosion by glass fiber cloth.
Silencers shall have 50mm slip connections unless specified otherwise. Silencers shall be painted
with anti-rust prime coat. Supply lifting lugs on units with cross sectional dimensions larger than
600mm.
Class 1 silencers of rectangular construction shall have an outer shell of 22 G minimum sheet metal
and shall be used in ductwork not in excess of 1000 Pa or the design pressure of the silencer,
whichever is lower.
Class 2 silencers of rectangular construction shall have an outer sheet of 16 G sheet metal, with
continuous welded seams and painted with one anti-rust prime coat. Splitter shall be reinforced with
formed channels. End connections shall be steel angle flanges. They shall be used in ducts over
1000 Pa or where Class 1 silencers cannot be used. Class 2 silencers to be used throughout where
installed above occupied areas.
Circular silencers shall be all welded construction with a minimum 16 G sheet metal outer shell and 22
G perforated sheet metal inner shell for diameter over 600mm. For smaller sizes 18 G and 24 G
respectively shall be acceptable. Silencers of 16 G to be used throughout where installed above
occupied areas.
Submit certified data of pressure drop, insertion loss and generated noise of silencers. Data shall be
certified by a qualified independent testing laboratory.
Silencers shall be selected with a pressure drop not to exceed 0.4 wg (99 pa). As a minimum the
insertion losses for silencers shall be 15, 21, 26, 40, 50, 36, 22 and 18 db corresponding to octave
frequency bands of 63, 125, 250, 500, 1000, 2000, 4000 and 8000 Hz. The insertion losses may be
increased or decrease as necessary based on detailed noise analysis. Ductwork at silencers shall be
enlarged as necessary to accommodate the silencer sizes established based on pressure drops.
The insertion loss shall consist of sound pressure level in the diffuse sound field of a reverberant room
where a silencer is substituted for the same length of empty duct and the rest of the system
unchanged.
The test method used by the independent testing laboratory certifying the silencer data, shall be fully
described.
The certification of the pressure drop, insertion loss and generated noise data shall be based upon
tests of the same silencer for all measurements.
Plastic Drainage Pipes
Plastic pipes include HDPE, PE, PVC, PP, CPVC, etc.
Insulate and limp lag all plastic drainage pipes including fittings and drains installed in the building
except those located in parking garage.
- 77 -

Pipe insulation decouple shall be minimum 1 (25 mm) thick fibre glass or mineral wool insulation with
a density of 3lb/ft3. Limp lagging material shall be limp mass loaded vinyl with a density of 1lb/ft2 (4.5
kg/m2). The overall treatment shall provide a minimum of 18 dB(A) noise reduction. Install pipe
insulation and limp lagging to manufacturers recommendations
VIBRATION ISOLATORS
All steel spring isolators should include a neoprene pad at least 10mm thick mounted next to and in
series with the spring.
Seismic restraints should be employed on all steel spring isolators to limit movement of the equipment
in the vertical and horizontal directions. These restraints shall not bypass the isolation under normal
operating conditions.
The neoprene used in isolation (unless otherwise stated) should have a durometer between 30 and
70.
All rubber isolators should be double acting with no through-bolted connections.
There shall be at least a 50mm air space between the bottom of the isolated equipment and the floor
slab.
PIPING/ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS TO MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT

All electrical connections should be made via flexible cable with enough length to create a slack,
looped connection.
All piping connections to equipment should incorporate flexible rubber expansion joints close to the
equipment. Joints are to be rated for 350 psig operating pressure and suitable for a temperature range
of 40 to 170 F.
The first three pipe supports outside the expansion joints should incorporate steel spring isolators with
a static deflection of at least equal to the equipment isolator static deflection.
The first three isolators should be of the pre-compressed type to avoid excessive loading on the
piping.
Vibration isolation hangers should be installed with the spring as close to the ceiling as possible.
Penetrations of walls or floors should allow for a 25mm clearance around the pipe. The gap should be
stuffed with glass fiber insulation and sealed with non-hardening caulking.
The pipe should not be allowed to rest on the side of the hole.
HVAC DUCTING
Flexible duct connections should be provided between all fans and ductwork.
Resilient thrust restraints should be incorporated into the flexible connections to eliminate loading of
the flexible connection. The restraints should be steel spring isolators having a static deflection of at
least 19mm.
Wall or floor duct penetrations should allow for a 13mm clearance around the duct. The gap should
be stuffed with glass fiber insulation and sealed with non-hardening caulking. The duct should be
supported on both sides of the wall.
Variable-air-volume (VAV) units should be mounted as high in the ceiling space as possible, at least
2m away from any return air opening.
- 78 -

The ducting from the VAV box to the diffuser should be lined with acoustic insulation, at least 25mm
thick, the use of adhesive pins will not be acceptable.
The ducting to supply air diffusers or VAV boxes should be straight and unobstructed for at least 3
duct diameters upstream of the diffuser.
The supply ducting should not include a damper within at least 3 duct diameters upstream of a supply
diffuser.
Any equipment not mentioned in this list of recommendations should be installed using good
Engineering practice to minimize noise impacts.
Acoustic Duct Lining and Application

Acoustic lining of ductwork, including builders work ducts and plenums shall be applied, where
necessary to achieve the required acoustic performance.
Acoustic lining shall be vermin proof, rot proof and noncombustible tested to BS 476 Part 4: 1970 and
shall be fixed to ductwork in an approved manner. It shall be contained behind a suitable scrim or
liner to prevent airborne fibre entrainment.
Sound Flanking Insulation and Application

Sound flanking insulation shall be of rigid dense slabs of suitable thickness for their purpose secured
to the ductwork by means of welded on nails and spring loaded washers or similar approved method.
The insulation shall be super coated with a 12 mm thickness of Keenes cement or similar approved
trowelled smooth and painted.
Where brackets occur, hardwood sections of the same thickness as the insulation shall be fitted
between the bracket and the duct.
Thermal insulation where required shall be applied over the sound flanking insulation and any vapour
seals required applied over such insulation in an approved manner.
Sound flanking insulation shall be non-combustible when tested in accordance with BS 476 Part 4:
1970.
Sound Barriers and Application

The Contractor shall take all measures necessary to maintain the acoustic insulation integrity of
partitions, floors, walls, ceilings etc., to prevent noise transmissions that would exceed the noise
design criteria.
He shall wherever necessary improve the acoustic specification of doors, windows, partitions, finishes,
seals etc., to provide the necessary overall sound reduction indices.
Acoustic seals shall be provided where pipes and cuts pass through walls, floors, partitions, ceilings
etc., including where acoustic louvers are fitted.
Acoustic seals shall be to the approval of the Engineer and shall be made or applied such as to cause
no damage to pipes, ducts, any insulation contained thereon and the like. In instances where acoustic
seals constrain vibrating ductwork or pipe work such as to cause such vibration to be transmitted to
the structure the Contractor shall make suitable provision to isolate such vibrations
Application of Insulation to Access Door and Duct Openings

Where noise breakout from, or break in to, ductwork, plenums and builders work ducts through normal
(or as generally specified) access doors, access panels etc., would cause noise design criteria to be
exceeded the Contractor shall provide doors and panels of suitable type and equipped with suitable
seals as necessary to provide adequate insulation.
- 79 -

The Contractor shall be deemed to have included for provision of more substantial acoustic access
doors panels etc.. than those specified in all instances where the normal specified items would permit
noise breakout or break in that would cause noise design criteria to be exceeded.
All water chillers, pumps, motors and fan coil units shall be mounted on vibration isolators suitably
designed to eliminate any vibrations to be transferred to the building structure.
The contractor shall be fully responsible for preventing noise and vibration throughout each system
and in the environment surrounding the building.
Flexible neoprene connection shall be used in all connections between ducts and all fans or fan coil
units.
Flexible rubber connection appropriate to the working pressure and medium, shall be used to connect
all pipe work to pumps and chillers.
The contractor shall prepare and submit to the architect detailed shop drawings showing the complete
details of all foundations. Including the necessary concrete and steel work, vibration isolation devices
etc.
All floors mounted equipment shall be erected on 100 mm high concrete pads over the complete floor
area of the equipment providing 2" thick cork sheet unless specified to the contrary herein, wherever
hereinafter vibration eliminating devices and concrete inertia blocks are specified. These items shall in
all cases be in turn mounted upon 100 mm high concrete pads unless specified to the contrary herein.
All mounts systems shall be protected with factory applied corrosion resistance. All metal parts of
mountings (except springs and hardware) shall be hot dip galvanized. Springs shall be cadmium
plated and neoprene coated. Nuts and bolts shall be cadmium plated.
Steel spring isolation systems shall be with spring diameter not less than 0.8 of the loaded operating
height of the spring. Each spring isolator shall be designed and installed so that the ends of the spring
remain parallel. The spring deflection before becoming solid shall be at least 50% greater than the
specified minimum deflection.
Springs provided for chillers should be restrained spring isolator type.
For chilled water pumps an inertia base should be provided. Mounted on open spring isolators as
described above.
All fan coil units shall be mounted on anti-vibration packages and approved made appropriate to the
respective fan coil type.
The installed vibration isolation systems for each floor of ceiling support equipment shall have a min.
Lateral stiffness under equipment start up or shut down conditions of 75% of the vertical stiffness
motions in excess and shall be restrained by approved spring type mountings.
3.10
Painting.
All steel work including supports, brackets, exposed ducts, are to be painted two substantial
coats of red oxide primer to BS 1011/32 type 2.
All pipe work services insulated or uninsulated shall be fitted with colored identification PVC
bands according to BS 1810 at 6 meter intervals and at changes of directions, branches,
valves and on both sides of walls or ceilings through which they pass.
All exposed metal surfaces of machinery, motor; air handling units, hangers, valves, etc. must
be painted with priming undercoats and two coats of enamel finish to the approved color.
3.11
Electrical Works
- 80 -

All electrical equipment and switches must be tropicalised to comply with all relevant BS
standards and shall be suitable for use in ambient temperatures up to 50(C and 90% R.H. The
electrical supply will be 415/50/3 ph. 4 wire supply/and 240/50/1 ph.
All motors above 1 H.P. shall be drip proof, 3 phase screen protected induction type, except
for pumps and chillers condenser fans which should be totally enclosed fan cooled with class
"B" insulation.
Single phase motors up to 1 H.P. shall be totally enclosed capacitor start induction complete
with built in thermal overload protection.
Motors up to 10 H.P. should be equipped with direct on-line starters, above 10 H.P. motors
should be equipped with star delta or part winding starting. Each starter should be housed in
heavy industrial type enclosure (expect starters mounted in the control panels).
Starting current for motors up to 10 H.P. should not exceed 6 times the full load current and
starting current for motors above 10 H.P. should not exceed twice full load current.
No motors shall run at higher than 1500 R.P.M. and Power factor shall not be less than 0.82
lagging.
Conduits, wiring, cables and accessories shall comply with the specifications for electrical
installations as issued by the institution of electrical engineers and to ABU DHABI Electricity
and Water Authority Regulations.
4.
CHILLERS
Air-cooled screw chiller
Equipment:
Factory assembled, single-piece, air-cooled liquid chiller. Contained within the
unit cabinet shall be all factory wiring, piping, controls, refrigerant charge
(HFC-134a), duel refrigeration circuits, screw compressors, electronic
expansion valves.
Quality assurance
Unit shall be rated in accordance with Euro vent standard.
Unit construction shall comply with European directives:
Machinery directive 98/37/EC, modified. Low voltage directive 73/23/EEC,
modified
Electromagnetic compatibility directive 89/336/EEC, modified, and the
applicable recommendations of European standards:
Machine safety: electrical equipment in machines, general regulations, EN
60204-1
Electromagnetic emission EN 50081-2. Electromagnetic immunity EN 500822.
Unit shall be designed, manufactured and tested in a facility with a quality
assurance system certified ISO 9001.
Unit shall be manufactured in a facility with an environment management
system certified ISO 14001. Unit shall be tested at the factory.
Unit controls shall be capable of withstanding 55C storage temperatures in
the control compartment.
- 81 -

Unit cabinet:
Frame shall be made of U steel beam and protected by three layers of paint.
The control box plates shall be steel with an oven-baked polyester-paint finish,
and be capable of withstanding a 500-hour salt spray test in accordance with
the ASTM B-117 standard (U.S.A.).
Fans:
Condenser fans shall be direct-driven, 11-blade, shrouded-axial type, shall be
statically and dynamically balanced, and made of recyclable material with
inherent corrosion resistance. Air shall be discharged vertically upward. Fans
shall be protected by coated steel wire safety guards.
Compressors:
Unit shall have semi-hermetic twin-screw, compressors with internal muffler
and check valve. Each compressor shall be equipped with a discharge shutoff valve.
Capacity control shall be provided by a variable control valve capable of
reducing unit capacity to 20% of full load. Compressor shall start in unloaded
condition. - Motor cooling shall be provided by direct liquid injection and
protected by internal overload thermostat. Lube oil system shall include prefilter and internal filter capable of filtration to 3 microns. Each compressor
shall be equipped with enclosure.
Evaporator:
Unit shall be equipped with a single evaporator. Evaporator shall be tested
and stamped in accordance with applicable European pressure code for a
refrigerant-side operating pressure of 1700 kPa and for a maximum water-side
pressure of 1000 kPa.
Shall be mechanically cleanable shell-and-tube type with removable heads.
Tubes shall be internally-enhanced, seamless-copper type, and shall be rolled
into tube sheets. Shell shall be insulated with 19 mm closed-cell foam with a
maximum K factor of 0.28 and mechanic factory aluminum protection jacket.
Shall incorporate minimum two independent refrigerant circuits. Shall have an
evaporator drain and vent.
Shall incorporate a refrigerant level control system.
Condenser: Coil shall be air-cooled with integral sub cooler, and shall be
constructed of plate aluminum fins mechanically bonded to internally finned
copper or aluminum tubes. The tubes are then
Cleaned, dehydrated, and sealed. Condenser coils shall be leak tested and
shall be pressure tested at 3400 kPa. Condenser-fan motors shall be 3-phase
type with permanently lubricated bearings and Class F insulation. Condenser
shall be anti-corrosion treated with heresite or equivalent as per consultant
approval.
Refrigeration circuits:
Refrigerant circuit components shall include oil separators, high and low side
pressure relief devices, discharge and liquid line shutoff valves, filter driers,
- 82 -

moisture indicating sight glasses, electronic expansion devices, and complete
operating charge of both refrigerant HFC-134a and compressor oil. To
facilitate service and maintenance and avoid refrigerant charge transfers, it
must be possible to isolate the following components independently: Filter
driers, Oil filters, Expansion devices, Motor cooling systems.
Controls, safeties, and diagnostics
Controls (BMS Compatible):
Unit controls shall include as a minimum: the micro-processor, picture guided
interface, the LOCAL/OFF/REMOTE/CCN selector and a touch-screen display
with keypad.
Control box shall have air vent fan.
Unit shall be capable of performing the following functions:
Automatic change-over between the main compressor and the non-active
compressor(s).
Capacity control based on leaving chilled fluid temperature with return fluid
temperature sensing.
Limiting the chilled fluid temperature pull-down rate at start-up to an adjustable
range of 0.1C to 1.1C per minute to prevent excessive demand spikes at
start-up.
Enable adjustment of leaving chilled water temperature according to the return
water temperature or the out-door temperature or by means of a 0-10 V signal.
Provide a dual set point for the leaving chilled water temperature activated by
a remote contact closure signal.
Enable a 2-level demand limit control (between 0 and 100%), activated by a
remote contact closure or a 0 to 10 V signal.
Control evaporator water pump and, if installed, safety pump operation.
Enable automatic changeover in the main phase or shut-down of two chillers
in a single system.
With two time scheduling programs enable unit start-up control and set-point
change.
Diagnostics
Display module shall be capable of displaying set points, system status
including temperatures, pressures, current for each compressor, run time and
percent loading.
The control shall allow a quick test of all machine elements to verify the correct
operation of every switch, circuit breaker, contactor etc. before the chiller is
started.
The control shall be capable of balancing the compressor operating times and
the number of compressor start-ups.
EXV control, based on throttling optimizes evaporator charging, ensuring
condenser superheat and sub cooling.
- 83 -

Safeties
Unit shall be equipped with all necessary components, and in conjunction with
the control system shall provide the unit with protection against the following:
- Loss of refrigerant charge.
- Reverse rotation.
- Low chilled water temperature.
- Low oil pressure (per compressor).
- Current imbalance.
- Thermal overload.
- High pressure.
- Electrical overload.
- Loss of phase.
Fan motors shall be individually protected by a circuit breaker. Control shall
provide general alarm remote indication for each refrigeration circuit.
Operating characteristics
Unit shall be capable of starting and running at full or part load at outdoor
ambient temperatures from 5C to 52C.
Unit shall be capable of starting up with 25C entering fluid temperature to the
evaporator.
Unit shall be Low Noise High Efficiency.
Electrical characteristics
Unit shall operate on 3-phase power supply without neutral.
Control voltage shall be supplied by a factory-installed transformer.
Unit shall be supplied with factory-installed electrical disconnect/isolator
switch.
5.
CHILLED WATER PUMPS (primary & secondary)

PUMPS DESCRIPTION (BMS Compatible):
The pumps and motors shall be from the same country of origin. Each pump
and motor shall be factory assembled. Proper valid documents shall be
submitted as a proof at the time of delivery. The pump manufacturer shall take
Unit Responsibility for the successful operation of the system supplied by
him.
Identical pumps shall be supplied and installed having duties as shown in the
drawings (One no as stand by). The pump set shall be mounted on an inertia
base with vib spring isolators under each and shall have two pressure gauges
one at suction side and one at discharge side along with all associated
fittings as shown in the drawings.
The pumps shall be of end suction type flexible coupled with TEFC Motors
having class F insulations. The speed of the pumps shall be 1450 RPM.
Winding of the motors shall have thermostats to protect against temperature
- 84 -

raise. The pumps shall be constructed of close grained high tensile strength
Cast Iron casing, 316 stainless steel shafts, bonze impellers and with
mechanical suitable for continuous operations. The pump manufacturer shall
recommend proper seal based on the operation to 2250F. The motors shall be
sized to operate continuously with out exceeding the horse power rating
regardless of the flow and head through out the entire range of operations.
The pumps shall be selected to meet the specified duties with an efficiency of
minimum 70-72%
The contractor shall confirm the head and flow requirements for all pumps
based on the actual layout and shall submit to consultant for approval.
The pumps shall be tested and commissioned properly before the preliminary
handing over and detailed reports shall be submitted for approval.
6.
AIR HANDLING UNITS

6.1
Description
Air handling unit shall be of the double skin (50mm thick, 50kg/ m3 density
rock wool or polyurethane insulation. or injected form), horizontal concealed
type. Air handling units shall have fan and coil capacities as specified in the
schedule of equipment at the conditions shown thereon or as shown in the
drawings.
The air handling basic unit shall consist of water coil, one or more centrifugal
fans, electric motor, condensate drain pan, galvanized steel casing panel and
electric junction box.
The fan shall be of eth double inlet double width type having forward curve
impellers, and shall be arranged for horizontal air discharge. The fan and
motor package is to be mounted on a common frame and insulated from the
casing by means of rubber / spring anti vibration mounts and flexible fan
discharge sleeve. Impellers are to be balance both statically and dynamically
and securely fixed to a bright steel shaft supported by ball or roller bearings.
Fan motors are to be of the TEFC type and connected to the fan shaft by
means of a vee belt dive with deep grooved pulleys.
The water coils shall be suitable for chilled water and shall be constructed of
staggered heavy wall seamless copper tubes mechanically rounded to
aluminum. Fins with min. 4Row Coil unless specified on the drawings. Coils
are to be mounted on tracks for side withdrawal and located in a stainless
steel drain pan with condensate connections. Coils to be provided with air
vent.
The condensate drain pan shall be constructed of 18 gauge stainless steel
and shall project under the entire length and width of coil including the
- 85 -

headers sand return bends. The parts shall be adequately treated against
corrosion, insulated and pitched ofr positive drainage with the unit installed
level.
The basic casing shall be constructed form heavy gauge pre galvanized
steel sheet, folded to form sturdy side, top and bottom panels and a rigid
Pentad Post supporting frame. Panels are to be insulated throughout with
32Kg/m3 fire resistant fiberglass or Polyurethane to a thickness of 25mm.
Access doors are to be hinged and provided with quick release catches having
external handles.
The unite shall be provided with 1 thick permanent metallic filter or as
specified mounted on the box enclosure of the unit, in a sealed way to prevent
air by passing.
Filters are to be fireproofed using synthetic media. Filters cells are to be
mounted in galvanized sheet steel frames and held tightly into position against
sealing strip by spring wire clips.
Face velocity through filter / coil shall not exceed 550 F.P.M.
Drain pan : Additional drain pan is required for all AHUs & FCUs. Contractor
has to precaution to avoid condensation.
6.2FRESH AIR HANDLING UNITS (FAHU) RUN AROUND COIL TYPES
:
a.
These units shall be of constant volume supplying Fresh air to various zones
and shall be switched on through the starter cubicle.
Components
Fresh Air Handling unit shall comprise and trap louver, fly screen, motorized
damper, pre filters, main bag filters, run around coils and supply fan. All
external FAHUS shall be fitted with weather hood with separate control panel
b.
Construction
Components of the units shall be enclosed in galvanized sheet steel double
skin casing with 50mm thick, 50kg/ m3 density rock wool or polyurethane
insulation.
Casing shall be assembled with frame supporting modular panels with an
integrated base frame made up of heavy gauge painted galvanized steel.
Weather proof painting shall be applied to casing & its frame prior to the
assembly.
In order to avoid any condensation problems on the exterior of the panels,
units shall be selected with inner and outer panels without having any type of
contacts i.e. units with thermal break panels. If any condensation occur after
installation, the contractor shall undertake all measures to rectify.
c.
Fan & Motor

Fans shall be backward curved, double inlet double width centrifugal type and
statically and dynamically balanced, belt driven by an internally mounted
motor and drive. Maximum speed of the fan should not exceed to more than
- 86 -

1500 r.p.m. the belt dive shall be provided with a minimum of two Vee belts
per assembly.
Motor shall assembly shall be isolated form the unit casing by spring type antvibration mountings and a flexible connection on the fan discharge. The
maximum fan out let velocity shall be 10m/s.
d.
Run around coil (IF APPLICABLE)

Coil shall be rated as per ARI 410 and it shall be made of CU tubes and plate
type Al fins. Each cooling coil assembly shall be placed above a condensate
drain pan made of stainless steel. Drain pan shall be slopped in the direction
of drain connection to ensure complete removal of drainage. Cooling coil shall
be selected with a maximum water resistance of 45kPa. Chilled water cooling
coil shall be provided with plastic eliminator plates to avoid any moisture carry
over or the air stream. Pre cooling & reheating coils shall be connected with
water circulating pumps (working & standby) at site by the contractor.
e.
Pre filter and Main filter

Pre filter shall be flat metallic type of 50mm thick and 80% gravimetric
efficiency located in a side withdrawal frame.
Main filter shall be bag type in a side3 withdrawal frame with bag filter 85-90%
opacimetric efficiency.
f.
Intake damper
Damper shall be motorized aerofoil blade profile type. When the fan off, the
damper at Fresh Air Intake shall be closed and the CHW control valve shall
move to by pass position. Upon a signal from the starter panel, the damper
shall open an end switch on the damper operator shall signal FAHU fan to
switch on when damper fully open.
6.3
AHU/FAHU CONTROLS(BMS Compatible):
For all AHUs 3 port modulating control valves, space temperature control
thermostats and ON/OFF switches will be provided. For units cooling fresh air,
additional control elements as detailed on drawings will be provided to give
complete operational system to engineers approval.
6.4
AHU/FAHU CONTROL PANELS (STARTER PANELS):

-Construction of all panel board shall comply with the relevant section of
electrical specifications.
-Each Air Handling Units of Fresh Air Handling Unit shall be supplied with a
starter cubicle including the following:
a)
Door inters locked Isolator.
b)
Hand /Auto / off control switch.
c)
Run indicators.
d)
Trip indicators.
- 87 -

e)
Motor speed selectors switch.
f)
Motor starter assembly.
g)
Control fuse.
h)
Filter pressure drop (Clog indications)
i)
Interconnection with fire alarm system
J)
Power fuses.
k)
3Way modulating valves controls and thermostat controls.
-Starter panels, where installed outdoor shall be of weather proof type (IP 65)
enclosures.
7
FAN COIL UNITS (UP TO 2000 CFM)

7.1
GENERAL
Fan Coil Units shall be horizontal suspended types with insulated air plenum.
Exposed units shall have decorative cabinet. The basic unit shall be
constructed of high gage galvanized steel casing not less than 1mm thickness
lined with fibber glass or polyurethane insulation meeting. NFPA 90 A
requirements. Filter track with cleanable air filter, supply collar, and return air
collar on rear of unit for duct connection. Coil shall be of minimum 4 Rows and
shall have Copper tubes and aluminum fins bonded to the tubes by
mechanical expansion, have a working pressure of 150 Psig. And fitted with a
manual air vent
The fans shall be direct driven double width forward curved centrifugal fan,
statically and dynamically balanced with scrolls and wheel constructed of
galvanized steel. The electric motor shall be capable of running on
240V/Ph/50Hz and shall be 3 speed permanent split capacitor type with all
inter wiring to be in galvanized metal flexible conduit secured to both the motor
and terminal box.
The condensate drain pan shall be high gage galvanized steel, pitched for
positive drainage when unit is level. Interior and exterior surfaces shall be
insulated with fire retardant, closed cell foam. Drain pan should extend the
full length and width of the coil. Drain connection shall be 1 OD male sweat
fitting.
7.2
Fan Coil Units Control (BMS Compatible):
Fan coil units shall be controlled via a three way modulating valve, On/ Off
cum three- speed selector switch type analog thermostat that controls the
three way modulating valve.
- 88 -

8.
Fresh air intake and outdoor air louvers
8.1
GENERAL
All fresh air inlets shall be fitted with volume control dampers as indicated in
the drawings Dampers shall conform to volume control dampers of this
specification.
All fresh air intake shall be fitted with aluminum mesh bird screens, sand trap
louvers as specified below or other approved device to prevent the ingress of
sand and dust, and 2 cleanable type filter installed in an adequate sealed way
in order to prevent by passing.
8.2
Fresh air louvers

Fresh air louvers shall be of extruded powder coated aluminum with overall
dimensions as detailed under section specification of grills. Louver blade
extrusion shall be of a design to prevent the ingress of wind drive rain and
shall be of a type to be approved by the engineer.
9.
Chilled Water Expansion Tank

Expansion tank shall be of opened type complete with make up connection, air vents,
overflow, quick fill connection and cleaning connection manufactured from fiberglass.
- 89 -

10.
DUCT WORK
GENERAL REFERENCE
This Section gives the general details of Sheet Metal Duct and Accessories and
Installation. For specific requirement for the project refer relevant drawings
PRODUCTS
Galvanized Sheet Metal

Galvanized sheet shall be of G90 coating designation within ASTM A525-75 standard specification or
to BS 2989: 1982, Grade Z2 Coating Type G275 or Type C coating, for steel zinc coated by hot dip
process.
The minimum weight of coating on both sides of duct shall be 275 g/m2, also as prescribed in EN 10
142.
All GI sheets shall be cold rolled close annealed, patent flattened steel sheets.
Contractor shall submit Mill Certificate and Independent Laboratory Test Certificate to assess sheet
thickness and coating.
Rectangular or Square Ducts and Fittings

Ductwork shall be classified in accordance with DW142 Table 1 into low, medium and high-pressure
classes and the fabrication, material and test specifications appropriate to each class shall apply in
this specification accordingly.
The constructional requirements of DW142 tables 5, 6, 7 and 8 shall be seen as minimum standards
and sheet thickness and intervals between joints and stiffeners shall be selected with care and regard
to the often stringent acoustic control criteria applying in some areas of the building.
Gauge, joints and bracing for sheet metal ductwork shall comply with ASHRAE and SMACNA
standards. The contractor shall provide one copy of above standard at site for engineers reference.
All ducts shall be sealed in accordance with ASHRAE standard 90 and SMACNA low-pressure duct
construction standards.
Below table is given only for guidance, all details to be submitted for approval by the Engineer.
Duct Size
Nominal sheet
thickness
Upto 300
325 to 600
601 to 800
801 to 1000
1001 to 1500
1501 to 2250
2251 to 3000
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.85
1.0
1.2
1.3
Maximum joint
Spacing plain
Crossed board
Minimum angle
section stiffeners
1500
1200
1200
600
600
600
25 x 25 x 3
25 x 25 x 3
40 x 40 x 4
40 x 40 x 4
40 x 40 x 4
50 x 50 x 5
- 90 -
2000
1500
1200
800
600

Duct Work Fittings
Bends, branches, tees, transformations and other fittings shall be constructed from the same material
and to the same thickness as the associated straight ductwork and shall conform to the standard of
fittings prescribed in the appropriate HVCA & DW 142 Specification for the ductwork material
concerned.
In all cases the larger dimension of rectangular ducts shall determine the sheet thickness and
standard of stiffening to be used for the fitting.
Turning vanes shall be incorporated as necessary within the standard bends but where the ductwork
is internally insulated; the recommended spacing of the vanes shall be relative to the internal surface
of the lining.
Flexible Ducts and Fittings

The connection shall be non-metallic in accordance with HVCA Specification, DW 142 and shall be
constructed of material rated at not less than Class 1, without treatment, when tested for flame spread
in accordance with BS. 476: Part 3.
Flexible connections shall be suitable for an operating temperature range of -180 C to 1200 C.
Non-metallic flexible connections shall comprise a liner and cover or tough, tear resistant, glass fibre,
plastic proofed fabric reinforced with a bonded galvanized spring steel wire helix between the liner and
cover, and an outer helix of glass fibre cord or equal bonded to the cover.
Metallic flexible connections shall comprise a spirally wound rigid metal section, interlocked to give a
bendable duct and manufactured from stainless steel, aluminum, or aluminum coated steel, and lined
internally and/or externally with plastic material, all as specified for the section concerned.
Where flexible connections are indicated or required between rigid ductwork and particular
components or items of equipment the internal diameter of the flexible connection shall be equal to the
external diameter of the ductwork and of the spigot to the item served.
Unless otherwise specified or indicated on the drawings the flexible duct shall be metallic and not
exceed six diameters in length with maximum of 3.500 m. Non-metallic flexible ducts shall be subject
to Engineers approval.
Flexible Duct Joints

Flexible joints shall be provided on the inlet and outlet connection to each fan, on ducts crossing
building expansion joints and elsewhere in the ductwork or where necessary to meet the requirements
of the noise and vibration control.
Flexible joints shall consist of, or be protected by, a material having a fire protection period of at least
15 minutes when tested in accordance with BS. 476 Part 8: 1972. The material shall be of glass fibre
cloth type; canvas will not be accepted, and the length of the joints from metal to metal edge shall not
be greater than 250mm or less than 100mm.
In cases where excessive noise breakout through flexible connections may cause the noise design
criteria to be exceeded, a heavy duty acoustic material shall be used. The ductwork shall not impose
any load of the flexible joint.
- 91 -

Kitchen Extract Duct Work
Ducts for conveying grease and moisture-laden vapours shall be of stainless steel of minimum
thickness 1.09mm, to NFPA 96 as defined by ASHRAE E1.10 unless other wise specified.
Carbon steel construction having a minimum thickness of 1.37mm shall be acceptable subject to type
and application to Engineer approval.
Adequately sized cleaning doors should be provided, regardless of whether grease filters are fixed at
the entry points, so that access for interior cleaning is possible at intervals of not more than 3.0m.
Precautions must be taken against possible leakage of condensate and/or grease from the ducts by
avoiding longitudinal seams along the bottom face, and employing suitable gasket material at the
joints between sections.
The ducts shall be fixed with a slight fall, preferably in the direction of air flow, and at low points such
as at the bottom of risers there should be plugged drainage points suitable for the later connection of a
permanent trapped drainage pipe if operating conditions demonstrate the need.
Volume Control Dampers

Dampers shall be of the opposed multi-blade type except for mixing applications where parallel blades
shall be used, with provision for spindle linkages all enclosed with a flanged removable ductwork
section to Engineer approval.
The complete damper assembly shall be constructed from aluminum and any damper exposed to
outdoor air shall be hot dip galvanized.
Damper blades shall be of rigid aluminum construction without sharp edges and suitably stiffened
where necessary to avoid fluttering; and shall be substantially air tight with not more than 5% of
maximum design air flow in the duct for leakage when it is fully closed position.
Damper shall be with mild steel spindle carried in ball bearing, and suitably constructed to prevent
distortion and jamming in operation.
Access doors shall be installed wherever the dampers are installed and shall be as specified
elsewhere.
The spindle of hand controlled dampers shall be provided with an operating lever or Gear type to
approval of Engineer and quadrant external to the casing in an accessible position. The quadrant
shall be securely fixed to the side of the duct and shall have embossed OPEN and SHUT markers.
After final regulation and balancing of the system, the position of the damper lever, as set, shall be
indelibly marked on the damper quadrant.
Each primary control damper shall be provided with a 100 mm x 50 mm Trifoliate plastic label fixed to
the outside of the duct stating the actual airflow in m3/s and the duct dimensions.
Each damper blade shall not exceed 1200 mm in width or 175 mm in height, and for ducts in excess of
this width multiple frame dampers shall be used.
Fire Dampers
Fire dampers shall be of the folding stainless steel blade type mounted in a galvanized steel frame
and flame proof to BS: 4683:1971 Parts 1 and 2, with steel blades positioned outside the air stream in
its folded (normal) position.
Fire dampers shall be two hours fire resistance in accordance with BS.476 Part 8. 1972.
- 92 -

Fusible link and solenoid fusible link operated fire dampers shall be capable of complete closure
against the air flow in the event of air at a minimum temperature of 720 C melting the fusible link or the
activation of a fire alarm protection device where such interlocks exist.
Access doors shall be provided upstream of each damper for the testing and replacing of fusible links
and resetting of dampers and shall be as specified elsewhere.
Single blade dampers up to 450mm in any direction shall be of 16 gauge. From 475mm to 900mm in
any direction they shall be of 12 gauge. Above 900mm in any direction they shall be of 7 gauge.
Fire dampers shall be installed in all floors, plant room walls, fire staircase penetrations and fire walls.
Access Openings and Doors

Access openings shall be provided in the ductwork at suitable positions for the purpose of inspection
and servicing of the plant and equipment.
They shall be rigidly framed; with airtight covers designed for easy removal and replacement.
An access panel shall be provided at each change of direction for cleaning purposes; and adjacent to
all volume control dampers, isolating dampers, fire dampers and all temperature and air flow detection
devices for maintenance and replacement purposes.
Access panels shall also be provided for inspection, maintenance and lubrication of all fans.
Subject to the restrictions imposed by duct dimensions, access panel openings should not be smaller
than 375mm x 300mm nor larger than 450mm x 450mm and shall be provided with an 25mm x 6mm
mild steel flat welded frame (galvanized after manufacture) riveted to the duct with the inside edge of
the frame flush with the duct opening.
Access panels shall be of 1.2mm thick galvanized sheet steel with a 25mm x 6mm thick approved
sealing gasket fixed around the edge with a suitable adhesive to form an airtight seating against the
duct frame. They shall be provided with a central handle and shall be secured with 6mm brass wing
nuts at not more than 150mm centres.
Access doors shall be provided wherever the access opening is required to permit full bodily entry of
personnel or where renewable equipment contained within the ductwork system cannot easily be
withdrawn or replaced through the preferred opening sizes given for an access panel.
Access doors shall be provided for at least the following purposes;
Maintenance and cleaning of cooling coils, heater batteries, humidifiers

Maintenance and cleaning of enclosed fans
Maintenance and renewal of filter elements and related items.Access
doors for sprays, humidifiers and cooling coils shall incorporate a 6 mm clear
glass panel 200mm wide by 400mm high mounted in a frame with a
waterproof rubber seal.
- 93 -

Access doors shall be 500 mm wide with a preferable maximum height of 1.350m and shall be
constructed from galvanized sheet steel 1.6mm thick reinforced by turned edges to form a door and to
secure a 25mm slab of aluminum faced glass fibre within the duct.
The openings in the duct shall be reinforced with a mild steel channel frame (galvanized after
manufacture) equal to the thickness of the door and riveted to the duct. The access door shall be
provided with a suitable sealing gasket, brass hinges, and a clamping latch operated by handles from
both sides of the door.
Where ducts are to be thermally insulated, the frame of access doors or panels shall be extended
beyond the face of the duct using a hardwood timber frame or other approved means by a
measurement equal to the finished thickness of insulation and arranged so that the insulation can be
dressed into the frame.
The insulation finish and any vapour seal shall be carried over the timber frame and sealed. Access
covers in such applications shall be dished to contain the required insulation thickness and vapour
sealed overall.
Access doors on insulated ductwork shall be of the double skin insulated type.
Hand Holes to permit jointing to duct sections in awkward situations may be provided but shall be kept
to a minimum and made as small as possible. They shall be rendered airtight with sealant and
securely covered.
EXECUTION
Erection of Duct Work

All ductwork shall be constructed, reinforced, supported and installed in accordance with SMACNA
"HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible", and the specification herein.
Unless otherwise specified, ductwork shall comply with the following pressure classes and seal
classes:
Description
Pressure Class
Supply ductwork downstream of Air Handling +3" w.g.

Units
Return air ductwork
-1" w.g.
Washroom exhaust ductwork
-1" w.g.
Smoke exhaust ductwork
+3" w.p
- 94 -
Seal Class
B
C
C
B

All supply and return ductwork within 4.5m of the air handling unit, measured from the unit along the
duct, shall be 16 g. sheet metal or heavier, but shall otherwise meet the aforementioned pressure and
seal classes.
The fabrication of all ductwork and fittings shall be executed in a neat and competent manner by a
manufacturer experienced in this class of work. It shall be true to size and free from sharp edges and
projections both internally and externally.
All items shall be suitable in every way for the design velocity and pressure conditions and shall
comply with all specified tests. Ductwork dimensions shown on the drawings represent the net free
internal sizes, exclusive of all excrescences or linings and shall be provided as such. Due allowance
shall be made to maintain the free area where insulation is to be provided internally.
Ductwork shall be installed to give maximum headroom and with due consideration for the location of
other services with which its arrangement shall be coordinated. Allowance shall be made during its
erection for the thickness of any insulation thereon and for the application of same.
All ductwork and connections shall be adequately braced and stiffened where necessary to prevent
sagging, drumming and vibration.
The air leakage limits set down in DW142 Table 2 shall not be exceeded and the aggregate total
leakage from any whole system shall not exceed 5% of the total design airflow volume. To meet this
requirement where abnormal circumstance arise such as with long lengths of small ducts, the
Contractor shall allow for providing a system air tightness commensurate with a lighter rated pressure
class system than would be necessary to meet a defined static pressure limit.
Where ductwork is visible, the location of seams on the side or sides exposed to view shall be
avoided.
The Contractor shall be responsible for all necessary arrangements and dimensions of ductwork on
site and all holes required in walls and floors for the ducts and fixings including details of timber
frames which may be necessary.
All builders work in connection with, associated with or affected by the ventilation services shall be
satisfactorily completed before the permanent erection of ductwork is carried out. All openings in the
ductwork shall be protected during its erection by means of polythene or other suitable sheeting, to
prevent the ingress of dust and dirt resulting from the building operations, and all sheeting shall be
removed prior to the commissioning of the plant. In addition, the exterior and the interior of all
ductwork shall be cleaned prior to commissioning.
All stiffeners and angle frames for steel ductwork shall be manufactured from galvanized sections, and
where cut shall be cold galvanized after manufacture.
For external ductwork, including ducts situated on a roof, steel ducts shall be not less than 1.6mm
thick.
It shall be protected by one coat of mordant solution of calcium plumbate primer followed by two coats
of bituminous paint. All horizontal sections of external ductwork which is not to be insulated shall be
installed to give a fall of 1:200 on the upper horizontal surface.
All longitudinal seams for metal ductwork shall be of an approved type and shall be grooved and
sealed with a suitable sealant; all factory made constructional joints shall be close riveted with rivet
spacing at not more than 60 mm centres. Joints in rectangular metal ducts with the longest side equal
to or greater than 600 mm shall be angle flanged with bolts at 150 mm centres, and with the duct ends
swaged into the angle joints which shall be sealed with a suitable gasket or sealant.
- 95 -

The duct shall be riveted to the flange with rivet spacing not more than 60 mm centres. Additional
flanged joints shall be provided where necessary to facilitate erection of the ductwork and
disconnection for maintenance purposes.
All site joints for metal ductwork, other than flanged joints, shall be properly swaged plain slip type with
the inside lap in the direction air flow and shall be riveted or jointed with self-tapping screws at not
more than 60mm centres. All such joints shall be sealed and rendered airtight with a suitable sealant.
Metal duct connections to masonry shafts and other builders work openings shall be made with angle
flanges screwed to a hardwood frame fixed to grounds set in the masonry, and with the duct extended
to form a tailed entry. In the case of fire damper connection to fire barrier walls or floors, the flanged
connection shall be made to a metal companion flange provided with a suitable sealing gasket.
Where a metal duct passes through a wall, roof or other building structure, it shall be isolated from the
structure by a layer of bituminous felt over which shall be superimposed a 25 mm thick layer of
mineral wool flexible slab to which the opening shall be made good. This does not apply to fire
dampers which shall be built in.
All screws, bolts and nuts used for erection of the ductwork shall be sheradized or similarly protected.
All cut edges and other exposed metal shall be painted two coats of red oxide or zinc chromate paint
before erection; and after erection, unless special protection is specified for the service concerned, all
rivets, bolts and nuts and other exposed metal shall receive a further two coats of the same protective
paint.
Separate connections between dissimilar metals by dielectric insulation.
Make joints between dissimilar metal duct sections with companion flanges separated by a
compressed asbestos gasket.
Construct all nuts, bolts, screws and other hardware used in the sheet metal construction of materials
identical or similar to the duct material to prevent galvanic corrosion.
All grease exhaust ducts shall be fabricated to the requirements of SMACNA, ASHRAE, NFPA, and
shall be sloped towards the hood.
All grease ducts shall be constructed of 16 ga mild steel (external liquid tight welds) and covered with
flamebar coating for 2hr. fire rating.
The entire duct system including the hangers shall be certified by Flamebar and also shall bear the
approval of UL and FM.
Provide 50 mm foil faced mineral wool insulation around all grease exhaust ducts and cover 0.7 mm
aluminum jacketing.
Provide cleanouts and access per NFPA 96. Flamebar coating is not required if ductwork does not
penetrate a rated wall.
All exhaust ducts from shower areas and laundry shall be constructed of aluminum to the US sheet
metal gage per SMACNA.
Dishwasher exhaust ducts shall be stainless steel (316) to SMACNA standards.
All buried ductwork shall be constructed of ABS with gasketted push on joints. Coordinate all duct
locations with the Civil Contractor.
Supports for Duct Work

- 96 -

All necessary ductwork supports shall be provided and fixed to the building structure and all necessary
bolts, nuts, washers, screws, plugs shall also be provided.
Supports shall comply with the recommendations given in the appropriate HVCA Specification and
shall generally comprise galvanized mild steel sections and drop rods assembled in a suitable manner
to permit adjustment for height and alignment of the ducts. Vertical ductwork shall be supported by
the stiffening angles or angle flanges wherever possible, additional supporting angles being provided
on the ducts if found necessary.
The spacing of ductwork supports shall be in accordance with HVCA Specification DW 142. All
ductwork shall be supported at branch connections; and where heavy items of equipment occur within
ductwork distributions, additional support shall be provided as necessary.
All ductwork shall be supported in such a manner that no weight is imposed upon the plant to which it
is connected.
All mild steel sections used for the construction of ductwork supports shall be galvanized. Welded
work to be galvanized after manufacture shall be zinc sprayed or otherwise rust proofed in a suitable
manner.
An approved insulation shall be provided between the ductwork supports to isolate the duct from the
building structure. Supports for insulated ducts with a vapour barrier shall be constructed in
accordance with Method 2 as defined in the HVCA Specification DW 142 with supports external to the
insulation and vapour seal membrane.
Duct Work Protection

During construction all the duct work shall be covered with one layer of plastic sheet and duct ends
shall be covered with one layer of canvas.
All the foreign materials shall be removed and duct work shall be cleaned both inside and outside.
Duct work shall be cleaned before operating fans and filters. Never operate fans unless filters are
installed. After tests, wash cleanable filters and replace renewable media.
All ductwork, exposed to view will be painted.
- 97 -

11.
Registers, Grilles and Diffusers
11.1 GENERAL REFERENCE

This Section gives the general details of Air Outlets, Accessories and Installation. For specific
requirement for the particular project refer the Section Project Particular Requirement and relevant
drawings
PRODUCTS
Grilles and Diffusers

Grilles and diffusers shall be installed as indicated in the Contract Documents.
They shall be manufactured from extruded aluminum to the Engineers approval and be suitable for
their associated face velocities and of rigid construction to prevent 'fluttering' of blades and turbulent
noise.
All supply and extract grilles on distribution ductwork systems shall be complete with opposed blade
volume control dampers.
All transfer grilles through doors or walls shall be of the vision-proof type and where fitted through a
fire compartment barrier shall be of the two-faced type with one hinged, giving access to
honeycombed type fire damper.
All ceiling mounted grilles and diffusers shall be of a size compatible with the ceiling grid and shall be
arranged and coordinated with the grid and luminaries.
Similarly, sidewall grilles and diffusers shall be curved where necessary to follow the structural shape
exactly.
Plenum boxes above linear ceiling mounted diffusers shall be complete with circular connections
containing volume control dampers which shall be connected to the distribution ductwork using circular
flexible ductwork. In certain cases linear diffusers are shown to perform both a supply and
extract/return air function within the same length.
The Contractor shall include for blanking plates between the supply and the return sections as
necessary to avoid interference between air streams.
All grilles and diffusers shall be provided with foam plastic gaskets to prevent streaking of walls and
ceilings. All grilles and diffusers fitted in false ceilings shall be adequately supported off the structural
soffit and shall be arranged to impose no load on the false ceiling system.
Grilles and diffusers shall be powder coated to a colour approved by the Engineer.
A total of two operating keys shall be provided for each type of grille and diffuser.
Registers
- 98 -

Register shall be constructed of extruded anodized aluminum, and shall be of the double deflection
type with individually adjustable horizontal face bars and vertical rear bars.
Register shall be equipped with a vertical opposed blade, key operated damper assembly.
Louvers and Sand Trap Louvers

Contractor shall supply and install wherever and whenever necessary louvers for fresh air intake, and
for exhaust. They shall be anodized aluminum. Completely light proof V- Section with double frame.
Contractor shall supply and deliver door louvers to the door manufacturer for installation. They shall be
sized so that face velocity does not exceed 250 fpm (113m/s).
Louvers shall be waterproof, with fixed blades and shall have free area of 85%.
Louvers shall be furnished with minimum 15mm mesh-bird screen secured in removable extruded
aluminum frames.
Fresh air louvers shall be with opposed blade dampers and cleanable sand Trap.
Acoustic louvers shall be installed in the locations detailed wherever it is necessary. They shall be
capable of the insertion loss, for the respective size as per SMACNA Standard.
The louver shall consist of an aluminium alloy outer casing, section and jamb with mineral wool sound
absorbent material.
The mineral wool shall be protected by a glass fibre tissue facing and both shall be inert, nonhygroscopic, non-combustible, and vermin-proof and packed to a density of not less than 70 Kg/m3.
Weather louvers shall be installed wherever is it necessary. They shall be capable of the air volumes
and pressure drops detailed in SMACNA Standard.
The louvers shall be manufactured from extruded aluminum alloy sections and shall have excellent
weatherproof characteristics. The blade pitch shall be 60 mm and the frame 100 mm deep. Finish
shall be powder organic coating to BS 6496.
Sand trap louvers shall be installed wherever it is necessary. They shall be constructed from sheet
aluminum, not less than 1.2mm thick, mounted on angle supports and carried in a louver box of the
same thickness. The base member of the box shall slope downwards to the outside of the building at
an angle of 15o. The louvers shall be of the labyrinth type designed to achieve velocity changes of the
air passing through it inducing the sand to drop out. All type of louvres shall be powder coated to a
colour approved by the Engineer and complete with insect screen.
Execution
Installation of Air Outlets

The Contractor shall supply and install, in the locations shown on the drawings, supply and return
linear diffusers. The slot diffusers shall be suitable for horizontal discharge by the adjustment of the
blades.
Seal all outlets around the edges to prevent air leakage with proper gasket or sealant subject to
Engineer approval.
Diffuse supply air velocities shall not excess of 0.25 m/s at 1.8 m floor level.
Diffusers shall be of diffusion and air mixing type. Diffusion shall be effected without objectionable air
motion at a point within 1.8m above the floor line.
- 99 -

The specified discharge volume shall be diffused at a noise level of not more than 30 decibels. Room
air shall be mixed with the primary air to effect subsequent equalization of the room temperature and
prevent air pockets.
In addition equalizing deflectors shall be installed on all air diffusers with concealed stay rods. Diffuser
shall not project appreciably below ceiling or duct.
The selection shown on the drawings is concept and the Contractor shall check the air performance of
the diffusers prior to placing any orders.
The selection shall be based on the ceiling heights shown on the drawings and an air temperature
differential (room to air supply) of 10o C.
The noise rating in NR for a horizontal projection supply linear diffuser of 2 slots and 1700mm long
shall not exceed 29 NR when supplying 100 L/S second per active meter.
The pressure drop with the damper in the 100 percent open position shall not exceed 40 Pa for the
supply air.
Select all diffusers to provide uniform air coverage without overlap. Air velocity up to a height of 6 feet
(1.8m) above the floor shall be 25 to 50 fpm (0.13 to 0.25 m/s).
Noise generated by diffusers at peak volume shall be such that room sound pressure level does not
exceed noise criterion 26 with 8 dB room attenuation, the sound power watts.
The Contractor shall provide details of all openings and timber frames required for grilles and diffusers
to Engineers approval.
12
PIPE WORK AND FITTINGS

Each part of the piping system shall be complete in all details and provided with all central
valves and accessories necessary for satisfactory operation.
The tender drawing indicates generally the size of all piping. While the sizes are not to be
decreased, the contractor will check and change the runs and sizing of piping to
accommodate conditions during construction subject to engineer approval.
All piping shall be grouped wherever practical and shall be erected to present a neat
appearance. Pipes shall be parallel to each other and parallel or at right angles to structural
members of the building and shall give maximum possible headroom.
All pipe drops shall be truly vertical. No joints shall be formed in thickness of walls, floor or
ceilings.
Pipes shall generally be set around columns and shall follow the contour of the building
whether so indicated on the drawings or not. Piping shall not pass in front of doorways or
windows and shall be generally arranged so that it is at least 200 cm above finished floor level
and at least 2.5 cm from finished wall face. Sufficient space is to be allowed for accessibility
for servicing.
Piping shall be perched for proper circulation and drainage.
Run outs shall be graded in such a manner to prevent air traps and to allow natural venting of
horizontal piping to be installed with a Minimum slope of 0.2% upward pitch towards the
vertical riser. U-shape routing of pipe work shall be avoided. Automatic vents are to be
provided at high points, with isolating valves.
All drain piping shall pitch down in direction of flow. All low points of the system must be fitted
with drain valves to permit the complete draining of the system. Bottoms of all risers must
have dirt pockets of the size of riser at least 30 cm long with a drain valve fitted. All water
- 100 -

piping to equipment shall be connected with either flanges or unions for dismantling and
removal. All piping shall be seamed after cutting to remove all burns.
All reduction in sizes of piping in the direction of down ward pitch shall be installed with
eccentric fittings to maintain bottom level.
Approved pipe fittings shall be used and bending of pipes will not be normally allowed. Piping
shall not be installed passing through ductwork or directly under electric light outlets or extend
beyond furring lines determined by the plans.
In placing pipes through sleeves, near wall, partitions or in chases, care must be taken to
provide sufficient space for pipe covering or insulation.
Where pipes are held in vices, as when screwing, care shall be taken to ensure that the pipe
surface is not damaged. Any pipe work so damaged shall be replaced.
All chilled water pipes used to be of seamless black steel according to BS 1387 (Medium
weight).
AHUs and FCUs drain lines should be PVC pipes.
All pipes stored on site shall be kept clear off the ground and where possible stored under
cover. Special care should be taken to prevent dirt and foreign matter entering open ends of
pipes during erection. The contractor should note that a valve fitted to the open end of a
disconnected pipe is not considered satisfactory to prevent entry of foreign matter. Screwed
iron caps or plugs or plastic covers shall be used to seal pipe ends. Wood, rags, or other
makeshift plugs are not permitted.
Before connection up to return mains the systems of piping must be blow and flushed out.
After flushing all strainers shall be opened and gaskets cleaned.
Gate valve shall be used for shut off purposes and globe valves (unless otherwise indicated)
shall be used for balancing purposes. All valves shall be designed for packing under pressure
when fully open. Shut off valves shall be installed on both sides of all equipment.
Balancing double regulating valves shall be installed on the outlet lines of air handling units,
FCU's, chillers and pumps.
All flanged joints shall be flushed and truly aligned and made with approved corrugated rings,
compressed asbestos or composition joints.
Flanges or union shall be provided on straight runs at not greater than 12m interval.
There shall be strainers in the suction line of the pumps. All strainers to be suitable for
pressure as stipulated for system concerned and to be inspected and pressure tested at
works.
All strainers shall be cast iron or bronze bodied of ample strength for the pressure to which
they shall be subjected and with suitable flanges or tapping.
Insulated CW piping passing through external wall partitions to be provided with a PVC or GI
sleeve with the whole thickness of the wall and of 1" bigger than insulated pipe, filling it with
adequate sealing compound. Insulated CW piping passing through slab to be provided with
sleeve as mentioned above but to be ended 1" higher than the finished floor level.
Insulation
GENERAL REFERENCE
This Section gives the general details of Thermal and Acoustic Insulation and Installation.
Duct acoustic lining
- 101 -

Acoustical insulation of glass fiber 1/2" thick and 32 Kg/cubic m shall be fixed to internal duct
surface of each fan coil discharge duct for a min. length of 3 meters from fan outlet and shall
extend to the first duct elbow when possible.
All air handling units shall have sound attenuators installed on both supply and return duct.
Duct insulation
Thermal indoor duct insulation shall be glass fibber with embossed aluminum foil factory
applied as manufacture, have thermal conductivity of 0.27 with 1" thick (24 Kg/m3) at mean
temperature of 75 degree Fahrenheit. Insulation shall be fixed on duct as recommended by
the insulation manufacturer.
12.3
Outdoor (ots, roof, top roof and service floor) duct insulation to be 2" thick rigid board
of fiberglass with density of 48 Kg/m3 with vapor barrier of alum. Foil as shown in detail
drawings.
All duct insulation to be protected with 6-oz. canvas and 2 coats of foster 30-36. A third coat of
foster 57.86 shall be applied to outdoor ducting and one layer for antifungal paint in door
Duct insulation and lining to be adhered to sheet metal duct by foster adhesive 81-22 or
equivalent approved adhesive and to be applied on 50% of ducting area on top side and the
full surface of duct on other sides.
14
Pipe work thermal insulation (indoors & outdoors)

14.1
14.2
Pipe work will be thermally insulated with rigid section of glass fiber insulation with
density of 64 Kg/m3 for the use of between the temperature of 32 degree Fahrenheit
and 150 degree Fahrenheit and having a K factor of 0.23 at mean temperature of 50
degree Fahrenheit with self applied aluminum craft paper.
PRODUCTS
- 102 -

Glass Fibre Insulation
Glass fibre insulation shall have a maximum thermal conductivity of 0.0423 W/moC at 10o C,
approximate density 65 kg/m3 and shall be in accordance with the provisions of BS 3958.
Glass fibre insulation in the form of rigid slabs shall be resin bonded, nonabsorbent, nonhygroscopic foil faced for rectangular duct work.
The pipe Insulation shall be same type with rigid section, self applied aluminium vapour
barrier, moulded factory made fit to pipe.
The thickness of insulation shall be 25mm for internal work and 50 mm for external exposed to
weather unless otherwise specified elsewhere.
Closed Cell Rubber Insulation

Closed cell rubber or elsewhere insulation shall have a closed cell rigid structure - of 48 kg/m3
giving a maximum thermal conductivity of 0.023 W/moC and shall be satisfactory for a
temperature range of 0oC to 140oC and shall have self-extinguishing fire properties and have
a Class 1 rating to BS 476: Part 7.
Water vapour transmission shall not exceed 0.140o metric per ms and average water
absorption of 1.7% by volume at 28 days immersion.
The material shall be supplied as pre-formed pipe sections, in tubular or pre-slit form or rolled
sheet as applicable.
The thickness of insulation shall be min 13mm for internal and 19mm for external unless
otherwise specified.
This insulation shall be applied in accordance with manufacturer recommendation using nonflammable adhesive.
All open edges, joints and the like shall be sealed with an adhesive recommended by the
manufacturer and the joint shall receive a final seal of pressure sensitive self adhesive tape.
All exposed insulation shall be give two coats of Chloro-Sulphonated polyethylene paint.
Polyisocynurate or Phenolic Insulation

The polyisocynurate or phenolic insulation shall be of 65 kg/m3 density, 0.023 W/m o C
thermal conductivity, aluminium foil backed and vapour sealed material shall be nonabsorbent, non-hygroscopic foil faced, formed rigid slab for all rectangular ductwork. Material
shall be of same type with pre-formed pipe section for all pipe works.
The thickness of insulation shall be 25mm for internal work and 50mm for external work
unless otherwise specified.
- 103 -

EXECUTION
Application of Insulation to Pipe Work

All thermal insulation shall be applied where specified and in accordance with the Schedule of
Insulation in a careful and efficient manner to give a smooth, homogenous and cleanable
surface and to present a neat and symmetrical appearance.
Rigid sections shall be concentric and accurately matched for thicknesses. Damaged ends
will not be accepted and any irregular or badly finished surfaces shall be stripped and relagged to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
At bends, tees etc. the sectional insulation shall be formed into neat segments. The sections
of insulation shall be carefully butted together to ensure the absence of gaps in the insulation
and to prevent voids forming between the insulation and the pipe work.
All insulation shall be fixed with a quick-setting & non-flammable adhesive applied over the
whole of the surface to which the insulation is to be applied.
All joints shall be adequately sealed.
The insulation and finish or cladding shall be neatly terminated at the flange or valve up to and
including 65mm ND pipe work.
On all sizes of pipe work where a vapour seal and insulation are required, the pipe applied
insulation shall terminate at a load bearing insulant of the same type for pipe support points
and the vapour seal and insulation finish shall be dressed down to the bare pipe 50 mm either
side of valves or flanges.
An aluminum or stainless steel box shall be fitted over valves and flanges. The box shall
include as an integral part, sleeves of the same material as the box which shall overlap the
vapour sealed load bearing insulant on the adjoining pipe work on each side and fit closely
about it.
The space between the sleeve and the overlapped insulation and its finish shall be filled with
an approved sealant. The sleeved valve/flange box shall be lined with aluminum foil, the
whole space between the uninsulated pipe, valve/flange shall then be filled with a closed cell
polymer injected foam insulant suitable for a temperature range of -20oC to +110oC. The
foamed insulation shall terminate at the top of the valve bonnet and any surplus foam shall be
wiped clean.
Care shall be taken to ensure that the injected foam does not impede the valve operation.
Valve spindles, hand wheels and the like shall be contained in a removable section of the
valve box permitting access to hand wheels.
The hand wheels and spindles shall be wrapped with an adhesive closed cell insulating tape
as a primary precaution. A loose mattress of insulation shall then be inserted in the cavity
between the removable valve box section and hand wheel/spindle and a vapour barrier of
aluminum foil shall be applied over the loose insulation mattress.
Oversized pipe supports shall be used on pipes where a vapour seal is required. At support points the
specified pipe insulant shall be replaced by a load bearing insulant of incompressible hardwood or
other approved material.
The insulation shall be contained with a load bearing sleeve of glass reinforced plastic or other
approved material which shall also act as the vapour barrier.
- 104 -

The sleeve shall extend beyond either end of the load bearing insulation and be arranged to go over
the adjoining pipe insulant and its vapour seal..
The space between the vapour seal and the sleeve shall be completely filled with a suitable mastic
compound to maintain the integrity of the vapour barrier.
The load bearing insulant shall be of the same overall outside diameter as the adjoining pipe insulation
and vapour seal and of a length suitable to support the pipe at any position that it may take up relative
to its support under thermal or other movement and in any case not less than twice the width of the
support.
Where low frictional support points are required, PTFE pads shall be used.
The method of insulating and vapour sealing pipework at anchor points shall be to the approval of the
Engineer.
Particular attention shall be paid to sealing all such points against water vapour ingress.
The vapour barrier shall be extended to the pipe surface every 4.0 m on vertical risers, so that any
failure in the vapour barrier can be easily identified.
Where foamed plastic pipe insulation is specified it shall generally be of the slit type. All joints shall be
closed and sealed with adhesive as recommended by the manufacturer of the insulation after its
application and the butt joint shall receive a final seal of pressure sensitive self adhesive tape.
Foam insulation exposed to sun light shall be protected by an approved UV finish. Insulation of fittings
shall be formed by mitre cut straight sections.
Valves on foamed plastic insulated pipework shall be insulated with self adhesive insulation tape with
similar characteristics to the foamed plastic insulation. The tape shall be 50 mm wide by 3 mm thick
and shall be built up to a thickness equal to that for the adjoining pipework. At pipe supports loading
bearing non-compressible insulation sections of the same appearance as the adjoining insulation shall
be provided.
Application of Insulation to Duct Work

The insulation shall be of rigid slab type cut to fit such that top and bottom pieces overlap the sides.
The insulation shall be bonded to the ductwork with an approved adhesive applied in 150 mm wide
bonds at no greater than 300mm intervals.
The fixing of side and underside insulation sections shall be reinforced by means of spot welded nails
or self adhesive nails secured with spring loaded washers at appropriate intervals.
All ductwork insulation exposed to view in plant rooms, service tunnels, risers, and like areas shall
have its corners reinforced by stiff cardboard angles fixed firmly to the insulation by adhesive.
The insulation shall then be covered by glass scrim cloth treated against fungal attack and securely
fixed by means of a suitable adhesive.
Flexible connections shall not normally be insulated. Where test holes are provided the insulation
shall be beveled to form a neat access hole 75 mm in diameter around the test hole.
Access doors in insulated ducts shall be of the double skin insulated type.
Where a vapour seal has been required for the insulation the vapour seal shall be continued around
the termination of the insulation in order to preserve the integrity of the vapour seal.
- 105 -

Furthermore, the ductwork supports shall not be connected to the ductwork stiffening or flanges but
shall incorporate an insulator to which the insulation and vapour barrier shall abut and maintain the
continuity of the vapour barrier.
The supporting insulator shall be incompressible and consist of hardwood, rot proof softwood or other
approved material.
Below ground builders work ducts shall be insulated externally by means of an approved closed cell
impermeable polymer insulant applied in the form of slabs.
The Contractor shall ensure that the vapour barrier is carefully sealed where it abuts grilles and
diffusers.
Vapour Barriers and Application

Where required, vapour barriers shall be applied to thermal insulation to prevent condensation
occurrence on cold surfaces. Vapour barriers shall be continuous in all respects and shall have a
permanence not exceeding 0.04 g/mNs at any point along its length.
The whole of the insulation on pipework and ductwork requiring vapour barriers shall be covered with
a continuous uniform brush applied coating of a PVA vapour barrier solution. A 6 oz glass scrim cloth
shall be embedded and adhered in this coating and smoothed to give an unwrinkled finish.
Before application, the cloth shall be treated with an approved fungicide, to prevent mould growth.
The cloth shall have a 50 mm overlap.
After a 24 hour period two further coats of a vinyl vapour barrier with a water vapour transmission of
0.04 perm at 0.38 mm dry film thickness shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations.
The vapour barrier shall be continued around end termination of insulation including where the normal
insulant terminates at valve and flange boxes, pipe and duct supports and the like to preserve the
integrity of the barrier and to provide sectional barriers to prevent any condensation that may for any
reason form in a section of insulation from spreading unduly.
Under circumstances where a brush applied vapour barrier may but readily be applied Insitu the
Contractor shall allow for fabricating insulating and sealing the section of pipe or ductwork involved
before fixing in position.
The vapour seal shall be continued over flanges: and at any point where the vapour seal will be
interrupted by such as thermostats an approved sealant material shall be applied to provide a flashing
around the projection through the insulation. This also applies to valves and the flashing shall be
provided at the top of the valve bonnet.
Aluminum Cladding and Application

Aluminium protective cladding shall be formed from 0.8 mm thick plain aluminium sheet with overlap
joint secured with pop rivets.
Care shall be taken to ensure that no damage to the insulation surface or its outer finishes occur in
this process.
Where pipe work is located in a particularly vulnerable position or so as to obstruct normal man access
such that it may be climbed 1.0 mm stainless steel cladding shall be provided in lieu of the specified
aluminium for that entire section.
Where flanges, valves, unions, etc.. have to be insulated the cladding shall take the form of
demountable casings fabricated from 0.8 mm aluminium sheeting.
Weather Proof Cladding

- 106 -

Weatherproof cladding for insulation situated externally subject to weather or damp conditions shall be
applied where duct work is exposed.
Where weatherproof cladding is required for ductwork systems, the ductwork shall be insulated as
described for an exposed to view situation.
The ductwork insulation together with any supercoating specified such as a vapour barrier shall then
be enclosed in a covering of polyisobutylene sheet fixed firmly with adhesive and solvent welded to
form complete seals and to ensure a uniformly impervious seal around the insulation.
The polyisobutylene covering shall be contained within an aluminium cladding jacket as specified
above with folded corners and held in place by means of rivets and sealed at all joints with a non
setting sealing compound.
The upper face of External Square and rectangular section ductwork shall have its insulation built up
above the specified thickness to give a fall of not less than 1:200 on all horizontal surfaces.
Weatherproof cladding on pipe work shall be formed by applying polyisobutylene sheet over the
specified insulation and its appropriate super coating fixed firmly by means of an adhesive, lapped and
solvent welded to form a completely impervious seal around the insulation.
The polyisobutylene covering shall be contained within an external coating of 0.8 mm minimum
thickness aluminium cladding sheet pop-riveted in position and sealed at the joints with non-setting
sealing compound.
Where insulated pipes or ducts enter a building through roof or wall, the clad insulation shall be
continued through the entry and the cladding shall be formed into the weathering flashings.
Painting of Pipe Work and Duct Work

Insulation in plant rooms, service tunnels, service risers and elsewhere exposed to view shall be
painted except where a cladding finish has been specified.
Painting shall comprise an undercoat and not less than two finishing coats. Absorbent surfaces shall
also receive an initial coat of priming paint. All paints shall be compatible with the surfaces to which
they are applied.
The Contractor shall allow for providing different coloured paint finishes for each system as may be
directed by the Engineer selected from the range contained in BS 4800.
All pipes whether insulated or not shall be identified by code indication colour bands in accordance
with BS 1710: 1980. Colour bands shall not be provided on pipes which are to be painted to match
internal decorations.
Ductwork shall be identified by code indication colour bands in accordance with HVCA Specification
DW 142.
In addition to the identification band coding all services shall be legibly and neatly marked with black
letters where a light background is used and white letters where a dark background is used and
appropriately coloured triangles to indicate the direction of flow as follows:
Primary Chilled Water

Secondary Chilled Water
Outside Air
Return Air
Exhaust Air
Supply Air
P.CHW
S.CHW
OA
RA
EA
SA
- 107 -

15 Hangers & Supports

GENERAL REFERENCE
This Section gives the general details of Hangers, Guides, Joints, Anchors and
Installation. For specific requirement for the particular project refer the Section
Project Particular Requirement and relevant drawings
PRODUCTS MATERIALS
All hangers are to be designed in accordance with MSS-SP-58.

Acceptable pipe hanger suppliers are Grinnell, Myatt, Hilti , SMC/Pipe Supports Ltd
and Tolco or approved equal.
Adjustable clevis type pipe hangers shall be galvanized steel.
Pipe rolls shall have cast iron rollers, shaped to accept the outside diameter of the
insulated pipe. Roll shall either rotate on a steel shaft mounted on a cast iron stand
or shall roll on a cast iron bed plate. All components shall be galvanized.
Expansion joints for 200mm diameter pipe and larger shall be pack less bellow type
with equalizing rings, stainless steel bellows, limit stops, internal telescoping sleeves
and carbon steel bevelled welding ends.
- 108 -

Expansion joints for 150mm diameter and smaller shall be pack less bellows type with stainless steel
bellows, anti-torque device, limit stops, guides and threaded pipe ends, or victualic style 150 mover
expansion complings complete with style 07 rigid couplings with nitrile gaskets.
All expansion joints shall be rated for 2070 kpa (300 psig), operating pressure.
The flexible connector shall be made of multi-layer nylon tire cord fabric reinforcement with EPDM
cover and liner. Straight connectors shall have minimum two spheres. Connectors 50mm and smaller
may have threaded ends. Larger sizes shall have baked enamel ductile iron floating flanges. There
shall be a molded-in ductile iron reinforcing ring. Flexible connectors shall be by an acceptable
manufacturer such as Proco Series 242, Flexonics, Isolated systems, Mason.
Flexible connector shall be rated for 2070 kPa at 30C, and 1130 kPa at 121C.
Where flexible connectors are connected to unanchored piping or isolated equipment, provide control
cables and rods when pressure exceeds the maximum recommended for this application by the
manufacturer.
Flexible hoses shall be stainless steel braid and carbon steel fittings.
EXECUTION
Hanger spacing shall be as shown in 15100.1.7.6. In addition, provide a hanger within 600mm on
each side of a valve, elbow or tee. Where the building structure will not accept the weight of pipe,
insulation and contents, at maximum span shown, the Contractor shall reduce the hanger spacing as
required by the Engineer.
For chilled water pipe, use a galvanized steel insulation protection shield between the insulation and
the hanger. The shield width shall be minimum 1/4 of the pipe circumference. The length and gauge
shall be as follows:
300MM LONG AND 18 US GA FOR PIPES UP TO 75MM
600MM LONG AND 16 US GA FOR PIPES 100MM TO 150MM
600MM LONG AND 14 US GA FOR PIPES 200MM TO 300MM
600MM LONG AND 12 US GA FOR PIPES LARGER THAN 300MM
Refer to Insulation Specification for insulation between pipe and pipe hanger.
Unless otherwise specified or shown, all pipes installed on roof or supported from below shall be
mounted on pipe rolls. Outdoor rolls shall be galvanized.
Provide plastic coated clevis hangers for copper piping. All horizontal piping 50mm dia and larger
shall be supported by adjustable galvanized wrought iron clevis type hangers.
Unless otherwise specified or shown, vertical pipes shall be supported at least every 9 m. Install
expansion joint between every two supports.
Install resilient hangers as specified under Article entitled 'Vibration and Noise Control.
For pipe sizes of 200 diameter and larger, pipe supports shall be designed and installed of structural
steel in accordance with section 5100 and reviewed by the Engineer. All structural steel in contact
with the pipes shall then be insulated as the pipe. Submit details for review.
Provide for the expansion and contraction of all pipes. Install expansion joints to have sufficient
flexibility to prevent end thrust and movements caused by thermal expansion or contraction causing
detrimental distortion or damage of connected equipment. Provide offsets between mains and
equipment of sufficient length to safely absorb the expansion of the main. Provide guides as
necessary.
- 109 -

During operation, the chilled water supply temperature will be 6C. If expansion joints in chilled water
lines are installed at a time when the ambient air temperature is above 30C, they shall be precompressed in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. Expansion joints shall have
sufficient number of corrugations to absorb the expansion between anchors in the pipe plus not less
than 25% safety factory for the temperature range between 4C to 50C.
Provide one expansion joint between every two rigid supports for all chilled water risers. Provide
guides at distances of 4 pipe diameters, 14 pipe diameters and at 3 meter intervals after that, from the
expansion joint.
Provide expansion joints for all pipes crossing building expansion joints.
Provide flexible connectors at all pumps.
Install units as per manufacturers printed installations instructions.
Support pipe and equipment such that connector carries no weight.
16 Ventilation Fans
GENERAL REFERENCE
This Section gives the general details of Ventilation Fans and Installation. For specific requirement for
the particular project refer the Section Project Particular Requirement and relevant drawings
PRODUCTS
GENERAL
For belt-driven fans, fan and motor shall have one-piece base with adjustable motor mount. Each fan
shall be provided with fan sheave, motor sheave, matched V-belts and belt guard. Where motor is 10
hp (7.5 kW) or less, motor sheave shall be variable pitch. Where motor exceeds 10 HP (7.5 kW),
motor sheave shall be fixed pitch, to be replaced with a correctly sized pitch sheave after air
balancing. Drivers shall be designed for 150% of motor nameplate rating. Provide variable frequency
drive with each fan where called for in the fan schedule. Fan motor shall be suitable for VFD
application.
Published performance fan ratings shall be obtained in accordance with the procedures as set forth by
the AMCA test code for air moving and shall be AMCA certified.
Submit the manufacturer's certified sound power ratings with an octave band analysis and the basis
on which they have been established to the Engineer for approval as part of the fan shop drawings.
Make one set of these curves available to the supplier of sound and vibration isolation equipment.
Each fan shall be statically and dynamically balanced at the factory and shall operate quietly and
without pulsation.
On fans 100 l/s and larger, permanently lubricated bearings are not acceptable. Bearings on shafts
15/16 (24mm) and larger shall be split pillow block, self aligning ball or roller bearings with seals less
grease nipple. In addition, bearings on shafts 1-7/16" (37mm) and larger shall have grease nipple
and grease relief valve. Bearings on shafts smaller than 15/16" (24mm) shall be pillow block, selfaligning ball bearings with seals and with grease nipple. Flanged bearings may only be provided for
shafts 15/16" (24mm) and smaller. They shall be heavy duty; four bolt type, self-aligning with seals
and with grease nipple. It is preferred that all bearings be accessible for lubrication and service. Where
it is difficult to provide such access, extended lubrication lines shall be provided. When such lines
- 110 -

extend to split pillow block bearings, a grease relief valve shall be provided. Bearings shall have a
minimum average life of 100,000 hours.
All fans, without ducts or dampers on inlet or outlet, including fans in plenums, shall have protective
screens on openings.
Provide gravity dampers on the outlet of all exhaust fans, unless motorized dampers are specified
under Article entitled 'Thermostatic Controls' or shown on drawings. Provide wall cap with back draft
damper where shown on the drawings.
Fan and motor assembly shall be mounted on vibration isolators with the fan housing.
Vibration isolation shall be as specified under Article entitled 'Vibration and Noise Control'.
Fan motors for outdoor application or if located in air stream shall be totally enclosed fan-cooled type.
Fans installed in corrosive environments shall be treated both internally and externally with 2 coats of
epoxy paint and shall be of all aluminium construction. Motors shall be TEFC type.
Small Extract Wall Mounted Fans

The wall or window mounted fans shall be installed in the locations shown on the drawings and shall
be capable of the duty as stated elsewhere
The fan unit shall consist of a propeller fan housing, back draught shutters and discharge grille.
Construction shall be of high quality moulded plastic. Operation shall be through a local on/off switch.
Fan motors shall be totally enclosed in aluminum alloy case and shall be protected by a thermal
overload cut-out. Motor bearings shall be self-aligning oil impregnated porous bushes with ample oil
reservoir. Electrical supply shall be single phase.
CENTRIFUGAL FANS
All centrifugal fans handling more than 1000 CFM. (500 l/s), shall have backward inclined blades,
unless shown otherwise.
All fans shall have arrangement as shown in drawings.
Provide access doors on the fan scroll. Doors shall be hinged, in reinforced angle frames and provided
with clamping devices. Minimum size shall be 18" x 14" (450mm x 350mm) or full width of fan scroll, if
scroll is less than 18" (450mm) wide.
Provide drain connections at the low point of fan scroll or where shown. Drains shall be 1" (25mm)
pipe size half coupling welded into the bottom of the scroll with a square headed, threaded, brass
plug.
Utility fans shall conform to the specification for centrifugal fans above with the exception of the drive
arrangement and belt guard. Drive shall be standard utility arrangement and belt guard may be
omitted if a hood is provided over the drive.
Centrifugal fans shall be in accordance with the Fan Schedule.
Acceptable Manufacturers: Refer Approved Manufacturer and Local Supplier Section.
AXIAL FLOW FANS

Fans shall have cast airfoil shaped adjustable pitch blades and galvanized or painted heavy gauge
steel casing.
- 111 -

Motor shall be belt-drive with motor on outside of casing.
Where fan is connected to plenum on inlet or outlet, provide an inlet or outlet cone as manufactured
for the fan and a protective screen.
Where fan is connected to inlet or outlet ductwork, provide an inlet cone as manufactured for the fan
or as shown on drawings.
Provide an access door in the fan casing or in adjacent ductwork 18" x 18" (450mm x 450mm)
minimum size or larger if required, to remove the motor.
Fans shall be provided either for vertical or horizontal installation as shown on drawings. Fans shall
have factory mounted, rolled steel ring for flanged duct connections.
Fans shall be tested in accordance with ISO5801 Part 1 for aerodynamic performance and BS 848
Part 3 (1985) for acoustic performance.
They shall be single or multistage, as appropriate and shall have non overloading fan characteristics.
Impellers shall be of the high efficiency aerofoil, adjustable pitch type, precision made and shall be Xray tested after casting.
Casings shall be manufactured from galvanized steel with access facilities for lubrication, maintenance
and pitch adjustment. Alternatively, lubricators may be of the external type using nylon tubes and
grease nipples on the casing. Casings shall be of the long case type and the whole assembly shall be
suitable for horizontal or vertical installation.
Motors shall be suitable for operation in the worst case air stream conditions. As a minimum standard,
motors of the totally enclosed fan cooled, IP 54, Class F type.
All axial fans shall be installed on proprietary mounting plates with matching vibration isolations bolted
to the supporting structure.
Acceptable manufacturers: Refer Approved Manufacturer and Local Supplier Section.
TUBULAR CENTRIFUGAL FANS

Fans shall be belt driven Tubular Centrifugal with non-over loading airfoil centrifugal fan wheel.
Performance characteristics shall include a sharply rising pressure characteristic throughout its
operating range and exhibit non-overloading power characteristics with the peak in the normal
operating area of the curve.
Wheels shall be high efficiency, non-overloading, airfoil type with die-formed double surface,
continuously welded blades to hub plate and wheel cone.
Shafts shall be AISI C-1045 lot rolled steel, turned, ground and polished with its first critical speed at
least 140% of the maximum operating speed.
Bearings shall be heavy-duty, self-aligning pillow block type.
Where indicated in the fan schedule, provide variable inlet vanes with stainless steel rods, and low
friction bearings for smooth and vibration less performance and suitable for motorized operation.
Housing shall be heavy gauge steel, structurally reinforced and braced to prevent vibration and
pulsation of all wedded construction with lifting lugs, support brackets, and straightening vanes.
- 112 -

IN-LINE CENTRIFUGAL FANS
Fans shall be belt-driven in-line centrifugal units with backward inclined, aluminium fan wheels in
reinforced, zinc coated heavy gauge steel housings.
Motors shall be mounted on adjustable bases outside the air stream.
All internal components shall be accessible through removable or hinged access panels.
Provide disconnect switch mounted on the exterior of the fan casing.
Provide a matching wire mesh guard over the fan inlet and/or outlet if no ductwork is connected at this
location.
Twin fans shall have integral back draft dampers, and two identical fans, motors and drives.
In-line centrifugal fans shall be in accordance with the Fan Schedule.
Fan casing shall be acoustically lined with 12mm thick acoustic insulation.
Fans shall be supplied with filter sections and washable filter media where noted. Filter sections shall
be closed couple to the fan.
CABINET FANS
Cabinet fans shall be belt drive centrifugal units with forward curved, aluminum fan wheels in
reinforced, galvanized steel housings.
Motor and fan shall be mounted on vibration isolators.
All internal components shall be accessible through removable or hinged access panels.
Provide a disconnect plug mounted on the interior of the fan casing.
Fan casing shall be lined with 1/2" (12mm) thick acoustic insulation.
All cabinet fans shall be licensed to bear the AMCA seal for air flow and sound level performance.
Cabinet fans shall be suspended from rubber-in-shear vibration isolators.
Cabinet fans shall be in accordance with the Fan Schedule.
The units shall be duplicate fan assemblies mounted on heavy gauge plate within a compact casing.
The fans shall be high efficiency double inlet forward curved centrifugal impellers, belt driven by
individual motors and mounted on individual scrolls. Anti-vibration mountings shall support the motors
to the fan motor scrolls and the fan scrolls to the mounting plates reducing mechanical noise and
vibration.
Air operated flow switches shall be fitted in each scroll to sense airflow failure under fault conditions
and shall activate a fault warning signal and automatically changeover to the standby fan.
Automatic shutters shall be fitted at the fan outlets to prevent "blow-back" through the standby fan.
The motors and fan failure switches shall be pre-wired to an isolator fitted to the unit case.
- 113 -

The fan motors shall have Class "F" insulation and be suitable for a single/ three phase electrical
supply.
Each unit shall be supplied complete with the following accessories: Flexible connections, Mounting
brackets and Automatic changeover controller.
Roof Mounted Extract Fans

Roof mounted extract units shall be installed in the locations shown on the Contract Documents
For ducted systems they shall comprise belt drive mixed flow fans mounted in low contour
weatherproof housings arranged for curb or purlin mounting as appropriate.
The housings shall be constructed from heavy gauge aluminum alloy or moulded in fire retardant
glass-fibre reinforced resin.
Matched silencers shall be provided subject to confirmation of noise levels by the contractor.
An access panel shall facilitate access to the interior for maintenance.
The fans shall be single inlet high performance mixed flow type manufactured in aluminum alloy and
dynamically balanced. Asymmetric blade spacing shall be incorporated to reduce noise levels.
Motors shall belt drive the fans and shall have bearing sealed for life time. Electrical supply shall be
single phase/three phase.
Twin fan units on toilet and kitchen extract systems shall incorporate duty and standby fans within the
same housing.
Automatic changeover shall be initiated by flow sensors mounted in the ducts and a controller shall
provide duty sharing of the fans at regular timed intervals.
High Temperature Kitchen Extract Fans

Central kitchen exhaust fans shall be high temperature exhaust fan, unless explicitly mentioned on the
drawings.
It shall be suitable for high temperature exhaust up to 250o F continuous operation casing is to be in
aluminum alloy. Impeller shall be belt driven with motor outside air stream to avoid grease.
Motor shall manufacture to BS 5000, TEFC class F insulation.
Fan is to have top discharge mounted on a curb.
Impeller is to be dynamically balanced. If drawings specify twin fan for kitchen exhaust, above specs
still valid.
If this is not possible to house two fans in one, then two fans will be installed as per the above
specification for high temperature fans
PROPELLER FANS
Propeller Fans shall be belt driven axial type sidewall fans with cast aluminum blades and hubs.
Provide galvanized steel frame and panel assemblies of formed channels, with formed flanges and
deep formed inlet venture.
- 114 -

Mount fan as shown on the drawings with a manufacture supplied wall housing of galvanized steel
construction. Provide wall-housing guard, and back draft draper. Wall housing shall be installed
entirely within the exhaust shaft and allow for complete servicing from out side of shaft.
Fan, motor, wall housing and accessories shall be suitable for out door installation.
Apartment kitchen / range hood

600mm wide range hood, re-circulating type, complete with 3-speed fan switch, combined
charcoal/grease filters, slim line design, 2 x 40w lamps, glass visor, stainless steel construction,
and switched.
Exhaust airflow 85 l/s, 240/1/50, 50 w. Refer Approved Manufacturer and Local Supplier Section.
EXECUTION INSTALLATION
Provide static pressure calculations for all fans based on actual shop drawings for review before
final selection of fans.
Provide vibration isolation as per relevant Section.
Install all kitchen exhaust fans to NFPA 96 requirements.
The Contractor shall supply and install all fans as indicated on the drawings and detailed in the
schedules.
Unless otherwise specified these shall be of the cabinet, centrifugal type and shall be selected with
particular attention to low noise levels. Electrical connections shall be via plug in type connector
and a short length of heat resisting flexible cable connected to an adjacent flex outlet plate or rated
isolator supplied and installed by others.
All fans shall be supplied with automatic non return dampers. Alternatively approved duct mounted
dampers may be installed providing adequate access to the dampers is provided.
Construct all apparatus of materials suitable for the conditions encountered during operation.
Where corrosion can occur, appropriate corrosion-resistant materials and assembly methods must
be used including isolation of dissimilar metal against galvanic interaction.
Locate and arrange motors, filters, and other components and accessories so that they are
accessible for repair maintenance and replacement.
Mount grease fittings directly on bearings unless the latter are not readily accessible. Where
equipment bearing are not visible or are inaccessible, provide easily accessible extensions to
bearing lubrication fittings.
Thoroughly clean the entire system before installing fitters or iterating the fans.
On systems containing filters, install filters and permanently seal the filter frames air-tight before
operating the fans. The Contractor, at his own expense, shall replace all dirty filters before turning
over the system to the Client.
16
Distribution Board And Electrical Work

16.1 General
- 115 -

Power supply will be provided through suitable fused switch in each AHU room, fan room and
plant room. The contractor shall furnish all labor and materials for all connections from the
said supply to units including all wiring, conduits, starters, push-buttons, control wiring etc. A
weatherproof isolator must be provided for each chiller.
16.2 Control Panel

Control panel for plant room shall be of the cubicle type floor standing and contain the
following: a. Incoming molded case circuit breaker with HR fuses.
b. Bus bar for each phase, neutral and earth.
c. Outgoing molded case circuit breaker for each chiller and pump.
d. Starter with over load for each pump.
e. Pilot light for each phase.
f. Pilot light for each motor in plant room.
g. On-off switch for each chiller control panel.
h. Push-button (start-stop) for each motor in plant room.
I. One main ammeter and one voltmeter each with selector switch
j. One ammeter for each motor in plant room.
k. All required interlock wiring.
l. Pump duty selector switch.
m. Phase monitor for each motor.
n. Low voltage protection device.
16.3 In case of installing the panel outdoors, the panel should be weatherproof type, and provided
with adequate ventilating fan.
17
Water Treatment
a) Piping system should be flushed through twice before treatment to remove grease oil;
construction dust, dirt and mill scale to reduce the opportunity for localized corrosion.
b) Inhibitor products chosen for corrosion control must be chemically compatible.
c) Piping system shall have manual dosing to inject the chemicals into the systems.
d) The chemical treatment to be conducted by a competent company.
e) The characteristics of the treated chilled water should comply with
ASHRAE 87.
f) The treatment certificate shall be submitted to the engineer for approval before the initial
handover of the system.
18
Chiller And Chilled Water Pump Sequence Control

The chiller and chilled water pumps sequence controller (DDC) shall be capable to do the
following sequence controlling of chillers and chilled water pumps and contractor shall provide
all the required accessories.
Chiller Sequence
Under AUTO position of the chillers system selector switch (installed on the control panel)
the DDC controls with sequence the chiller as below:
The immersion water sensor mounted in the common return header will continuously sense
the return chilled water temperature and will feed back to the DDC controller. The controller
will compare the measured value with set point. If there is a deviation from the set point, then
the controller will bring in or out the chiller in the stepwise to maintain constant return chilled
water temperature as per the set point.
- 116 -

The DDC controller will rotate the duty of the chiller (lag/lead) to equalize the duty hours
automatically on the basis of the duty hours setting.
The temperature set point and duty hour setting are adjustable from the LCD display unit
mounted on the Chillers / pumps sequence panel fascia.
Each chiller start / stop command will be interlocked with its butterfly valve and water flow
switch so that the chiller will start if butterfly valve is open position and the water flow switch
proving the water flow. Each chiller will be further interlocked with its leaving water
temperature sensor so that DCC controller will stop the cooling operation of the chiller of the
Leaving water temperature is below than low limit set point as an additional safety for the
chiller.
Under HAND position of the chiller sequence selector switch (installed on the control panel)
all the chiller will be started manually but the safety interlocks like butterfly valve and water
flow switch will be there.
CHW Pumps Sequence :
Under AUTO position of the chilled water pumps system selector switch (installed on the
control panel) the DDC controller will sequence the chiller as below :
The DDC controller will control and monitor the CHW pumps, out of 2 CHW pumps two are
working and one is standby. The DDC controller will provide start command to two duty
pumps through butterfly valve, so that butterfly valves and switches proves then the DDC
controller will start the stand by pump automatically to replace the failed duty pump.
Under HAND position of the CHW pumps system selector switch (installed on the control
panel) all the CHW pumps will be started manually but the safety interlocks like butterfly valve
and switch will be there.
The DDC controller will rotate the duty CHW pumps on the basis of working hours for duty
equalization. The duty rotation hours of the duty/standby pumps is adjustable from the LDC
display unit mounted on the Chillers / Pumps sequence panel fascia.
The monitoring / adjustment of the following points is possible from LDC display unit mounted
on the DDC controller.
Leaving CHW temperature of each chiller.
Common return header CHW temperature.
Chiller enable command.
CHW pumps enable command.
CHW pumps RUN status.
CHW pumps fault status.
Common return header CHW temperature set point.
Chiller duty rotation hours.
CHW pumps duty rotation hours.
- 117 -

19.
Testing and commissioning by a third party

All the A/C system shall be tested & commissioned by third party starting by latest one week
from the availability of power or at least one month prior to the preliminary handing over. All
commissioning shall be supervised by the engineer. The contractor shall submit a revised
schedule and sample report listing all measures and check list covered here below to the
engineer for his approval ten days ahead of commencing commissioning.
The third party should commission all chillers & water pumps following the recommendation of
the manufacturer. The chillers shall be commissioned by the chiller manufacturer and a
detailed commissioning report shall be submitted to the engineer. The contractor shall work
with the equipment manufacturer to submit to the engineer the report for the water flow,
pressure drop and temperatures for each single chiller, pump as well as the main chilled water
headers.
All the air handling units and fan coil units shall be commissioned by third party and a detailed
commissioning report for each single unit shall be submitted to the engineer. The report shall
cover the following:
Water side
- Maximum water and minimum water flow in GPM from the corresponding data of the
double regulating valve or ultrasonic flow meter.
- Water inlet and outlet temperature via a strip type electronic thermometer.
- the contractor shall vent all air from the water pipes and coils and check drain connection,
trap and proper sloping of drain pan and pipes. Condensate water level height shall be
indicated.
Airside
Fan coil units Airflow shall be measured at all air outlet grilles and diffusers. The measurement
shall cover adequate number of points to give a close average velocity and total airflow.
Air handling units Airflow shall be measured via the average velocity within three meter from
the discharge and where the airflow is expected to be of laminar flow with minimum
turbulence. Adequate number of test inspection points shall be opened at the duct side and
measurement at different duct depth shall be taken to cover the full width of the duct.
The temperature and humidity shall be measured for all fan coil units' room conditions, intake
and discharge points. For the air handling units they should be measured at intake, discharge
and any intermediate pre cooling and reheat stage.
Tolerance
10 % maximum tolerance from design conditions shall be accepted for the air and water flow.
2 % of maximum tolerance from design conditions shall be accepted for the temperatures.
5 % maximum tolerance from design conditions shall be accepted for the humidity.
The approval on the nominated Air conditioning subcontractor will be released only upon an
undertaking letter stating strict compliance with the specification and commissioning
requirements.
Note : The entire electronic services installation shall be carried out in

accordance with the requirements of Etisalat/Du, (GSM), any other local statutory
body and relevant international standards that are applicable at the time of
installation.
- 118 -

APPENDIX A:
LIST OF APPROVED MANUFACTURERS / AC works
- 119 -

APPROVED MANUFACTURERS / SUPPLIERS

SR.
NO
ITEM
REMARKS
AIR COND. CHILLED WATER SYSTEM: Approved original certificate of origin to be submitted before erection in site for chillers FCUs A.H.US units chilled water
pumps & Fans
CHILLERS
CARRIER
GEA
TRANE
SCREW COMP.
1)
(USA/WE)
(GERMANY/WE)
(USA/WE)
AIR HANDLING UNITS
CARRIER
GEA
TRANE
AHUS & FRESH AIR
2)
(USA/WE)
(GERMANY/WE)
(USA/WE)
APPLICATIONS, DOUBLE SKIN
TYPE.
FAN COIL UINTS
CARRIER
GEA
TRANE
3)
(USA/WE)
(GERMANY/WE)
(USA/WE)
4)
AUTOMATIC CONTROLS
JOHNSON
CONTROLS (USA /
W.EUROPE)
AURORA (USA)
SIEMENS (LANDIS &

STAEFA)
(W.EUROPE)
ARMSTRONG (USA)
INVENSYS
(SATCHWELL)
(W.EUROPE)
CRANE (USA)
5)
CHILLED WATER PUMPS
6)
AURORA
(USA)
CRANE
(USA)
ARMSTRONG
(USA)
TECNALCO (UAE)
BETA (USA)
AIR MASTER (USA)
TECNALCO (UAE
BETA (USA)
AIR MASTER (USA)
FACTORY MADE.
9)
EXPANSION TANK
(PRESSURIZATION
SYSTEM)
GRILLS / DIFUSERS /
LOUVRES
SOUND ATTENUATORS /
DAMPERS (VCD, NRD,
AND, SPLITTER DAMPERS)
FIRE DAMPERS
TECNALCO (UAE
SAFID
(SAUDI ARABIA )
BETA (USA)
SUBJECT TO THE APPROVAL

OF CIVIL DEFENCE
AUTHORITIES.
10)
GI SHEET
NIPPON (JAPAN)
KOBE (JAPAN)
NKK (JAPAN)
7)
8)
- 120 -


SR.
NO
ITEM
REMARKS
AIR CONDITIONING CHILLED WATER SYSTEM :
11)
PIPES AND FITTINGS
KAWASAKI
(JAPAN)
OVEN TROP
(GERMANY)
NIPPON STEEL
(JAPAN)
KITZ
(JAPAN)
ECONOSTO
(HOLLAND)
HATTERSLEY
(UK)
12)
VALVES
13)
STRAINERS
OVEN TROP
(GERMANY)
KITZ
(JAPAN)
HATTERSLEY (UK)
14)
GAUGES & THERMOMETERS
WEISS
(UK/USA)
HUNTER
(GERMANY)
ECONOSTO
(HOLLAND)
15)
AIR YENTS
ECONOSTO
(HOLLAND)
CRANE (UK/USA)
16)
17)
DUCT INSULATION
ACOUSTIC LINER
KIMMCO (KUWAIT)
KIMMCO (KUWAIT)
AFICO (SAUDI)
MANSON (CANADA)
VIBRATION
MANAGEMENT
(USA)
IZOCAM (TURKEY)
KNAUF (USA)
18)
PIPES INSULATIONS
KIMMCO (KUWAIT)
AFICO (SAUDI)
IZOCAM (TURKEY)
19)
MOTOR CONTROL CENTRE

PANEL
CUTLER HAMMER
(UK/USA)
SIEMENS
(GERMANY)
MERLIN GERIN
(GERMANY)
20)
CAPACITOR BANK
ABB (SWEDAN)
21)
CABLE
DUCAB (UAE)
MERLIN GERIN
(FRANEC)
GULF CABLE
(KUWAIT)
ELECTRONECON
(GERMANY)
SAUDI CABLE (KSA)
- 121 -
FORM 4 TYPE 7, LOCAL

ASSEMBLY FROM
AUTHORIZED SUPPLIER
(SUBJECT TO THE
APPROVAL OF ADWE)


SR.
NO
ITEM
REMARKS
AIR CONDITIONING CHILLED WATER SYSTEM :

22)
CABLE TRAY
PER FAST
SWIFT
PHILIP GRAHAME
HEAVY DUTY
23)
VIBRATION ISOLATORS
VIBRATION MOUT
(USA)
MASON (USA)
UNIFLEX (USA)
APPLIED FOR CHILLERS

PUMPS AND FAHUS ONLY
24)
EXHAUST FANS
(DUCTED INLINE)
GEA
(GERMANY/WE)
PENN VENTILATOR
(USA)
ROOF UNITS GROUP

(UK)
WITH BACK DRAUGHT

DAMPERS
25)
ROOF EXTRACT FANS AND

AXIAL FANS
PENN VENTILATORS
(USA)
ROOF UNITS UNITS

GROUP (UK )
GEA
(GERMANY/WE)
26)
D.D.C CONTROLS
HONEY WELL
SATCHWEL
STEFA
27)
CLOSED CONTROL UNITS
GEA DENCO
(U.K/WE)
LIBIRT (U.S.A)
AIR DEL (U.K )
- 122 -

MECHANICAL
SECTION B
PLUMBING & PUBLIC HEALTH
INDEX
1.0
General
2.0
Scope of Work
3.0
Regulations
4.0
Basis of Design
5.0
Buildings Drainage
6.0
Hot and Cold Water System
7.0
Materials
8.0
General
9.0
Cold Water Storage Tanks
10.0
Water Pumping Sets
11.0
Water Heaters
12.0
Sanitary Wares
- 123 -

1.0 GENERAL
Titles and divisions and paragraphs in these Contract Documents are introduced merely for
convenience and shall not be taken as part of the Specifications, and furthermore, shall not
be taken as a correct or complete segregation of the several units of materials and labour. No
responsibility, either direct or implied is assumed by the Consultant for omissions or
duplications by Contractors due to real or alleged error in arrangement of matter in these
Contract Documents.
2.0 SCOPE OF WORK

This specification includes the furnishing and installing of the complete system of the following
all as described herein and as shown on the drawings and in any case to comply with the
Water Supply and Plumbing Regulations a issued by ADEWA and Abu Dhabi Municipality Drainage
Department.
a. The supply and installation of all cold water piping to all fixtures and fittings requiring
so, including water main connection and the cold water pump units and water tanks.
b. The supply and installation of domestic hot water supply piping to all fixtures and
fittings requiring so including electric water heaters.
c. Supply and installation of all soil waste and vent piping inside and outside of the
building up to nearest Manholes.
d. Installation of all sanitary ware accessories and fittings and their connection with all
services using necessary fittings i.e. WC connector, reducing plastic connector for
connections of bottled trap to PVC pipes angle valves etc as required and as
indicated on the schedules.
e. Supply and installation of all associated electrical works from the relevant equipment
control panels as shown on the drawings and or as needed, including all automation
controls and level alarm switches. Each equipment control panel should be provided
with an appropriately rated main electric isolator.
The above shall include all labour, materials, equipment, machinery and services necessary
to make the complete system fully operative as per regulations and specifications.
3.0 REGULATIONS
All water supply and plumbing installation work in connection with the contract shall be
executed in strict accordance with the valid edition and any supplements, agenda or
published revisions thereto up to date of submission of the Contractors tender of the
Regulations for Water Supply and Plumbing installation as issued by ADEWA and Abu Dhabi
Municipality Drainage Department, in the absence of such negotiations, the National
Plumbing code and the relevant BS Codes shall be applicable. The Contractor shall keep a
copy of the latest said regulations supplements etc. on site at all times during the continuance
of the Contract.
4.0 BASIS OF DESIGN

The works shall comply with the requirements of all competent bodies including the following
or local equivalents:
a. Local water and sanitary health authorities
b. Insurance companies
- 124 -

c. National Plumbing Code
d. British Standards/Codes
e. IHVE/CIBS Guide Books
f. Civil Defense Regulations
g. Institute of Plumbing Data Book.
5.0 BUILDINGS DRAINAGE

Buildings drainage shall generally comply with BS CP 301 and BS 5572 unless otherwise
shown on drawings.
6.0 HOT AND COLD WATER SYSTEM

From main gate valve which connected to the main water pipe, UPVC pipe shall be laid, underground
and bellow the slab convey water to the under ground domestic water
tank in the basement, and from the UGWT to the the tanks over roof, including the Pump set and
riser pipes with all necessary fittings and valves. The water shall pumped from the roof tanks to the
fixtures and fittings in the floors, which the water meter installed near the flat in the location which
shown on the drawings.
7.0 MATERIALS.
Waste and overflow water main pipe work shall be of the push-fit ring seal type to BS 5254
manufactured in polypropylene. Connections of overflow pipe work to tank shall be by
compression nut joints.
All domestic hot water pipe work shall be in half hard condition copper tubes according to BS
2871 Part 1/1971 Table X. Fittings shall be capillary or compression according to BS 864 .
Cold water, hot water, rising main ,I nternal branches shall be in polypropylene .
All Wall drops should be in pex pipes.
a. Ball Valves
Ball valves shall be fitted on the inlet cold water, hot water supply and hot water
return to each sterilizer and these shall be stainless steel double union ball valves.
b. Gate Valves
Gate valves to copper pipework shall be brass to BS 5154 with compression ends.
Exposed valves on chrome plated pipework shall also be chrome plated.
c. Drain Cocks
Drain cocks to copper pipework shall be brass lock shield drain cocks to BS 2879
type A.
d. Strainers
Strainers to cold water rising mains shall be copper.
c. Copper Pipework Joints and Fittings
Copper pipework shall generally have joints and fittings of the capillary type to BS
864; Part 2.
Screwed joints, where approved, shall be made with PTFE tape.
Compression joints at valves etc. shall be made with carefully cleaned tube and
fittings to ensure water tightness. A smear of approved proprietary compound may be
used to assist the joint.
- 125 -

d. Waste Traps
Sanitary fittings shall be fitted with white polypropylene traps on waste outlets in
accordance with the following:
Washbasins : 32mm anti-siphon traps with 76mm seal
Sinks : 38mm anti-siphon traps with 76mm seal
Showers : 38mm tubular S traps with 76mm seal
Traps shall comply with BS 3943.
8.0 GENERAL
a. Waste Pipe Gradients
Horizontal waste pipes below basins, sinks, urinals and the like shall fall at a uniform
gradient of 1 in 45.
b. Access to Waste Pipes
Ends of horizontal runs of waste pipes shall be provided with access plugs. Blank
ends shall have plugs to allow horizontal rodding; 921/2
0 bends, where waste drop
vertically, shall have swept tees or crosses with plugs on the top leg to allow vertical
rodding.
c. Cleaning of Sanitary Plumbing Installation on completion
The Contractor shall, on completion of the installation and immediately prior to
handover, thoroughly cleanse and leave the system in sound condition and efficient
working order.
d. Testing of Waste and Vent Pipes
An air test shall be applied to all waste and vent pipes as follows:
A gauge I the form of a glass U tube shall be connected to the drain plug in the
section of pipe under test. Air shall be blown into the section of the pipe until a
pressure equivalent to 100mm of water is indicated on the gauge. Without further
blowing or pumping, the pressure shall not have fallen below 75mm after a period of
5 minutes.
9.0 COLD WATER STORAGE TANK

Cold water RCC water storage sectional tank with GRP lining:
Tanks shall be with top hat ribs, special strengthened areas for fittings as built as shape.
Handles shall be fitted to the roof panel or side wall panel in pump room area to allow its
removal.
Tank connector flanged fittings shall be provided for pipes connected to the tank.
The tanks shall have a 75 mm dia U shaped vent pipe with an insect prevention stainless steel
mesh cover.
Float valves to tank shall comply with BS 1212 Part 1 with brass bodies and GRP floats.
The tanks shall have an opaque lining to prevent the growth of algae and shall be resistant to
heat and direct sunlight.
Tank external surface should be applied with UV inhibited polyester coat.
Five (5) years warranty shall be provided for tanks.
Test Certificates shall be provided.
- 126 -

SUBSECTION 15236: Domestic Water Booster and Transfer Pumps
Table of Contents
1.0
GENERAL .................................................................................................................... - 128 1.1.
2.0
3.0
REFERENCE ........................................................................................................... - 128 -
PRODUCTS .................................................................................................................. - 128 2.1.
Packaged domestic water booster pumps ................................................................ - 128 -
2.2.
Specification for Motor Driven Self Lubricated Vertical Turbine Pumps: ................ - 135 -
2.3.
Domestic hot water recirculation pump .................................................................... - 136 -
2.4.
Control Panels .......................................................................................................... - 137 -
EXECUTION ................................................................................................................. - 137 3.1.
INSTALLATION ........................................................................................................ - 137 -
- 127 -

GENERAL
REFERENCE
Conform to General Instructions for Mechanical Division.
PRODUCTS
Packaged domestic water booster pumps
SUPPLY
AND INSTALL PACKAGED BOOSTER SYSTEMS DESIGNED FOR A

TOTAL SYSTEM CAPACITY OF AS SHOWN ON PUMP
SCHEDULE. THE SYSTEMS SHALL BE COMPLETELY FACTORY
ASSEMBLED, TESTED AND CALIBRATED, AND SHIPPED TO
THE JOB SITE AS AN INTEGRAL UNIT READY TO RECEIVE
SUCTION AND DISCHARGE PIPING AND INCOMING POWER
SUPPLY.
DOMESTIC
THE
WATER BOOSTER PUMPS SHALL BE BY AN ACCEPTABLE

MANUFACTURER AS IN APPENDIX A OR APPROVED EQUAL.
PUMP SHALL HAVE CAPACITY AS SHOWN IN THE SCHEDULES.

EACH PUMP SHALL BE CONSTRUCTED WITH 304 STAINLESS
STEEL IMPELLERS AND DIFFUSERS, A HIGH TEMPERATURE
MECHANICAL SEAL WITH CARBON VS SILICON CARBIDE,
EPDM ELASTOMERS THROUGH OUT, TUNGSTEN CARBIDE
AGAINST CERAMIC PUMP BUSHINGS AND A CAST IRON
MOTOR BRACKET. FLANGES WILL BE DUCTILE IRON I SLIP
RING AND ISOLATED FROM LIQUID. THE PUMP IS TO BE
COUPLED WITH A 3500 RPM NEWA MOTOR AND WITH
ENCLOSURE USING A RIGID SPLIT COUPLING.
MOTOR
BEARING SHALL BE SIZED TO ALLOW A 20,000 MINIMUM
HOUR B10 CALCULATED LIFE.
THE PUMPS SHALL BE COMPLETE WITH GATE VALVES, CHECK VALVES,

PRESSURE GAUGES, THERMAL BLEED CIRCUITS, WIRING,
CONDUIT AND INTERCONNECTING PIPEWORK, NEATLY
ARRANGED AND FIRMLY SUPPORTED BY THE FRAMEWORK

OF THE UNIT.
SUCTION CONNECTION SHALL BE
HORIZONTAL, AS CLOSE TO THE BASE AS POSSIBLE TO
CONNECT TO INLET PIPE FROM THE WATER STORAGE TANK.
DOMESTIC WATER BOOSTER PUMPS SHALL BE AS SHOWN IN THE PUMP

SCHEDULE AND AS DESCRIBED BELOW:
-
Staging of the pumps shall be accomplished by solid state current

sensing relays, with reset capability within 4%. The electronic
- 128 -

relays shall have an external trip setpoint knob and a dial with LED
trip light indicator and built in two seconds delay to prevent false
trip due to current surge.
- Pump service shall be accomplished without disturbing the suction
and discharge piping. Combination pressure reducing valves with
non slam feature shall be mounted in each pump circuit.
Interconnecting piping shall be galvanized steel pipe. Isolation
valves shall be provided for each pump set. Pressure gauges shall
be mounted on the suction and discharge headers. The pumps shall
be protected from thermal build up, when running at no-flow, by a
common thermal relief valve.
THE
BOOSTER SET CONTROL PANEL SHALL BE IN A NEMA I

ENCLOSURE WHICH INCLUDES MOTOR STARTERS, TIME
DELAYS, PROTECTED CONTROL CIRCUIT, TRANSFORMER,
CURRENT RELAYS, HAND-OFF-AUTOMATIC SWITCHES FOR
EACH PUMP, MINIMUM RUN TIMERS, AND LOW SUCTION
PRESSURE CUT OUT AND SHALL INCORPORATE THE
FOLLOWING FEATURES:
General purpose water resistant enclosure.

Main disconnect switch.
Fused circuit for each motor.
Magnetic starters with three overloads.
Current sensing devices.
Selector switch for each pump.
Control circuit transformer.
Minimum run timers.
Low limit pressure switch.
Low pressure alarm light.
Circuit breakers for each pump.
High pressure cut-out switch.
Power-on' indicating light.
Overload indicating lights.
Panel mounted gauges.
All other components required to achieve the control sequence
specified.
Alternating relay circuit.
Power on: Amber.
Individual motor overload: Red.
Low suction pressure: Red
- 129 -

PROVIDE
AUTOMATIC PUMP ROTATION BASED ON ACTUAL RUNTIME.

THE TIME DIFFERENCE BETWEEN PUMP STARTS SHALL BE
ADJUSTABLE.
PUMP LOGIC CONTROLLER:

a. THE
CONTRACTOR SHALL SUPPLY AND INSTALL A DEDICATED

PROGRAMMABLE SOLID STATE PUMP LOGIC CONTROLLER
TO CONTROL THE OPERATION OF THE MULTIPLE PUMPS IN
THE BOOSTER SET. THE CONTROLLER SHALL HAVE VOLT
FREE CONTACTS FOR CONNECTION TO THE BMS. THE
CONTROLLER SHALL INCORPORATE A BUILT-IN PROGRAM
THAT SAFEGUARDS AGAINST DAMAGING HYDRAULIC
CONDITIONS SUCH AS:
End of curve
Motor overload
Pump flow surges
NPRSHR and NPSHA
Hunting
System efficiency program
Efficiency optimization program.
b. END OF CURVE PROTECTION: THE PUMP LOGIC CONTROLLER

THROUGH A FACTORY PRE-PROGRAMMED ALGORITHM,
SHALL BE CAPABLE OF PROTECTING THE PUMPS FROM
HYDRAULIC DAMAGE DUE TO OPERATION BEYOND THEIR
PUBLISHED END-OF- CURVE.
c. EFFICIENCY
OPTIMIZATION PROGRAM: THE PUMP LOGIC

CONTROLLER SHALL BE CAPABLE OF STAGING AND DESTAGING PUMPS BASED ON AN EFFICIENCY OPTIMIZATION
PROGRAM TO PROVIDE THE LOWEST SYSTEM KW DRAW.
d. SYSTEM
EFFICIENCY
PROGRAM:
THE PUMP LOGIC
CONTROLLER SHALL BE CAPABLE OF CALCULATING AND
DISPLAYING SYSTEM EFFICIENCY.
e. FAILURE: IN
CASE OF FAILURE THE CONTROLLER SHALL FAIL

IN A PRE-DETERMINED SAFE OPERATING MODE. RESET
AFTER FAILURE SHALL NOT RESULT IN A NO-FLOW
CONDITION UNLESS ALL EQUIPMENT FAILS. FAULT
CONDITIONS WILL BE DISPLAYED AND THE CONTROLLER
SHALL BE ABLE TO TRANSFER OPERATION TO ANOTHER
OPERATING UNIT.
THE CONTROL CIRCUIT SHALL BE INTERLOCKED SO THAT FAILURE OF

ANY STARTER WILL ENERGIZE THE SUCCEEDING STARTER.
- 130 -

THE CONTROL PANEL SHALL ALSO CONTAIN ALL REQUIRED
CONTACTS FOR MONITORING AND CONTROL FROM THE

BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM AS DESCRIBED IN
SECTION 15342.
AN ASME
SECTION V111 HYDRO PNEUMATIC STEEL TANK WITH

NEOPRENE RUBBER REPLACEABLE BLADDER SHALL BE
INSTALLED DOWN STREAM OF THE PRVS. TANK SHALL BE
CONSTRUCTED FOR A DESIGN PRESSURE SUITABLE FOR
SYSTEM OPERATION. TANK SHALL BE COMPLETE WITH
PRESSURE SWITCH TO CONTROL LEAD PUMP. PROVIDE
CHANGING VALVE CONNECTION FOR ON SITE CHARGING. .
PUMP CONTROL PANEL SHALL BE COMPLETE WITH WATER RESISTANT

ENCLOSURES, MAIN DISCONNECT SWITCH, FUSED CIRCUIT
FOR EACH MOTOR, MAGNETIC STARTERS WITH THREE
OVERLOADS, SELECTOR SWITCH FOR EACH PUMP, CONTROL
CIRCUIT TRANSFORMERS, MINIMUM RUN TIMERS, CIRCUIT
BREAKER FOR EACH PUMP, 'POWER-ON' INDICATING
LIGHTS, PANEL MOUNTED GAUGES, ALTERNATING RELAY
CIRCUIT TO ALTERNATE PUMPS, HAND-OFF-AUTOMATIC
SWITCHES FOR EACH PUMP AND ALL OTHER COMPONENTS
REQUIRED TO ACHIEVE THE CONTROL SEQUENCE
SPECIFIED. THE CONTROL PANEL SHALL ALSO CONTAIN ALL
REQUIRED CONTACTS FOR MONITORING AND CONTROL
FROM A BUILDING CONTROL SYSTEM INCLUDING PUMP
STATUS, LOW PRESSURE, MOTOR OVERLOAD.
BOOSTER
PUMPS SUCTION AND DISCHARGE HEADERS SHALL BE

CONNECTED TO THE FIELD SUCTION AND DISCHARGE PIPES
THROUGH FLEXIBLE JOINTS TO ELIMINATE VIBRATION
TRANSMISSION TO PIPING. ALSO, A MAIN STRAINER SHALL
BE INSTALLED TO THE MAIN SUCTION PIPE.
SPECIFICATIONS FOR MOTOR DRIVEN SELF LUBRICATED VERTICAL

TURBINE PUMPING SETS AND ACCESSORIES
1.0 PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
Each pumping unit shall consist of vertical turbine centrifugal pump, column pipes, line shafts, level
indicators, couplings, squirrel cage induction motor and all necessary appurtenances to provide a complete
pumping system. The contractor shall require that the pumping units specified herein to be supplied by a
single manufacturer. The contractor shall supply install, commission and hand over all equipment to the
satisfaction of the Engineer.
The Bidder must visit the site and inspect the space requirement and other installation requirements before
- 131 -

making the bid.
1.2
TYPE
Each pump shall be of the vertical turbine centrifugal type comprising stages which accommodate rotating
impellers and stationary bowls possessing guide vanes. The pump shall be vertical line shaft driven,
above/below ground delivery as shown in the diagram.
1.2
UNIT RESPONSIBILITY
The contractor shall cause all equipment specified under this contract to be furnished by
the pump manufacturer who shall be responsible for the adequacy and compatibility of
all pumping unit components. Any component of each pumping unit not provided by the
pump manufacturer shall be designed, fabricated, tested and installed by factory
authorized representatives experienced in design and manufacture of such components.
This requirement, however, shall not be construed as relieving the contractor of the
overall responsibility for this portion of work.
1.3
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
The arrangements shown on the drawings are based upon the best information available to the Engineer at the time of design and
is not intended to show exact dimensions peculiar to any specific equipment unless otherwise shown or specified. Therefore, it
may be anticipated that the structural supports, foundations, connecting piping and valves shown in part or whole, may have to be
changed in order to accommodate the pumping equipment furnished. No additional payment will be made for such changes. Any
such changes shall be submitted to the Engineer for his approval.
Pumping units shall be designed to operate without over loading cavitations or damaging vibration at the specified speed, flow
and head conditions. The shut off head of the proposed pumps shall be at least 10% more than the specified head at the specified
capacity.
The motor shall be supported independently on the motor room floor above and shall be connected to the pump with intermediate shafts
a shown in the drawing nos. ..
Motor rating shall be at least 10 % more than the power required by the pump at the specified duty point in case of pump running solo.
The motor base shall be designed for anchor bolting to a concrete foundation, assuming that the pump, without restraint at the
suction and discharge connections, is subjected to a displacing force equal to that developed by an internal pressure equal to three
times shut-off head at the operating speed.
The motor shall be coupled to the pump through vertical drive shafts as specified under 2.1.7.
The complete pumping unit shall be designed to operate without overload on any component at any point along the pump curve at
the specified speed.
1.4
CRITICAL SPEEDS
Each complete system, including pump, motor and all appurtenances, shall have no
dangerous critical or resonance frequencies or multiples of resonance frequencies within
20% above and 35% below the operating speed of the pump.
For the purposes of design, a dangerous vibratory critical speed shall be defined as one,
which produces a torsion stress exceeding 2.4 x 107 Nm-2.The contractor shall be
responsible for the analysis of critical speeds, which shall be analyzed and certified by a
professional engineer regularly engaged in this type of work.
1.5
FACTORY TESTING
1.5.1
Materials
Melt and strength tests of the cast iron used in the manufacture of the pumps major
components shall be performed in accordance with the applicable BS standards as
- 132 -

indicated in the specification. The contractor shall furnish the Engineer with certified
copies of the results of all tests.
MATERIALS
1.5.2
Material
Pump shaft
Stainless Steel conforming to BS 970 Grade 43IS29.
Impellers
Leaded Gunmetal LG2/LG4 conforming to BS 1400.
Bowls
Cast Iron conforming to BS 1452 Grade 220.
Column pipes
Low Carbon Steel conforming to BS 970
Impeller Neck
Rings/Casing wear
rings
Leaded Bronze LB2 conforming to BS 1400.
Gland
Leaded Gunmetal LG2/LG4 conforming to BS 1400.
Line shaft
Carbon steel BS 970 Grade 080M40
Bolts, studs & nuts
Stainless steel conforming to BS 970
Performance Tests
Pump shall be factory tested for performance in accordance with ISO 9906 by a testing
agent approved by the Engineer and shall be to accuracy class C. The supplier shall
submit these test curves prior to shipment of the equipment. These test curves shall
include Head, Efficiency, Power absorbed and NPSH required against Capacity. The
Engineer shall witness these tests.
Pump to be supplied under this contract with more than 30 kW shall be tested with its
distinctive contract motor.
1.5.3
Hydrostatic Tests
Each pump shall be hydrostatically tested. Test pressure shall not be less than twice the
shut-off head as shown on the approved head-capacity curve.
The test procedure shall be as follows:
Condition
Time (Minutes)
Test Pressure
180
Atmospheric
05
- 133 -

3
Test Pressure
15
Atmospheric
05
Test Pressure
30
At no time during this test shall the casing show undue deflection or signs of weakness at
any point, nor shall the external surfaces of the casing show sweating through porous
metal or leaking through gasket or cracks or other defects.
The contractor shall furnish the Engineer with certified results of the tests.
1.5.4
Vibration Tests
Vibration tests shall be carried out in accordance with ISO 2372 1974.
1.5.5
Motor Tests
Motor shall be tested in accordance with NEMA and IEEE Procedures. The tests shall
include,
a. Routine Tests
i. No load current
ii. Locked Rotor Current
iii. Winding Resistance
iv. High Potential Test.
b. Complete Tests
i. Rated Load Temperature Rise.
ii. Slip.
iii. Locked Rotor Torque.
iv. Breakdown Torque.
v. Efficiencies at 100, 75 and 50 percent of Full Load.
vi. Power factor at 100, 75 and 50 percent of Full Load.
The contractor shall furnish the all certified test results before shipment.
- 134 -

Base mounted end suction pumps - domestic water transfer:
PUMP
SHALL BE OF ALL BRONZE CONSTRUCTION WITH CAST IRON

VOLUTE TO ASTM #B584, CAST BRONZE IMPELLER TO
ASTM #B584, ALUMINIUM BRONZE SHAFT SLEEVE TO
ASTM B111, 304 STAINLESS STEEL IMPELLER KEY, BRASS
IMPELLER WASHER.
SEALS
SHALL BE BUNA N WITH CARBON - CERAMIC FACES, BRASS

PARTS AND STAINLESS STEEL SPRING.
FURNISH AND INSTALL PUMPS WITH CAPACITIES AS SHOWN ON PLANS.

PUMPS SHALL BE BASE-MOUNTED, SINGLE-STAGE, END
SUCTION DESIGN WITH TRUE BACK PULLOUT, CAPABLE OF
BEING
SERVICED
CONNECTIONS.
WITHOUT
DISTURBING
PIPING
PUMP VOLUTE SHALL BE CLASS 30 CAST IRON WITH INTEGRALLY CAST

PEDESTAL SUPPORT.
THE IMPELLER SHALL BE CAST
BRONZE, ENCLOSED-TYPE, DYNAMICALLY BALANCED TO
ANSI GRADE G6.3, KEYED TO THE SHAFT AND SECURED BY
A LOCKING CAP SCREW.
THE LIQUID CAVITY SHALL BE SEALED OFF AT THE PUMP SHAFT BY AN
INTERNALLY-FLUSHED MECHANICAL SEAL WITH CERAMIC
SEAL SEAT OF AT LEAST 99.5% ALUMINA OXIDE CONTENT
PROVIDING A HARDNESS OF 68 ROCKWELL C, AND CARBON
SEAL RING, SUITABLE FOR CONTINUOUS OPERATION AT
225F (107C). A REPLACEABLE ALUMINIUM BRONZE SHAFT
SLEEVE SHALL COMPLETELY COVER THE WETTED AREA
UNDER THE SEAL.
PUMPS SHALL BE RATED FOR MINIMUM OF 175 PSI (12BAR) WORKING

PRESSURE. CASINGS SHALL HAVE GAUGE PORTS AT NOZZLES
AND VENT AND DRAIN PORTS AT TOP AND BOTTOM OF

CASING.
PUMP
BEARING HOUSING ASSEMBLY SHALL HAVE HEAVY-DUTY REGREASE ABLE BALL BEARINGS, REPLACEABLE WITHOUT
DISTURBING PIPING CONNECTIONS AND HAVE FOOT
SUPPORT AT COUPLING END.
BASE PLATE SHALL BE OF STRUCTURAL STEEL OR FABRICATED STEEL
CHANNEL CONFIGURATION FULLY ENCLOSED AT SIDES AND
- 135 -

ENDS, WITH SECURELY WELDED CROSS MEMBERS AND

FULLY OPEN GROUTING AREA. A FLEXIBLE TYPE COUPLER,
CAPABLE OF ABSORBING TORSIONAL VIBRATION, SHALL BE
EMPLOYED BETWEEN THE PUMP AND THE MOTOR, AND IT
SHALL BE EQUIPPED WITH A SUITABLE COUPLING GUARD AS
REQUIRED. CONTRACTOR TO LEVEL AND GROUT EACH
UNIT ACCORDING TO MANUFACTURERS INSTRUCTIONS.
THE
MOTOR SHALL MEET NEMA SPECIFICATIONS AND SHALL BE

THE SIZE, VOLTAGE AND ENCLOSURE CALLED FOR ON THE
PLANS. PUMP AND MOTOR SHALL BE FACTORY ALIGNED,
AND SHALL BE REALIGNED BY THE CONTRACTOR AFTER
INSTALLATION.
EACH
PUMP SHALL BE FACTORY TESTED.

IT SHALL THEN BE
THOROUGHLY CLEANED AND PAINTED WITH AT LEAST ONE
COAT OF HIGH-GRADE MACHINERY ENAMEL PRIOR TO
SHIPMENT.
PUMPS
SUCTION AND DISCHARGE PIPES SHALL BE CONNECTED TO

THE SUCTION AND DISCHARGE HEADERS THROUGH
FLEXIBLE JOINTS TO ELIMINATE VIBRATION TRANSMISSION
TO PIPING. ALSO, A MAIN STRAINER SHALL BE INSTALLED
TO THE MAIN SUCTION PIPE.
Domestic hot water recirculation pump
PUMPS
SHALL BE SINGLE STAGE END SUCTION FLEXIBLE CLOSE

COUPLED PUMP AS INDICATED IN THE SCHEDULE. PUMP
SHALL BE BACK PULL OUT CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS ALL BRONZE
CONSTRUCTION. EACH PUMP IS TO BE FURNISHED WITH A
STANDARD STUFFING BOX WITH PACKING. EACH PUMP IS TO
BE FURNISHED WITH A MECHANICAL SEAL WITH ALL METAL
PARTS TO BE 303 STAINLESS STEEL WITH BUNA-N
ELASTOMERS, NI-RESIST SEAT, AND CARBON WASHER. THE
UNIT SHALL BE EQUIPPED WITH STAINLESS STEEL KEY
LOCKED SHAFT SLEEVE THAT EXTENDS THE LENGTH OF
THE SEAL BOX. THE PUMP SHAFT EXTENSION SHALL BE
O RING SEALED FROM THE PUMPED LIQUID. IMPELLERS
DYNAMICALLY BALANCED, AND KEY LOCKED TO THE SHAFT.
PUMP AND MOTOR ARE TO BE MOUNTED ON A COMMON
BASE PLATE. PUMPS SHALL HAVE A SHAFT DESIGN FOR .002
DEFLECTION AT THE SEAL FACE WITH THE PUMP RUNNING
- 136 -

UNDER MAX. LOAD CONDITION. GREASE LUBRICATED BALL

BEARINGS, HAVING A 3 YEAR MIN. LIFE (AFBMA B10)
UNDER THE MAX. CONDITION OF LOAD PROTECTED BY
SEPARATE OIL SEALS AND SLINGERS, SHALL BE USED. THE
PUMP SHALL BE FLEXIBLE COUPLED TO A STANDARD
HORIZONTAL NEMA DRIP-PROOF MOTOR. ALIGNMENT
SHALL BE CHECKED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE STANDARDS
OF THE HYDRAULIC INSTITUTE AFTER INSTALLATION AND
THERE SHALL BE NO STRAIN TRANSMITTED TO THE PUMPS.
EACH PUMP IS TO BE CLOSE COUPLED TO A STANDARD HI-
NEMA-JP.
Control Panels
REFER
TO SECTION 16430 FOR ALL DETAILS OF

FOR ALL RELEVANT EQUIPMENT.
CONTROL PANELS
THE SET OF WATER SUPPLY PUMP CONSIST OF TWO PUMPS ONE DUTY
AND ONE STANDBY, WHEN A SIGNAL FROM PRESSURE
SWITCH TO OPERATE THE PUMP, PRIMARY PUMP WILL
WORKING FIRSTLY AND FOLLOWED BY SECONDARY PUMPS.
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION
Adjust discharge pressure for booster pumps to minimum

pressure required to maintain a residual pressure of 200 KPa
at highest fixture, through the combination pressure
reducing and check valve.
Provide all control wiring and power wiring between pump and
controller/starter. Power supply to the controller/starter shall
be by Division 16.
Provide detailed head calculations based on shop drawings for
Engineers review before final selection of pumps.
-End of Section-
- 137 -

Expansion Vessels
Fully automatic expansion and pressurisation vessels should be installed to automatically
control any change in volume due to expansion and contraction and pressure fluctuations in
the cooling system. The capacity and pressure rating of the vessels shall be calculated by the
Contractor if required.
The steel pressure vessel should contain internal durable India rubber bladder completly
fitting the interior shape of the vessel, containing the compresses air buffer and separating it
positively from the media liquid of the installation.
Protection against excess air pressure shall be effected by means of a certified air pressure
relief valve.
Power pump unit, shall be with stainless steel body and impeller and to be fixed in position as
indicated in the drawing.
11.0 WATER HEATERS

Water heaters shall be of the automatic electric type for horizontal and/or vertical mounting as
directed by the Consultant and of the capacities indicated on the Drawings. They shall have
titanium-sheathed and shall be glass lined.
Cylinders shall be tested to 7 bars, shall be complete with integral insulation jacket and shall
be painted with a white stove finish.
Electric elements shall be suitable for the site electricity supplies and be complete with all
necessary controls to maintain a flow temperature of 65C. All necessary safety thermostats
shall be fitted for high limit cut-out. Heaters should also have an ode (s).
Thermostats shall have earth terminals fitted.
12.0 SANITARY WARES

Installation of sanitary ware and accessories in building including supply of W/C connector,
W/C support , connections bottle trap and angle valve is in scope of MEP contractor.
For sanitary Fixtures specification refer to Civil works specifications / Particular Specifications,
/ Clause P- Sanitary fixtures & accessories.
MECHANICAL
SECTION C
SEWAGE & DRAINAGE
INDEX
1.0
General
- 138 -

2.0
Scope of Work
3.0
Regulations
4.0
Trench Excavation
5.0
Road Crossings
6.0
Pumping and Dewatering
7.0
Sub-Drains
8.0
Material for Pipe Bedding and Trench Filling
9.0
Standard of Compaction
10.0 Bedding for Pipes

11.0 Backfilling to Pipes
12.0 Pipework and Manholes
13.0 Lining & Coating Materials
14.0 UPVC Pipes
15.0 Gate Valves
16.0 Diaphragm Valves
17.0 Check Valves
18.0 Air Release Valves
19.0 Test Pressure for Valves
20.0 Protection of Valves
21.0 Puddle/Anchor Flanges
22.0 Land Drainage, Filter Media & Membranes
23.0 Step Irons
24.0 Identification Plaques
25.0 Concrete Stools, Anchor and Thrust Blocks
26.0 Unloading and Laying Out Pipes
27.0 Laying and Jointing Pipes
28.0 Junctions
- 139 -

29.0 Manholes Linings
30.0 Constructing Manholes and Chambers
31.0 CI Covers & Frames
32.0 CI Surface Boxes, Gully Gratings and Frames
33.0 Gullies
34.0 Protection to CI Manhole Covers etc.
35.0 Ladders
36.0 New Manholes on Existing Sewers
37.0 Sealing Future Connections
38.0 Connections to Sewers
39.0 Testing
39.1 Testing of Foul Sewers and Laterals
39.2 Testing of Gravity Surface Water Systems
39.3 Testing of Pressure Pipelines
39.4 Holding Tanks
39.5 Roof Rain Water Outlet
39.6 Balcony Outlet
1.0 GENERAL
All work under this heading shall be subject to THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THE
CONTRACT, THE GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, THE GENERAL PROVISIONS, THE BASIC
PRODUCTS & METHODS ETC herein before written for the entire work.
Titles and divisions and paragraphs in these Contract Documents are introduced merely for
convenience and shall not be taken as part of the Specifications, and furthermore, shall not be
taken as a correct or complete segregation of the several units of materials and labour. No
responsibility, either direct or implied is assumed by the Engineer for omissions or duplications
- 140 -

by Contractors due to real or alleged error in arrangement of matter in these Contract
Documents.
2.0 SCOPE OF WORK

This Specification includes the furnishing and installing of the complete system of the following
all as described herein and as shown on the Drawings:- and in any case to comply with the
ADEWA & Drainage Regulations as issued by Abu Dhabi Municipality, ADEWA & Drainage
Department.
a. Supply and installation of all sewage and vent piping out side of the building up to
existing manhole and as shown on the drawing
b. Supply and installation of all drainage network as detailed in the drawings.
c. Supply and installation of all associated electrical works from the relevant equipment
control panels as shown on the drawings and or as needed, including all automation
controls and level alarm switches. Each equipment control panel should be provided
with an appropriately rated main electric isolator.
The above shall include all labour, materials, equipment, machinery and services necessary to
make the complete system fully operative.
3.0 REGULATIONS
All sewage and drainage installation work in connection with the Contract shall be executed in
strict accordance with the valid edition and any supplements, agenda or published revisions
thereto up the date of submission of the Contractor's Tender of the regulations for
sewage/drainage installation as issued by Abu Dhabi Municipality Drainage Department. The
Contractor shall keep a copy of the latest said regulations supplements etc. on site at all times
during the continuance of the Contract.
4.0 TRENCH EXCAVATION

Prior to excavation, the Contractor shall submit to the engineer for approval proposals for the
erection of public safety barrierd and night-time lighting. This shall not relieve the Contractor of
any responsibility for complying with the requirements of the Abu Dhabi Police Department or any
other Authority, and the Contractor shall make himself aware of these requirements prior to
his submission to the Engineer.
Trenches shall be excavated to the lines shown on the drawings and to levels that will allow
for the pipe wall thickness and bedding thickness, if any. Trenches shall not be excavated
more than 150 meters in advance of pipe laying without the prior agreement of the Engineer
and shall be of a width which complies with the criteria laid down below.
Sight rails shall be set up and fixed securely into the ground and maintained at intervals not
exceeding 25 meters. A minimum of three sight rails shall be maintained for every length of
trench being excavated to one grade.
The widths of trenches shall be such as to provide at least 150mm clearance between the
barrel of the pipe and the side of the excavation or timber or other sheeting, but the width
measured between undisturbed faces of the trench sides at a level of 300 mm above the
crown of the pipe shall not, unless approved or required by the engineer, exceed the outside
diameter of the pipe being laid plus 550mm for pipes up to and including 800mm diameter,
and plus 750mm for pipes over 800mm in diameter. If the width of the trench exceeds the
specified dimension or the trench supports move so as to disturb the ground in the trench side
at or below the crown level, the Contractor shall, at his own expense, surround the pipes with
concrete as detailed, including flexible joints.
The Contractor shall ensure that all excavation and timbering is carried out in a careful
manner, that it is rendered secure and safe, and that all necessary measures are taken to
- 141 -

prevent the removal or falling-in of material beyond the trench dimensions detail. The
Contractor shall maintain all timbering until the completion of the work to the satisfaction of the
Engineer and shall promptly move any material, which has collapsed into excavation.
The Engineer may, at no extra cost to the Contract, direct the Contractor to protect his
excavation with timbering where, in the opinion of the Engineer such timbering is necessary to
ensure the safety of the workmen, adjoining structures and work generally. Any action taken
by the Engineer in this regard will in no way relieve the Contractor of his responsibility and
liability under the Contract. Where ordered, the Contractor shall leave steel sheet piling, plain
or interlocking steel sheeting or timbering in excavations, trenches or headings.
When a void occurs between the sides of the excavation and the trench supports, this shall be
filled with the class III fill material well compacted in 200mm layers up to ground level
immediately after the final positioning of the trench supports.
A clear space shall be left between the edges of excavations and the inner toes of spoil banks,
to the approval of the Engineer.
Back-throwing shall not be allowed and all materials shall be brought to the surface and
formed in heaps clear of the excavation.
Where two pipes are to be laid side by side in the same trench, but at different levels, the
excavation shall first be taken down to a level 200mm above formation level for the upper
pipe; the excavation for the lower pipe shall then carried out and the lower pipe laid, jointed
and completed; back-filling shall then be carried out up to formation level of the upper pipe,
the remainder of the excavation for the upper pipe completed, and laying of the pipe
completed.
5.0 ROAD CROSSINGS

The Contractor shall close sheet and adequately support all trenches across existing roads.
Great care shall be taken by the Contractor to ensure that existing roads and services are not
damaged by road crossing operations and the safety of the work force and general public are
maintained.
Any new pipe line laying on road shall be protected by concrete and as directed by pipe
manufacturer.
6.0 PUMPING AND DEWATERING

Excavations shall be kept free from water at all times and adequate pumping plant, including
special dewatering equipment, shall be provided together with the means of conveying away
the pump water and all water from excavations. Sumps, when used, shall be formed clear of
excavations for permanent works.
The Contractor shall submit details of his proposed dewatering methods to the Engineer for
approval. The discharge ground water from dewatering operations shall be accordance with
Abu Dhabi Municipality requirements.
7.0 SUB-DRAINS
If necessary for the construction of the works, the Contractor shall lay sub-drains where
directed, to convey the water to pumping sumps or soak ways. Sub-drains shall be laid and
jointed with the invert not less than 300mm below the formation level of the permanent works,
and shall be covered with gravel to formation level. The Contractor shall ensure that these
drains are kept free from silt. These pipes need not be of highest quality but shall be approved
by the Engineer before use.
8.0 MATERIAL FOR PIPE BEDDING AND TRENCH FILLING

Materials to be used for pipe bedding and trench back fill (divided into class I,II, and III) shall
be free from vegetable and perishable matter and shall be obtained from sources approved by
the Engineer. They shall comply with the following particular requirements:
Class I fill shall be free draining, rounded, granular material consisting of natural gravel or
- 142 -

similar material.
For pipes up to and including 300mm, the nominal size shall be 10mm; for pipes exceeding
300mm but not exceeding 900mm diameter, the nominal size shall be 14mm; above 900mm
diameter, the nominal size shall be 20mm.
The overall grading shall be such that the material shall have a compaction Fraction of 0.10 or
less.
Class II fill shall consist of approved granular material obtained from excavation or borrow pits
and shall exclude stones larger than 25mm in size. The material shall be capable of being
compacted to a stable mass and shall achieve a laboratory CBR of 20% after 96 hours
soaking, tested in accordance with the Test 16 of BS 1377.
Class III fill shall consist of approved granular material obtained from excavations or borrow
pits, shall be capable being compacted to a stable mass and shall achieve a laboratory CBR
of 20% after 96 hours soaking.
Where separate bedding material is required for pressure pipes up to and including 300mm
diameter, it shall consist of class I fill.
All the unsuitable material i.e., soft materials, asphalt chunks, stones larger than 75mm,
organic materials, metal, debris, etc., shall not be used for back-filling and shall be removed
from the site where unsuitable material is encountered in excavation it shall be replaced for
back filling purposes with selected granular material from approved sources and shall consist
good hard granular screened desert fill.
9.0 STANDARD OF COMPACTION

The standards of compaction for trench fill materials shall be as follows:
a. Well-compacted: The material shall be compacted by mechanical means in layers not
exceeding 150 mm compacted thicknesses. The density obtained in each layer shall not
be less than 95% of the maximum dry density determined using Tests 13 & 15 of BS
1377 or as directed by the Engineer. Tests shall be carried as instructed by the
Engineer, up to a maximum of 2 tests per layer per 100 meters of trench.
b. Hand-compacted: The material shall be thoroughly compacted by hand in layers not
exceeding 100 mm compacted thicknesses, using an iron rammer weighing not less
than 4.5 kg. The density obtained in each layer shall not be less than 95% of the
maximum dry density determined using Tests 13 & 15 of BS 1377 or as directed by the
Engineer. Tests shall be carried out as instructed by the Engineer up to a maximum of
two tests per layer per 100metres of trench.
10.0 BEDDING FOR PIPES

If any trench invert is over-dug it shall be made good with the class of material specified for
the layer immediately overlaying it, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer.
If any bedding material is damaged by water, sewage, collapse of trench sides or in any way, it
shall be removed from the trench and replaced with new material before any pipes are laid or
re-laid.
The beddings and surrounds for rigid pipes are in four categories as detailed on the drawings,
and are entitled Class A, Class B, Class C and Class D. The category used in bedding in the
works shall be as noted on the drawings or instructed by the Engineer.
If any loose, soft or bad ground is encountered, the Contractor shall report this to the Engineer
and, where directed, shall excavate the same to a solid foundation and a place concrete grade
20/20/S, class I fill material or other approved fill, as directed.
Where class A or class B bedding is required, the back fill shall not be commenced until at
least 24 hours after the pacing of the concrete has been completed. Heavy rammers shall not
be used nor shall traffic loads be imposed until at least 72 hours after concreting, or as
directed by the Engineer.
- 143 -

Where class C bedding is required, the bedding material shall be hollowed out to receive the
sockets and allow proper jointing. The bedding shall be completed to the required level and
compacted such that the pipes are evenly supported over their entire lengths.
Where class D bedding is required, the Contractor shall first excavate to 75mm above trench
invert level. The final excavation shall then be done by hand immediately prior to the laying of
the pipes, and the trench invert carefully rimmed and shaped to the contour of the under side
of the pipe barrels and sockets, such that the pipes rest evenly on the trench invert and are
uniformly support throughout their lengths, particular care being taken around the sockets.
The bedding shall be completed to the required level such that the pipes are evenly supported
over their entire lengths.
The bedding and surround to UPVC pipes shall be class I fill to 150mm above the crown of
the pipe, laid and compacted in 100mm layers unless directed otherwise by the Engineer.
11.0 BACK-FILLING TO PIPES

During placing or compaction of backfill the Contractor shall take all precautions necessary to
prevent movement or flotation of pipes.
The side fill shall be placed and compacted as soon as possible after pipe laying and testing,
or as soon as it is safe to do so without damaging concrete beddings or surrounds.
Timbering or sheeting shall be withdrawn as filling proceeds to ensure that no voids are left in
the filling.
Initial backfill shall be placed over the pipe as soon as possible to provide a protective layer of
material hand-compacted to a level 300mm above the crown of the pipe to a density of 95%
standard proctor. Remaining backfill shall then be placed in compacted in layers of maximum
150mm to a density of 100% standard proctor. Material shall not be dropped from a height;
where required water may be added to assist compaction.
Care shall be taken to ensure that the alignment and grade of the pipe is not disturbed during
the operation. Couplings should be left exposed until the line has been tested. Before testing,
pipes should be partially backfilled to resist movement due to pressure to a minimum of 40cm
average.
Power operated rammers shall not be used within 300mm of the top of the pipe.
Heavy mechanical equipment shall not be allowed to cross in pipe line until the trench has
been completely backfilled and compacted.
After backfilling, UPVC pipes shall be checked for deformations by passing through a gauging
pig with a diameter of 90% of the least internal diameter of the pipeline. The maximum
permissible decrease in vertical diameter shall be 5%.
12.0 PIPE WORK AND MANHOLES

The Contractor shall construct pipelines, manholes and chambers to the lines and the levels
shown on the drawings. He shall provide the materials in accordance with the specification.
All pipes, half-pipes, junctions, bends, fittings, etc. shall be of first class quality and obtained
from an approved manufacturer.
13.0 LINING AND COATING MATERIALS

Glass reinforced plastic, epoxy mortar, PVC and all other lining or coating materials, shall
withstand the following conditions without any deterioration:
PH as low as 1.0 in slime deposits, (Gravity systems, wet wells, tanks etc. with liquid/air
interface.)
Ambient temperatures up to 45 degrees C.
Bacteriological activity and attack associated with BOD levels upto 700ppm.
H2S in sewer gas up to 600ppm (only in enclosed spaces).
H2S dissolved in sewage up to 50mg/1.
14.0 UPVC PIPES

UPVC pipes shall comply with BS 3505,4346, 4660, 5481, as applicable, or other approved
standard. Pressure pipe sealing rings shall comply with BS 2494 Type 1. Drainage sealing
- 144 -

rings shall comply with BS2494 Type 2. The elastometer used for the manufacture of the rings
shall be first grade plantation rubber complying with BS 4396 Grade 4, styrene butadiene
rubber or ethylene propylene rubber.
UPVC pipes shall be Class C for sewage and drainage and class E for water lines.
UPVC pipes shall be uniformly stacked along the pipe length and shall be given side support.
Stack shall be limited to 1 meter height or 4 layers, whichever is the lesser. Pipes shall be
stored in the shade.
Slotted UPVC pipes for land and storm water/land drains shall be of an approved design
giving infiltration rates at least equal to those specified in BS 1194 for porous concrete pipes
and they shall comply with BS 4660 or BS 5481.
Any pipe or part pipe with discoloration, scratching, abrasion, pit marks or otherwise
considered unsuitable by the Engineer shall be rejected.
Immediately after backfilling, a wooden or rubber ball 3% smaller than the pipe bore shall be
passed through the pipeline. A further test using a wooden or rubber ball 5% smaller than
pipe bore shall be carried out prior to the pipeline being put into service.
15.0 GATE VALVES

Gate valves for use in sewage, sewage effluent and sludge shall comply with BS 5150. Valves
to BS 5163 shall be used for all clean water purposes. Flanged valves shall be drilled in
accordance with Table 11 PN16 as defined in BS 4504 unless directed otherwise. Non-rising
spindles shall be used unless specified otherwise.
Gate valves shall have extension spindles, tee keys or heads stocks to suit the situation, as
detailed. Headstocks shall be marked to indicate closed, 1/4, 1/2, 3/4 and open position of the
valve. Valves shall have clockwise closing.
Gate valves larger than 400 mm shall be fitted with a studded cast iron cover at the bottom of
the valve body for inspection, cleaning and flushing purposes unless they are buried
underground.
Hand operated gate valves shall have hand wheels sized such that the operating effort does
not exceed 25 kg.f. The maximum acceptable size of hand wheel is 450 mm. Hand wheels
shall show directions for opening and closing.
Where gate valves are hand operated through gear boxes, the design of the gear box shall be
such that the operating effort does not exceed 25 kg.f. All valves of 450 mm diameter and
over shall be geared.
Where valves are underground, they shall have the extension spindles protected by PVC
protection tubes especially made to fit the valves. The protection tube shall have a suitable
bushing at the top to stop ingress of dirt. This bushing shall also have been designed to take
the weight of the spindle where deemed necessary.
16.0 DIAPHRAGM VALVES

Diaphragm valves shall comply with BS 5156 and shall be arranged for clockwise closing.
The valves shall be of the straight through or weir type, as detailed. The requirements for all
ancillary equipment shall be as for penstocks. Body lining and diaphragm shall be of materials
suitable for the fluid or gas being carried.
17.0 CHECK VALVES

Where check valves are indicated, specified, and usually associated with a piece of
equipment, the particular valve furnished must be of a type best suited to the piece of
equipment with which they are used and must be constructed of materials best suited for long
and efficient operation with a minimum of care and repair. Where recommended by the
manufacturer of the equipment installed, the valves must be fitted with dash pots, or cushion
chambers or be otherwise designed and constructed to prevent slamming and be quiet in
operation.
Where solids or semi-solids must be handled, the valves must be non-clogging or non-fouling
- 145 -

and their mechanism must be readily disassembled for inspection. Where used imply to
prevent abnormal flow in pipes lines (such as at hot water lines) they must be of the type and
material required by the specification.
Check valves shall be flanged and conform to BS 5153 and shall have cast iron bodies and
lids with heavy doors. The design of the valve shall be such that all internal moving parts can
be completely withdrawn for repair or renewal without disturbing the pipework. All check
valves shall have external mild steel heavy duty operating levers complete with adjustable
counter-weights. Long pattern valves will generally be used. Door spindles shall be located
with a non-torque transmitting collar to positively locate the Grade 431 S29 stainless steel
square spindle.
18.0 AIR RELEASE VALVES

Air release valves shall be of the double orifice kinetic ball type for non potable mains. The
valve assembly shall include isolating, sluice and scour valves as required.
Air release valves for potable water mains shall be as shown on the Drawings. Flanges shall
be compatible with the main pipeline.
19.0 TEST PRESSURE FOR VALVES

Gate and check valves shall be tested to the test pressure of the main in which they are
situated or to the maximum pressure rating of the valve, whichever is the greater. The test
shall be sustained for 30 minutes. Valves shall be works tested and independently certified.
Air release valves shall withstand a test pressure of 16 bars. They shall be works tested and
independently certified. Test pressures may be lower where specified by the Engineer.
20.0 PROTECTION OF VALVES

All iron valves shall be protected internally and externally by an approved fusion bonded
powder epoxy coating suitable for potable water to a minimum DFT of 200 microns applied by
the manufacturer. Care shall be taken in handling, transporting and installing the coated
valves. Any minor damage shall be made good on site in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations.
21.0 PUDDLE/ANCHOR FLANGES

Where iron pipes are built through concrete walls, puddle/ anchor flanges shall be provided.
Cast-on welded flanges shall be provided. This requirement shall apply to all concrete
structures and chambers, but not to manholes.
22.0 LAND DRAINAGE, FILTER MEDIA & MEMBRANES

The Contractor shall submit proposals for any soil filter system. This shall include all
laboratory tests in determination of soil properties used in the design.
Filter membrane shall be of an approved manufacture capable of passing groundwater at a
rate at least equal to the infiltration rate of the slotted land drain. It shall be heavy duty, inert to
biological and chemical attack likely to be encountered during its service life. It shall be
temperature stable and resistant to sunlight. It shall withstand minimum transverse and
longitudinal breaking load of 10 tonnes/m. The filter membrane shall be laid strictly in
accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
23.0 STEP IRONS

Step irons for manholes shall in accordance with BS 1247 and shall be hot dip galvanized in
accordance with BS 729 to provide a minimum coating thickness of 85 microns.
- 146 -

24.0 IDENTIFICATION PLAQUES
Manholes, chambers and pits shall, unless identified by embossed lettering on cast iron
covers, be identified by lettered cast iron plaques. The plaques shall be to an approved
design and shall be painted with coal-tar epoxy paint to BS 4164, to a minimum DFT of 300
microns prior to casting into the concrete.
25.0 CONCRETE STOOLS, ANCHOR AND THRUST BLOCKS

Concrete stools, anchors and thrust blocks, and other supports for pipes shall be cast in - situ
or fixed after the installations have been finally positioned to the lines and the levels shown on
the drawings but before loading or charging the installation.
Concrete shall be cast directly against the undistributed face of the trench excavation. The
Contractor shall maintain correct clearances in order that bolts, nuts, and joints may be
tightened or removed after supports have been installed. The Contractor shall provide
temporary supports, fixings, fittings, anchors and stools.
Where thrust blocks are cast against flexible pipes the pipes shall, prior to concreting, be
wrapped with two layers of approved petrolatum impregnated tape of minimum thickness of
1.15mm applied with 50% overlap.
All bends and stop-ends on pressure mains shall be securely anchored by concrete placed
between the bend or stop-end and the solid undisturbed vertical face of the trench.
Adequate thrust blocks shall be provided at the all hydrants, caps, tees, crosses, reduces and
bends and/or as directed by the Engineer. Thrust blocks shall be of 2,500PSI concrete and
shall be placed between undisturbed ground and fitting to be anchored, and shall be of the
shapes shown in typical details on the drawings or as directed by the Engineer. Bituminized
paper with a minimum thickness of 3mm shall be placed between the fitting and the concrete
to prevent bond. Sulphate resisting cement should be used in concrete. Sand and aggregates
to be used shall be approved by the Engineer.
26.0 UNLOADING AND LAYING OUT PIPES

Pipes and specials shall be unloaded with great care to avoid breakages and allow inspection
of their state on arrival. If they are shipped in packs or pallets, each pack or pallet shall be
lifted individually with suitable lifting equipment. If the pipes have to be unloaded singly and by
hand, this shall be done by means of skids and check ropes and no pipe shall be dropped or
allowed to roll unchecked. Pipes shall not be allowed to roll together and shall bewedged to
prevent further movement. The Contractor shall submit the manufacturer's proposals for
unloading, stacking and laying out pipes.
Pipes or specials shall not be laid out in such a manner as to impede traffic, or obstruct paths
or access to properties. Pipes or specials shall not be laid out in beds of ditches; every
precaution shall be taken to preserve their cleanliness before laying.
All pipes and specials shall be carefully examined before laying and damage to the coating or
lining shall be made good as directed by the Engineer.
Before the trench is refilled, the pipes shall again be examined and any further damage
caused to the coating during laying shall be made good.
27.0 LAYING AND JOINTING PIPES

All pipe systems shall be laid straight as standard rules & regularities given by the depatment
level falls and to the lines and levels shown on the Drawings. The Contractor shall supply and
fix all necessary bends, tees, tapers, valves and other specials, and shall carry out all
necessary cutting, coring, drilling holes, jointing and connecting to new and existing work.
Pipes shall be kept free from mud, debris or other obstruction during laying and until handed
over and suitably sized stoppers shall be used to block up the ends of all pipes, junctions etc.,
- 147 -

while preparing the trench for the next pipe or after working hours. The excavation shall in all
cases be carefully completed at least 6 meters but not more than 150 meters in advance of
the laying of the pipes, unless agreed otherwise by the Engineer.
Where ground water is encountered, it shall be kept below the sockets by means of pumping.
Before laying, each pipe shall be brushed out and examined and each spun iron pipe shall be
tested for soundness by being tapped with a hammer while the pipe is suspended clear of the
ground.
Each pipe shall be carefully lowered onto the prepared bed by means of the necessary slings
and tackle. If the prepared bed is damaged and if stones are dislodged into the trench, the
pipe shall be raised and the bed made good and stones removed before pipe laying is
continued.
Pipes other than PVC or polythene shall not be jointed before being lowered into the trench.
Pipe and fittings shall be laid and jointed according to the manufacturer's instructions to give a
water weight structure, through to line or grade.
Where pipes are laid on a curve, the maximum deflection per joint and the pipe length used
shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
Fittings, valves and hydrants shall be placed at the required locations with all valves and
hydrants stems plumb.
As the work progresses, the inner surface of the waterline shall be cleaned of all dirt and
superfluous materials of every description. Where cleaning after laying is difficult because of
small pipe size, a suitable swab or drag shall be kept and pulled forward past each joint
immediately after the jointing has been completed.
Where it is required to shorten any pipe, it shall be cut off squarely and cleanly by an approved
method without damage to the pipe or its lining, if any. Spigot ends shall be prepared for reuse
in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Bare iron and steel surfaces
shall be coated with approved bituminous paint before the pipes are laid.
No pipe or pipeline may be used for trench drainage purposes without the permission of the
Engineer.
At times when work is not in progress, open ends of pipe and fittings shall be securely and
satisfactorily closed with caps supplied by Contractor as recommended by the pipe
manufacturer so that no water, earth or other substance will enter the pipe or fittings.
Manholes shall be constructed by the Contractor concurrently with the laying of the adjacent
pipelines.
Between adjacent manholes, the total length of pipelines shall remain uncovered until it has
been inspected and satisfactorily tested. Such inspection shall not relieve the Contractor of
his responsibility for delivering the whole of the Contract Works in a watertight, correct and
perfect condition.
No pipe shall be covered up until it has been inspected and satisfactorily tested as specified.
Unless otherwise approved by the Consultant, sewers shall be laid from the downstream end
with the pipe sockets facing upstream.
Where pipes are built into manholes, pits, chambers, thrust blocks and other firmly-founded
structures, at changes in class of pipe bedding and at other locations where differential
settlement can be expected, the first two pipes on each side shall not exceed the following
lengths:
Diameter
First pipe
Second Pipe
Mm
(length projecting)
mm
mm
Less than
300
150
600
- 148 -

300 to 600
inclusive
Larger than
600
300
2 x diameter
450
1200
28.0 JUNCTIONS
The Contractor shall install junctions where directed. Before the trench is refilled, he shall
make accurate measurements of the distance from each junction to the centres of the nearest
manholes upstream and downstream, and record the invert level of the branch and shall
furnish this information to the Engineer, with details of the size and direction of the branch.
29.0 MANHOLES LININGS

The resin system used for manhole linings shall meet the requirements of BS 3532 for
polyester resin systems or BS 3534 for epoxy resin systems, as appropriate, and shall be
such that the finished lining meets all the requirements of the Specification.
Other resin systems, (e.g. vinyl ester resins) may also be suitable, provided that the finished
lining meets all the requirements of the Specifications.
All glass-fiber used for fibrous reinforcement shall be of type 'E' glass which shall comply with
the appropriate standard listed below and shall have a surface treatment compatible with the
resin. Any construction of the reinforcement is acceptable, provided that the finished pipe
meets all the requirements of the Specification.
BS 3691 Glass-Fiber proving for the reinforcement of polyester and of epoxide resin
systems.
BS 3496 Glass-Fiber chopped strand mat for the reinforcement of the polyester resin
system.
BS 3396 Woven glass-fiber fabrics for plastics reinforcement.
BS 3749 Woven glass-fiber roving fabrics for the reinforcement of polyester resin systems.
Surface tissues incorporating 'C' class synthetic fibers such as polyester or acrylic fibers, or 'E'
glass, may be used to produced resin-rich liner and outer layers.
The resin may contain active additives which modify the properties of the resin for viscosity
control, and may incorporate pigments or dyes in proportions which do not affect the overall
chemical resistance of the finished surface, but no pigments or filters shall be used in the
inner corrosion-resistant layer.
The inner chemical-resistant layer shall be composed of either a vinylester or bisphenol
A/fumeric acid resin reinforced with either glass-fiber or polyester tissue. The inner layer shall
have a thickness of 2mm, the resin content reducing from above 90% at the exposed surface
to 75% at the outer surface of the 2mm thickness.
The internal surface of the liner material shall be smooth and both the internal and external
surfaces shall be cleaned and free from defects such as protruding fibre, voids, pits, bubbles,
cracks, blisters or foreign matter which would impair their performance in service.
The external surface of the lining shall have suitable GRP lugs moulded on the surface at
appropriate spacings to allow adequate bonding to the concrete.
The lining shall be fully resistant to 10% W/V suphuric acid at 50 degree C and shall be
subjected to an immersion test that shall last a minimum 100 days. The laboratory and
method of testing shall be to the approval of the Engineer.
The manufacturing tolerances shall be +/- 0.5%. All deviations from roundness with the
exception of deformation due to self weight shall be contained within this tolerance.
At no position shall the thickness of the manhole liner material be less than 5mm.
Circular lining material shall be able to withstand an external hydrostatic head of 7 meters
without deforming.
The lining material shall have adequate strength to withstand loading, off-loading and site
handling. It shall not buckle or distort to affect circularity, water-tightness or continuity of
- 149 -

laminate when a concrete surround is being placed. Internal bracing whilst pouring concrete
shall be adopted if required.
Joints, where permitted, shall be as detailed and shall be made using an external purposemade
sleeve or plate bonded by approved solvent to the liner and shall be equal or superior in
performance to the lining, in both the circumferential and longitudinal directions. Over bonding
shall extend for a minimum of 150mm on each side of the joint.
A representative sample of the liner material shall be submitted to the Engineer for testing and
for comparison with the product as delivered to site, together with full details of the chemical
properties of the resins.
30.0 CONSTRUCTING MANHOLES AND CHAMBERS

The Contractor shall build in pipes and form guards as directed. Short pipes, as specified
elsewhere, with flexible joints shall be used immediately adjacent to manholes and chambers.
Benching shall be left completely smooth, to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
The concrete in walls and surrounds shall be formed using properly constructed form work.
Manholes and chambers shall be constructed concurrently with the adjacent pipe lengths.
Where flexible pipes are to be cast into concrete, the Contractor shall submit his proposals for
ensuring flexibility.
Selected material shall be carefully filled and rammed behind the concrete and made solid,
after the concrete has hardened sufficiently and the protective bitumen paint has set.
All manholes and chambers shall be watertight to the satisfaction of the Engineer. The
Contractor shall thoroughly clean out and flush manholes with the clean water.
Sulphate resisting brickwork, where detailed under manhole covers and frames, shall be solid
concrete bricks generally in accordance with BS 6073. The standard block shall be
190x90x65mm high with a minimum compressive strength of 40N/mm2, unless shown
otherwise.
31.0 COVERS AND FRAMES

Cast iron covers and frames shall be of the size, type and grade shown on the drawings and
shall comply with BS 497 or DIN 1229. They shall be of such construction as to minimize sand
ingress.
Covers shall be supplied complete with the five sets of lifting keys obtained from the cover
manufacturer. Frames and covers for sewers shall have a removable self sealing GRP or
similar corrosion-resistant plate which fits securely between cover and frame such that the
minimum surface area of the frame is exposed to the atmosphere within manhole. The design
of the frame, cover and plate shall be to the approval of the Engineer. The plate shall show
adequate corrosion resistant to 10% sulphuric acids at 50 degree C.
Sewer manhole and sewer chamber shall have the English and equivalent Arabic notation for
the word 'SEWER' clearly cast into the upper side of the covers in letter approximately 75mm
high. Surface water and land drain covers shall be similarly badged with the 'STORMWATER'.
Notations for other services shall be as directed by the Engineer. The Contractor shall submit
the proposed design for approval by the Engineer prior to ordering the material.
All frames shall be bolted to the concrete cover slab and the covers shall be lockable to the
frame by means of a robust non-corrodable inside catch which is key operated.
32.0 CI SURFACE BOXES, GULLY GRATINGS AND FRAMES

Cast ductile iron surface boxes, gully gratings and frames shall heavy duty complying with BS
5834 and BS 497 Grade A loading except for kerb gullies which shall be Grade B loading.
Kerb gullies shall have reversible covers capable of preventing the ingress of sand. Road
gully gratings shall be Type GA1-450. Kerb gullies shall be type GK -165 and shall include an
internal GRP grating and road-retaining bar.
The weir entrance to the road gully shall be barred vertically to prevent the ingress of objects
- 150 -

larger than 75 mm. The removable cover shall incorporate a lockable device comprising a
robust non-corrodable internal key-operated turnbuckle or similar method to minimize
unauthorized use.
33.0 GULLIES
Road gullies shall be polypropylene or GRP in accordance with BS 556: Part 2, 450mm
internal diameter by 900 or 1,050 mm deep with 150 mm outlet and without trap for
soakaways but with trap for a positive drainage system. They shall be complete with GRP
perforated basket and incorporate a 100 mm dia, opening in the base, unless otherwise
directed by the Engineer.
34.0 PROTECTION TO CI MANHOLE COVERS, ETC

Gratings, covers and frame shall be prepared in accordance with the relevant clause for
preparation of steelwork prior to protective treatment and shall be coated with the heavy duty
abrasion resistant epoxy paint to a minimum DFT of 375 microns prior to installation.
Contact surfaces of covers and frames (other than machined covers) shall be coated with
approved heavy duty grease immediately prior to final fitting of cover.
Faying surfaces of machined covers and frames shall be coated with approved graphite
grease immediately prior to final fitting of covers.
35.0 LADDERS
Ladders shall be aluminium alloy of approved design and obtained from an approved
manufacturer. The dimensions of ladder widths, rung spacing etc. shall comply with BS 4211.
Aluminium alloy shall be A25 anodized in accordance with BS 1615.
36.0 NEW MANHOLES ON EXISTING SEWERS

Where directed, the Contractor shall excavate down to and around existing sewers. Concrete
foundations shall be formed under the existing pipe. The manhole shall be constructed
thereon, all as specified, and the pipe laid there from to the new sewer.
The section of the existing pipe inside the new manhole shall then be carefully removed and
new benching formed as specified. The ends of disused pipes shall be sealed off with slate
and cement mortar or concrete seals.
Care shall be taken to ensure that no material from the excavation, or debris of any kind, enter
the sewers during the construction of manholes.
The Contractor shall comply with the safety standards as issued from time to time by Abu Dhabi
Municipality.
37.0 SEALING FUTURE CONNECTIONS

Vitrified clay or polypropylene stoppers of approved pattern with flexible joints shall be used to
seal off the ends of all vitrified clay, GRP or UPVC pipes left for future connections. Cast iron
caps shall be used to seal off the ends of all iron pipes and asbestos cement pipes for future
connections.
38.0 CONNECTIONS TO SEWERS

No sewage shall be discharged to the new sewers until the whole of the works are completed
to the satisfaction of the Engineer except that where a substantial part of a scheme has been
completed to his satisfaction, the Engineer may permit connections to such part of the
scheme.
Care shall be taken to ensure that no materials from the excavation or debris of any kind enter
the existing or new sewers whilst connections are being made.
The alignments and elevation of the connection pipes and chambers of manholes shall be
- 151 -

determined by the Engineer.
39.0 TESTING
The Contractor shall ensure that all pipes, fittings, specials etc. are watertight to the
satisfaction of the Engineer.
The Contractor shall supply all the necessary labour, blank flanges, anchors, air-valves, test
pumps, gauges, clips, stoppers, etc. for testing. Prior to use, the pressure gauge shall be
tested at an approved independent testing laboratory.
Water required for testing shall be obtained from an approved source. The pipeline shall be
filled in such a way that the pipework is not damaged in any way. The Contractor shall supply
and dispose of the water for testing.
The Contractor shall give the Engineer adequate notice in writing of his intention to test any
pipeline (at least 24 hours for pressure pipelines). Testing shall not proceed until permission to
do so has been received from the Engineer. Permission to test shall not imply approval of the
method nor relieve the Contractor in any way of his responsibilities in connection with the
Works.
All pipes shall be cleaned and tested as the work proceeds. If 3 months or more shall elapse
between the final test and the pipeline being taken over, the Engineer may require the pipeline
to be retested as specified for the final test.
Pipes, fixtures and fittings which fail under test, or are broken by or found to be broken under
test, or considered by the Engineer as a result of the test to be unserviceable shall be rejected
and removed from the site forthwith and shall be replaced. Replacement shall be at the
Contractor's expense if, in the opinion of the Engineer, failure is due to the Contractor's
treatment, faulty installation of the component or inadequate inspection. After replacement the
testing shall be repeated.
In the event of failure of a section of pipeline causing damage to any adjacent road, pavement,
structure or existing service, the Contractor shall be liable for all remedial work necessary to
restore the damaged item to its original condition.
On completion and prior to disinfection, if so desired, pipes and specials shall be cleaned out
and flushed with water, all silt, mortar, concrete debris and other obstructions being removed.
Such testing or inspection of any other works shall not be held to relieve the Contractor from
his responsibility to deliver the whole of the Contract Works in a sound and clean state, free
from leakage and other defects under the maximum test or operating pressure whichever is
the greatest.
Upon satisfactory testing of a pipeline or section of a pipeline the Contractor shall submit a
test acceptance form in a format to be mutually agreed, for signature by the Engineer. This
form shall be the true record of all acceptable tests. The Contractor shall retain one copy on
site at all times.
39.1 TESTING OF FOUL SEWERS AND LATERALS

All sewers, junctions, risers, laterals, feed, washout and sludge pipes etc. upto and including
600mm diameter shall be tested with air at the completion of each working day or when 20
meters of pipe have been laid.
A gauge in the form of a glass U-tube shall be provided and air shall be blown or pumped into
the length of pipes until a pressure equal to 125 mm of water is indicated on the gauge.
Without further blowing or pumping the pressure shall not have fallen below 100 mm after a
period of 5 minutes. The pipes shall continue to withstand this pressure without further loss
and without blowing or pumping for a further period of 5 minutes.
When a sewer section between manholes or such other sections as may be agreed by the
Engineer has been completed, and whilst uncovered, the pipeline shall be tested with water at
a minimum pressure equal to 5.0m head of water or such pressures as the Engineer may
determine both before and after backfilling.
When testing clay or concrete pipes with water, the test pressure shall be applied at the
upstream end of the test length, but in no case shall the resultant pressure at the downstream
- 152 -

end exceed 6.0m head, including the 5.0m test head.
The test pressure shall be applied for a sufficient period (approx. 24 hrs.) to allow for initial
absorption etc. The test shall then be carried out over a period of one hour, and the pressure
restored to the test pressure by the addition of water at 10 minute intervals. On each test
length of clay or concrete sewer, the acceptance criteria shall be the addition of no more than
0.042 liters of water per hour per linear meter per meter of pipe diameter of the pipe under
test, to maintain the test head.
The test head of pressure shall be maintained while the refilling of the trenches proceeds until
there is a consolidated depth of 1200 mm over the barrel of the pipes. Should the loss of head
of pressure then exceed the maximum permitted, the Contractor shall excavate to the pipes at
their expense, then make good of any defects to the Engineer's approval, after which the test
shall be repeated.
On completion of testing, in case of drains and sewers up to and including 450 mm diameter
where a visual inspection is not possible, a wooden or rubber ball 25mm less in diameter than
the diameter of the pipe shall be passed through each manhole length, or the pipeline proved
to be clean and unblocked in another approved manner.
When directed, pipelines shall be re-tested by means of the air test or water test, as previously
specified, at the time of final inspection before commissioning the pipelines, the type of test to
be instructed by the Engineer.
39.2 TESTING OF GRAVITY SURFACE WATER SYSTEMS

Pipes upto and including 600mm diameter shall be air-tested as described in the preceding
clause in lengths from manhole to manhole before, during and after backfilling. Pipes greater
than 600mm in diameter shall be visually inspected internally.
In addition to the above, all pipelines shall be inspected on completion to ensure that
infiltration of ground water, where the pipeline is below the water table, does not exceed 1.0
liter per hour per linear meter per meter of pipe diameter for each manhole length.
Manholes and chambers shall be water-tight. Water testing of surface water and land drains
will not generally be required unless specifically ordered by the Engineer.
Remedial work shall be carried out as necessary to obtain satisfactory air-tests and
acceptable exclusion of ground water.
39.3 TESTING OF PRESSURE PIPELINES

Before backfilling, pressure pipework shall be hydrostatically tested in accordance with
CP2010 for a continuous period of 4 hours. Cement lined pipes shall be kept at working
pressure for a continuous period of 24 hours prior to carrying out the test.
Sections for testing shall normally be of 500m length and shall not exceed 1,000m. The
Contractor shall submit his proposals for pressure testing prior to commencement of
pipelaying. Road crossings and other short sections of pipe installed independently of main
runs shall be tested separately. Testing shall follow immediately upon pipe laying and, upon
satisfactory completion of test, shall be backfilled so that tested lines are not left exposed.
Test pressure measurements shall be made at the lowest point of the pipeline section under
test.
The Contractor shall completely fill with water the section of pipeline under test, expelling air
from the pipe. Before applying the test pressure, air valves shall be isolated from the main to
avoid damage to the floats.
During the testing of cement pipes, water shall be added and the amount added shall be
recorded. The test shall be considered satisfactory when the amount of water added does not
exceed 0.1 liter/mm of diameter/km of length/24 hours /30 meters of head. Where pumping is
required to maintain the pressure it shall be done at 30 minute intervals.
Following successful testing of all sections, the pipeline in its entirety shall be re-tested to the
same test pressure as for the individual sections.
Before the pipeline is put into service it shall be flushed at washouts and valves etc., to ensure
complete freedom from obstructions and debris.
- 153 -

39.4 HOLDING TANKS
Holding tanks shall be of reinforced concrete with GRP lining as indicated in the drawings.
Tanks shall be provided with overflow warning level alarm, which should be connected to
B.M.S system. All incoming pipes shall be U.P.V.C class E or equally approve. Tanks shall be
provided with step irons, manhole covers and provision for Municipal connection.
39.5 ROOF RAIN WATER OUTLET

Fulbora, 100mm vertical spigot rainwater outlet with twist action domed grate in aluminum or
secured flat Grate in aluminum to BS 1490 with aserrated clamping ring secured by stainless
nuts to integral studding cast into the outlet body..
39.6 BALCONY OUTLET

4X4 square stainless steel balcony grate with built in sand trap. Drain body also in stainless
steel with 2 outlet.
Roof terrace, land scaping area should provided with roof drain with wire mesh.
SPECIFICATION OF ELEVATORS (proposal 1)
Quantity
3 nos. Passenger elevators [ P1 ~ P3 ]
Equipment type
Overhead traction
- 154 -

Carrying capacity
600 kgs [10 persons]
Speed
105 metres / minute [1.75 meter / second]
Control system
Geared traction machine

Variable voltage variable frequency [VVVF] drive.
Operation
3-car group control
Number of stops and openings
22 stops - 22 openings (all in same line)

(B4 ~ B1, G, M, 1 ~ 16)
Travel
As per drawing
Hoistway size available
5800 mm (W) x 1700 mm (D) (for each 3 elevators)
Car internal size
1400 mm (W) x 1100 mm (D) x 2200mm (H)
Pit depth
1500mm (clear from the finished first serving floor level

to the bottom of the pit)
Overhead height
4500mm (clear between the last landing finished floor

level and underside of machine slab)
Machine room height
2250mm (clear underside hoisting beam / hook)
Location of machine
Directly above the hoistway.
Elevator car design

Ceiling, lighting & ventilation
(Black alumite trim with arched milky white resin board;

lighting through indirect full lighting; ventilation by
means of electric blower)
Car doors
Finished / cladded with hairline finished stainless steel

with etching in pattern selected to consultants choice
from Manufacturers standard range of designs.
Car rear & side walls

Car front return panel and

Transom panel
Hairline finished stainless steel
Cabin flooring
13mm recess will be provided in the cabin platform for

corian flooring [by main contractor and weight shall not
exceed 30 Kgs]
Entrance frames
On ground floor
- 155 -

Lintel and splayed door frame to cover full wall
thickness in hairline finished stainless steel.
On other floors
Lintel and narrow jamb in hairline finished stainless
steel.
Landing door panels
On ground floor
On other floors
Finished / cladded with hairline finished stainless steel.
Type of hoistway doors
Two panel center opening power operated automatic

sliding doors.
Door opening size
800mm (W) x 2100mm (H)
Car & entrance landing sills
Extruded hard aluminium
Hall position indicators
On ground floor
Vertical combined unit comprising of digital hall position
indicator, directional arrows and micro stroke click
buttons which self illuminate on registration of a call,
(face plate in stainless steel hairline with dark gray
plastic case).
Cabin indicators
Built-in digital led dot display car position indicator with

directional arrows will be incorporated in the car
operating panel to facilitate better view of the position of
car comfortably even during crowded condition.
Car operating panel
Vertical type car operating panel will be mounted on the

front return panel of the cabin for better operational
convenience with call buttons of micro stroke click type
which will illuminate on registration of a call. Face plate
will be in hairline finished stainless steel.
Operational and safety features
Fireman emergency operation:

When the firemans switch activated during a fire, all
calls are cancelled and the designated car returns
immediately to a specified floor. To facilitate rescue
afterwards, the car responds only to car calls.
- 156 -

Car arrival chime
An electronic chime sounds
passengers of the car arrival.
to
inform
waiting
Interphone:
Interphone for three way communication between the
elevator cabin, machine room and security personnel at
ground floor lobby near the lift entrance.
Overload holding stop:
When a car load exceeds pre-determined capacity,
the elevator will stop its operation with the doors
open at the floor and a buzzer will sound. The buzzer
will stop when enough passengers have exited the
car to reduce the load to below the excess capacity.
Door load detector:
When an object is caught in opening / closing doors, the
doors will reverse its direction when a excess load is
detected. For example, when a pebble becomes lodged
in the door track, rather than force itself open/closed,
the reverse cycle is to be repeated until the problem is
eliminated.
Automatic door open time adjustment:
The system judges the situation whether each car stops
responding to a car call or a hall call and controls the
time of the doors stay open accordingly. The time spent
waiting for the elevator is thereby shortened and
operating efficiency is increased.
Car light and fan off automatic:
To save energy, car lighting and ventilation fan are
turned off automatically if there is no call registered
within a predetermined period of time.
False call cancellation: (P1~P3)
All car calls will be automatically cancelled to avoid
unnecessary stops by registration of nuisance car
calls if the number of calls registered does not
correlate with the car load.
Safety door edge:
- 157 -

Each leading edge of the car door panels is equipped
with a safety door edge. When a passenger or an
object touches one of the edges, the closing doors will
be opened immediately.
Safety ray
An infra-red light beam covers the full width of the door
as it opens or closes to detect passengers or objects.
Emergency car lighting:
Turns on immediately when power fails, and provides a
minimum level of illumination within the car.
Door nudging feature:
In the event of any door safety device malfunction, a
temporary override function is to be automatically
engaged to close the doors, thereby preventing a fault
in elevator operation. Once the doors close completely,
the override has to be cleared and normal operation
resumes.
Next landing facility with main power supply
uninterrupted:
If an elevator door becomes jammed for some reason
[ex. A pebble] and passengers are unable to get off at
the desired floor, the elevator automatically proceed to
the next floor with functioning doors closed in order that
the passengers do not get stranded at the affected floor.
Safe landing with main power supply uninterrupted:
This feature is so designed to prevent passengers from
being stranded in the car when an elevator malfunctions
and stops between the floors. The source of this
malfunction has to be automatically searched out and
when elevator operation is determined to be safe, the
car shall proceed to the nearest safe landing at reduced
speed and the doors then open.
Automatic bypass (ABP) ( P1~P3)
A full loaded car will bypass hall calls in order to
maintain maximum operating efficiency.
Emergency landing device:

Emergency landing device which will bring the
elevators to the nearest landing in the event of
power failure and keep the doors open for
- 158 -

evacuation of passengers. Thereafter, the elevators
will discontinue its operation until restoration of
normal power supply.
Auto-door speed control:
The system monitors the actual door load conditions at
each floor and automatically adjusts door speed and
torque accordingly.
Door sensor self diagnosis:
If a non-contract door sensor fails, the system
automatically determines the door closing timing to
maintain the elevator service.
Main floor parking:
With this feature an available car is parked at the main
floor and waits with its doors open to reduce passenger
waiting time.
Car call canceling:
When a car responds to the final car call in one
direction, the system automatically checks and clears
the remaining calls in another direction from memory.
- 159 -

Continuity of service: (P1~P3)
The assignment of hall calls when the car cannot
respond to the calls registered another car in the group
will operate as a backup for the excluded car to ensure
continuity of service to all hall calls.
Independent service: (P1~P3)
A car can be isolated from group service and used
without interruption using the override switch in the
car operating panel.
Repeated door close
Should an obstacle prevent the doors closing, the
doors will repeatedly open and close until the object
is removed.
Reopen with hall button:
While the doors are closing, they can be reopened by
pressing the hall button.
Expediting of door close
Door open and door close buttons
Hand operation for emergency evacuation purposes
Half back wall mirror
Hairline finished stainless steel handrail on rear side of
the cabin.
DC alarm bell
Buffers
Oil type
Safety
Gradual type
Guide rails
Machined steel Tee sections for cabin and

formed steel sections for counterweight
Counterweights
Cast iron blocks enclosed in a steel frame
Power supply
415 Volts 3Phase 50Hz.
Lighting supply
240 Volts 1Phase 50Hz.
- 160 -

SPECIFICATION OF ELEVATORS (proposal 2)
1. Designation (LIFT ID)
PASSENGER LIFTS L1 & L2
MAIN:
Number of Elevators
Lift type (passenger, goods, firefighting, scenic, vehicle,
bed)
LOAD Q (kg)
LOAD (PERSONS)
Speed (m/s)
LIFT CODE
LIFT MACHINERY / CONTROLLER
Machine Location
Machine Type
Drive System
Control system
Operation ( Simplex , Duplex , Triplex , Four Car
Group etc)
Floors Served Front
Floors Served Rear
Travel (m)
Hoistway size [ Width (W) x Depth (D) ]
(mm)
2
Passenger
630
8
1.75
EN81-1
Machine Roomless
Gearless Permanent Magnet
Synchronous motor
VVVF
Microprocessor
Triplex with L3
Pit Depth (mm)

Overhead Height (mm)
Machine Room Height (mm)
STEEL DIVIDER BEAMS (if required)
STEEL DIVIDER BEAMS ADAPTORS (if required)
CAR SLING
COUNTERWEIGHT SAFETY GEAR
PIT LADDER
COUNTERWEIGHT SCREEN
LIFT DIVIDING SCREEN
Shaft lights & sockets
Shaft Trunking (Galvanized trunking Or PVC)
22 / 22
B4 to B1, G, M, 1 to 16
none
74.3 m
5800 x 1700 - common shaft
for three lifts
1600
4000
N/A
By Lift contractor
By Lift contractor
Bolted
Yes , to be provided
By Lift contractor
By Lift contractor
By Lift contractor
By MEP contractor
PVC
LIFT CAR
Car: Width (W) x Depth (D) x Height (H)
1150 x 1350 x 2280
FRONT WALL MATERIAL
(mm)
Brushed Finished Stainless

Steel , from lift Manufacture
standard range (304Grade)
- 161 -

SIDE WALL FINISHES
Will be in three Panels; ( 300mm
+750mm +300mm )
Middle Panel (750mm width) in
Etched Mirror Polished Finished
Stainless Steel in Silver Color,
Side Panels ( each 300mm
width) in Mirror Polished
Finished Black Color Stainless
Steel (304Grade)
REAR WALL FINISHES
+550mm +300mm )
Steel (304Grade)
FLOOR FINISHES
23 mm recess to accept
Flooring by Main contractor
CAR CEILING MODEL / FINISH
Suspended ceiling. LED Round
Spot lights In Silver Mirror
Polished Stainless steel,
Ventilation by means of electric
blower. To be selected from
Supplier Standard Range
EMERGENCY EXIT (TRAPDOOR or SIDE WALL)
Top Car trap door
(500 x 350mm)
FAN
Out Blowing Electric type
SKIRTING
100mm Finished with same
fishes of Front wall
MIRROR
Partial Height Partial width, on
the rear wall
HANDRAIL
One row of Round shape
Curved on the rear wall
BUMPRAIL
Not required
CCTV OPENING
Wire Provision to be provided
SPEAKER PROVISION
YES
MAXIMUM ALLOWANCE FOR LOCAL FINISHES
150kg for flooring
(KG)
PROTECTIVE PADS AND HOOKS
Not required
DOORS:
DOOR TYPE (CENTRE OPENING OR SIDE
OPENING)
DOOR SIZE (Width X Height)
(mm)
DOOR OPERATION
Power operated 2 panel Centre

Opening
800 x 2100
AC motor with electronic VVVF
control, 800,000 Door Cycle Per
- 162 -

Year HEAVY DUTY DOOR
OPERATOR
LANDING DOOR FINISHES
MAIN FLOOR
Stainless Steel in Striped
Pattern , (304 Grade)
OTHERS
LANDING DOORS JAMPS ( SHAPE AND FINISH):
MAIN FLOOR (Wide Jamb with Lintel or Narrow
Wide Jamb in Brushed Polished
Jambs)
Finished Stainless Steel from
lift Manufacture standard range
OTHERS (Wide Jamb with Lintel or Narrow
Narrow frames in Brushed
Jambs)
LANDING SILL MATERIAL ( Aluminum or St/St)
MAIN
Extruded hard Aluminum
OTHERS
CAR DOORS
DOOR FINISHES

standard range
Curtain of Light Full door length
Not less than 120 minutes (UK
Two hours) at all floors
DOOR PROTECTION
SILL MATERIAL
LANDING DOORS FIRE RATING
LANDING SIGNALISATION:
LANDING CALL STATIONS
MAIN FLOOR MODEL
OTHER FLOOR MODEL
FACEPLATE MATERIAL
FACEPLATE SHAPE
BUTTON TYPE (Square or Round, Flush or
Surface)
CALL REGISTERED BUZZER
COLOUR
HANDICAPPED REQUIREMENTS
HALL LANTERNS / INDICATORS
- 163 -
Micro movement push button

with call accepted light, to be
placed in the center area
between two Elevators
Black Acrylic with Stainless
steel Frame ,
OVAL
St/St Round, Flush Mounted
Yes
White Lighting
Yes

MAIN FLOOR MODEL
Dot Matrix position Indicator
with Directional Arrows on top
of the Landing Door
FACEPLATE MATERIAL
steel Frame
POSITION
Top of the Landing door
FACEPLATE SHAPE
Rectangular
COLOUR
White Lighting
OTHER FLOOR MODEL

of the Landing Door
steel Frame
Rectangular
White Lighting
FACEPLATE MATERIAL
POSITION
FACEPLATE SHAPE
COLOUR
CAR SIGNALISATION:
CAR OPERATING PANEL
CAR OPERATING PANEL LOCATION

NUMBER OF CAR OPERATION PANELS (EACH
CAR)
FACEPLATE MATERIAL
BUTTON TYPE (Square or Round, Flush or Surface)
POSITION INDICATOR ( LCD or Dot Matrix )
OVERLOAD INDICATION BY
FLASHING LIGHT/BUZZER
COLOR
INTERCOM
One Car operating panel to the

Partial height, with call buttons
of micro stroke click type,
which will illuminate In White
color on registration of a call.
Faceplate will be in Black
Acrylic with Stainless steel
Frame , Surface mounted.
Second Car operating panel will
be horizontal on the side wall
for Handicap use
Side Walls
2
Black Acrylic Brushed Stainless
steel
YES
Dot Matrix with Directional
arrows
YES
White Lighting
Hands free
- 164 -

2. Designation (LIFT ID)
PASSENGER / SERVICE Lift L3
MAIN:
Number of Elevators
Lift type (passenger, goods, firefighting, scenic, vehicle,
bed)
LOAD Q (kg)
LOAD (PERSONS)
Speed (m/s)
LIFT CODE
LIFT MACHINERY / CONTROLLER
Machine Location
Machine Type
Drive System
Control system
Operation ( Simplex , Duplex , Triplex , Four Car
Group etc)
Floors Served Front
Floors Served Rear
Travel (m)
Hoistway size [ Width (W) x Depth (D) ]
(mm)
1
PASSENGER / SERVICE
900
12
1.75
EN81-1
Machine Roomless
Gearless Permanent Magnet
Synchronous motor
VVVF
Microprocessor
Triplex with L1 & L2
Pit Depth (mm)

Overhead Height (mm)
Machine Room Height (mm)
STEEL DIVIDER BEAMS (if required)
STEEL DIVIDER BEAMS ADAPTORS (if required)
CAR SLING
COUNTERWEIGHT SAFETY GEAR
PIT LADDER
COUNTERWEIGHT SCREEN
LIFT DIVIDING SCREEN
Shaft lights & sockets
Shaft Trunking (Galvanized trunking Or PVC)
22 / 22
B4 to B1, G, M, 1 to 16
none
74.3 m
5800 x 1700 - common shaft
for three lifts
1600
4000
N/A
By Lift contractor
By Lift contractor
Bolted
NON
By Lift contractor
By Lift contractor
By Lift contractor
By MEP contractor
PVC
LIFT CAR
Car: Width (W) x Depth (D) x Height (H)
1500 x 1350 x 2280
FRONT WALL MATERIAL
(mm)

standard range (304Grade)
+750mm +300mm )
SIDE WALL FINISHES
- 165 -

Steel (304Grade)
REAR WALL FINISHES
+900mm +300mm )
Steel (304Grade)
FLOOR FINISHES
23 mm recess to accept
Flooring by Main contractor
CAR CEILING MODEL / FINISH
Suspended ceiling. LED Round
Spot lights In Silver Mirror
Polished Stainless steel,
Ventilation by means of electric
blower. To be selected from
Supplier Standard Range
EMERGENCY EXIT (TRAPDOOR or SIDE WALL)
Top Car trap door
(500 x 350mm)
FAN
Out Blowing Electric type
SKIRTING
100mm Finished with same
fishes of Front wall
MIRROR
Partial Height Partial width, on
the rear wall
HANDRAIL
One row of Round shape
Curved on the rear wall
BUMPRAIL
Not required
CCTV OPENING
Wire Provision to be provided
SPEAKER PROVISION
YES
MAXIMUM ALLOWANCE FOR LOCAL FINISHES
150kg for flooring
(KG)
PROTECTIVE PADS AND HOOKS
Not required
DOORS:
DOOR TYPE (CENTRE OPENING OR SIDE
OPENING)
DOOR SIZE (Width X Height)
(mm)
DOOR OPERATION
Power operated 2 panel Centre

Opening
900 x 2100
AC motor with electronic VVVF
control, 800,000 Door Cycle Per
Year HEAVY DUTY DOOR
OPERATOR
- 166 -

LANDING DOOR FINISHES
MAIN FLOOR
OTHERS
LANDING DOORS JAMPS ( SHAPE AND FINISH):
MAIN FLOOR (Wide Jamb with Lintel or Narrow
Wide Jamb in Brushed Polished
Jambs)
OTHERS (Wide Jamb with Lintel or Narrow
Narrow frames in Brushed
Jambs)
LANDING SILL MATERIAL ( Aluminum or St/St)
MAIN
OTHERS
CAR DOORS
DOOR FINISHES

standard range
Curtain of Light Full door length
Not less than 120 minutes (UK
Two hours) at all floors
DOOR PROTECTION
SILL MATERIAL
LANDING DOORS FIRE RATING
LANDING SIGNALISATION:
LANDING CALL STATIONS
MAIN FLOOR MODEL
OTHER FLOOR MODEL
FACEPLATE MATERIAL
FACEPLATE SHAPE
BUTTON TYPE (Square or Round, Flush or
Surface)
COLOUR
HANDICAPPED REQUIREMENTS
HALL LANTERNS / INDICATORS
MAIN FLOOR MODEL
- 167 -

steel Frame ,
OVAL
Yes
White Lighting
Yes
of the Landing Door

FACEPLATE MATERIAL
steel Frame
POSITION
FACEPLATE SHAPE
Rectangular
COLOUR
White Lighting
OTHER FLOOR MODEL

of the Landing Door
steel Frame
Rectangular
White Lighting
FACEPLATE MATERIAL
POSITION
FACEPLATE SHAPE
COLOUR
CAR SIGNALISATION:
CAR OPERATING PANEL
CAR OPERATING PANEL LOCATION

NUMBER OF CAR OPERATION PANELS (EACH
CAR)
FACEPLATE MATERIAL
BUTTON TYPE (Square or Round, Flush or Surface)
POSITION INDICATOR ( LCD or Dot Matrix )
OVERLOAD INDICATION BY
FLASHING LIGHT/BUZZER
COLOR
INTERCOM
One Car operating panel to the

Partial height, with call buttons
of micro stroke click type,
which will illuminate In White
color on registration of a call.
Faceplate will be in Black
Acrylic with Stainless steel
Frame , Surface mounted.
Second Car operating panel will
be horizontal on the side wall
for Handicap use
Side Walls
2
Black Acrylic Brushed Stainless
steel
YES
Dot Matrix with Directional
arrows
YES
White Lighting
Hands free
- 168 -

3. CONTROLLER FEATURES:
Earthquake option
Lift announcer, English Language
Information screens inside the Car (LCD Display)
Elevator Monitoring and Command System (EMCS) BMS roomEmergency battery drive , automatic
Firemans drive Key Switch, to operate the lifts during
Fire
Fire detection, whole building, alternative return floor,
doors open
Emergency intercom car-machine room -control room
Door close button
Accurate relevelling, automatic
Two touch car call cancel
Operation of car light, automatic, switch to turn off
Operation of car ventilation, automatic, switch to turn
off
Provision for loudspeaker in car
Out of service switch in car, doors open, lights on,
indication
Parking at pre-defined floor, doors closed
Car call registered buzzer
CCTV Camera in the Car, Provision Only
Bypass load function
Advance door opening
Nudging service, by measuring load
Emergency stop switch on car roof
Emergency stop switch in well, one switch
Car calls from machine room
Buttons to operate car doors for service purposes on
car roof
Alarm bell at main floor
Alarm bell under/top of car
Car emergency lighting, separate light
Emergency exit contact in car
Buffer switch
Correction drive feature
Car roof blocking device switch
- 169 -
Lift Type
PASSENGER
LIFTS L1 &
L2
PASSENGER /
SERVICE Lift
L3
ZONE 1A
YES
NO
ZONE 1A
YES
NO
NO
NO
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
Yes
Yes
Yes (G)
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
Yes (G)
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES

Hooks & Protective Pads
NO
YES
Regenerative Drive
YES
YES
Motor protection, thermistors with automatic reset
YES
YES
- 170 -

Appendix B
List of Approved Manufacturers / Plumbing works
- 171 -

APPENDIX B:
LIST OF APPROVED MANUFACTURERS / Plumbing works
Index A
All the materials supplied under this contract shall be from one of the manufacturers listed below.
No alternate Makes shall be accepted unless all the listed Makes are unavailable. Materials
proposed from listed Makes also must fully comply with Detailed Specifications. Country of Origin,
where listed, must be complied.
ITEM
MANUFACTURER
ORIGIN OF
MANUFACTURER
1. PRESSURE PVC PIPES
HEPWORTH GEORGE FISHER

DURAPIPE
ABS TERRAIN
UAE
UK
UK
2. COPPER TUBES/FITTINGS
YORKSHIRE
WEDNESBURY
OUTOKUMPO
MUELLER
UK
UK
3. WASTE PVC PIPES FITTINGS
MARLEY
KEY TERRAIN
HEPWORTH GEORGE FISHER
USA
UK
UAE
4. PEX PIPES & FITTINGS
WIRSBO
ACOME
FRIPEX
GIACOMINI GERMANY
COMPAQ
GERMANY
GERMANY
GERMANY
5. POLY PROPYLENE PIPE &

FITTINGS.
UPNOR
GIACOMMI
UKAND
ITALY
ARZETE
6. SUMP PUMPS
ABS
KSB
FLYGT
GERMANY
GERMANY
SWEDEN
7. VALVES (FERROUS &

NON FERROUS)
CRANE
HATTERSLEY
TOUR & ANDERSON
UK
UK
SWEDEN
8. FIXING SUPPORTS, ETC.
FLAMMCO
ISOFIX
DIAMOND
WICCO
EUROPE
9. WATER PUMPS, BOOSTER

AND CHILLED WATER
PUMPS
ARMSTRONG
ITT BELL GOSSPAT
PACO
- 172 -
UK
USA
USA

10. FIRE PUMPS (UL
FM APPROVED)
PATTERSON
ITT BELGOSSPAT
PEERLESS
ARMSTRONG
11. SEWAGE PUMPS
ABS
ITT LOWARRA
KSB
12. FLOOR GRATINGS

(For Bathroom Area)
DALLMAR
13. AIR VENTS
SPIRAX SARCO
SOCLA
HONEYWELL
USA
USA
USA
GERMANY
ITALY
GERMANY
GERMANY
UK
USA
14. RUBBER INSULATION
ARMAFLEX
AEROFLEX
KAIMOFLEX
15. FIRE FIGHTING PIPES

(GALVANISED STEEL)
ZENITH
TATA
GUJARAT STEEL
16. FIRE FIGHTING EQUIPMENT
WALKER
UNISAFE
ANGUS
SHEIL
UK
UK
UK
UK
17. SPRINGKLER SYSTEM
VIKING
RELIABLE
GRINNELL
CENTRAL
USA
USA
USA
USA
18. FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
VIKING
NAFCO
CROCKER
ANDUL
USA
UK
USA
USA
19. MANHOLE COVERS
RSI
RBA
DUCAST
INDIA
INDIA
UAE
20. WATER HEATERS
ARISTON
A.O. SMITH
THERMAX
21. GRILLES/DIFFUSERS/SAND
TRAP LOUVRES
TECHNALCO
BETA
AIRMASTER
BEST CHOICE
22. G.I. SHEETS
NISSIHIN
UNISCO
SUMITAMO
ISCOR
- 173 -
INDIA
INDIA
ITALY
HOLLAND
UAE
UAE
UAE
UAE
JAPAN
SOUTH AFRICA
JAPAN
SOUTH AFRICA

23. ALUMINIUM TAPES
ADVANCED
IDEAL
IDENDEN
C.M.S.
24. M.S. FITTINGS /

G.I. Fittings
CRANE
BENKEN
NEFIT
25. FLOOR DRAIN/CLEAN OUT
ZURN
WADE
DALLMAR
26. ROOF WATER OUTLET
TERRAIN
HEPWORTH
MARLEY
UK
USA
UK
JAPAN
HOLLAND
U.K
U.K
27. PRESSURE REDUCING

VALVE
HONEYWELL
BAILY
WATTS
ZURNWILKINS
28. ACCESS DOORS
ZEST
SAFID
RUSKIN
29. ACCOUSTIC FLOATING

FLOOR
MASON
KINETICS
USA
USA
30. ACOUSTIC LAGGING

(For Drainage Pipe)
KINETIC
HODGSON
USA
UK
31. WATER TANKS
PIONEER
MITSUBISHI
POLYCON
- 174 -
AUSTRALIA
JAPAN
UAE

Particular Specifications for Fire Fighting Works
- 175 -

- 176 -

- 177 -

- 178 -

- 179 -

- 180 -

- 181 -

- 182 -

- 183 -

- 184 -

- 185 -

- 186 -

- 187 -

- 188 -

- 189 -

SUBSECTION 15520: Fire Pumps
Table of Contents
1.0
GENERAL ...............................................................................................................................
2.0
PRODUCTS .............................................................................................................................
3.0
2.1.
VERTICAL TURBINE PUMPS ............................................................................................
2.2.
ELECTRIC MOTOR
2.3
FITTINGS ............................................................................................................................
2.4.
GEAR DRIVE
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
DIESEL ENGINE ................................................................................................................
JOCKEY PUMP
PUMPING SYSTEM COTROLLER
DIESEL TANK AND ASSOCIATED PIPE WORK
EXECUTION
- 190 -

1.0 GENERAL
1.1. VERTICAL TURBINE FIRE PUMPS
Electric Motor and Diesel Engine Driven
The pumps furnished for fire protection service shall be supplied with the
specified drivers, controls and pump accessory items by the pump
manufacturer. The pump, driver and control shall be
--Underwriters Laboratories (UL) Listed
-- Factory Mutual Research Corporation (FM)Approved
The pumping equipment shall be installed as recommended in the National
Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 20,Standard for the Installation of
Centrifugal Fire Pumps.
The fire pump shall be designed to deliver U.S. gallons per minute (gpm)
at a total differential pressure of psi. or (m of H2O ) The fire pump shall also
be capable of delivering not less than 150% of rated flow at not less than
65% rated head. Furnished with driver, controllers and accessories as
detailed in this specification. Pump manufacturer shall have unit
responsibility for the proper operation of the complete unit assembly as
indicated by field acceptance tests.
1.2
MANUFACTURER'S FACTORY TESTS:
Each individual pump shall be run tested prior to shipment.

Vertical turbine bowl and discharge head assemblies shall be hydrostatically
tested at a pressure not less than one and one-half times the no flow (shut off)
head of the pump's maximum diameter impeller but in no case less than 250
psig.
1.3
FIELD ACCEPTANCE TEST:
A field acceptance performance test shall be conducted upon completion of

pump installation. The test shall be made by flowing water through calibrated
nozzles, approved flow meters or other such accurate devices as may be
selected by the authority and the engineer.
The test shall be conducted as
recommended in NFPA in the presence of the authority having jurisdiction
and with that authority's final approval and acceptance. Failure to submit
documentation of factory and field tests will be just cause for equipment
rejection.
- 191 -

2.0
PRODUCT
2.1 VERTICAL TURBINE PUMPS:

The fire pump shall be vertical shaft turbine pump. The pump shall be
specifically labelled for fire service (underground fire main)system.
-- a sump or equivalent intake structure of style, dimension and water
capacity as recommended in NFPA 20.
The total installed length of the pump from bottom of Base plate to bottom of
suction inlet manifold shall be (1415 m). The pump discharge head
assembly
shall be cast iron and fitted with a inch discharge connection machined to
American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
--125 pound rating dimensions
--250 pound rating dimensions
The pump discharge head shall provide rigid mounting support for the
complete pump assembly and for the
--vertical hollow shaft motor (electric motor driven pumps)
--right angle gear drive (diesel engine driven pumps The pump line shaft
bearings shall be
--water lubricated by the liquid being pumped (for static water levels up to
50 feet)
Pump column pipe (and oil tube when applicable) shall be in sections not
longer than 10 feet each.
Pump bowl assemblies shall include cast iron enamelled bowls, cast bronze
impellers and bowl
lateral seal rings. Pump bowl assemblies shall be submerged as
recommended in NFPA 20.
Each pump shall be installed with a cast or fabricated nonferrous metal
strainer having a free area of not less
than four times the suction inlet area. Strainer openings shall be sized to
restrict the passage of objects one-half inch sphere size.
- 192 -

2.2 ELECTRIC MOTORS:

2.2.1 MOTOR : The pump driver shall be a vertical hollow shaft induction
motor rated horsepower, 3 phase, 50 Hertz with weather protected
type 1 NEMA enclosure.
The motor locked rotor current shall not exceed the values stated in
NFPA20 The motor shall be constructed so that the total hydraulic and static
thrust of the pump's rotating assembly can be carried by the motor thrust
bearing(s). The motor shall mount directly on the pump discharge head
assembly with a registered fit for correct shaft alignment. he motor shall be
equipped with a top drive coupling and nut for axial adjustment of the pump
impellers and shall have a non-reverse ratchet to prevent pump back-spin.
2.2.2 ELECTRIC MOTOR CONTROLLERS:

The automatic electric motor controller shall be (UL listed)(FM approved)
specifically for fire pump service. The controller shall be designed for
--full voltage
--part winding
--primary resistance reduced voltage
--wye-delta open transition
--wye-delta closed transition
--auto-transformer
--solid state (soft start) type starting.
The
controller shall be rated for the horsepower specified in this specifications
electric motors section. The controller shall be capable of interrupting a short
circuit current at least equal to the available short circuit current in the
controller supply circuit. The fire pump controller installation requires an
withstand rating
RMS symmetrical at an operating voltage of volts.

The controller shall be:
--floor or wall mounted for electrical connection to the motor by
the equipment installer.
- 193 -

--mounted on a common base with the fire pump and wired to the
motor by the pump manufacturer.
2.3 FITTINGS:
The pump manufacturer shall furnish piping accessory items for the pump
installation which will adapt the pump connections to the fire
protection system and test connection as follows.
Fittings subjected to pump discharge pressure shall be
ANSI (125)(250) pound rating. Fittings subjected to
suction pressure shall be ANSI 125 pound rating.
--eccentric tapered suction reducer

--concentric tapered discharge increaser
--hose valve test header
-- hose valves with caps and chains
--automatic air release valve
--hose valve head drain valve
--suction and discharge pressure gauges
Additional accessories required when pump is engine:
--main relief valve:
--direct acting (spring actuated)
--pilot operated (hydraulically actuated)
--relief valve overflow cone, enclosed type
2.4 GEAR DRIVES:
- 194 -

Engine driven vertical turbine pumps shall be furnished with a vertical

hollow shaft right angle gear, The drive shall be direct connected
to the pump shaft and be equipped with a non-reverse ratchet.
The drive shall be connected to the engine by an approved flexible universal
joint type drive shaft with an enclosing guard as recommended in NFPA 20
The driver shall have provision for adjusting the pump impeller lateral
setting for proper pump operation and performance.
2.5 DIESEL ENGINES:

2.5.1 DIESEL ENGINE : The pump driver shall be a horizontal shaft type
internal combustion engine model , clockwise rotation viewed from the end
opposite the pump. The engine shall be provided by the pump manufacturer
with, all required accessories for automatic operation.
emergency manual operator, factory wired and mounted on the engine
junction box for standby engine starting and operation in case of main
controller or interconnecting wiring malfunction.
cooling waterlines, pressure regulator, strainer,
bypass lines and necessary fittings for engine
cooling system, pre-piped and factory mounted.
flexible exhaust connector
residential exhaust silencer
engine jacket water heater, factory installed.
one set dual batteries, lead acid storage type.
fuel system as recommended in NFPA Pamphlet 20
fuel storage tank sized to provide a minimum

supply of one gallon of fuel per engine maximum
rated horsepower plus 5% for sump area plus 5%
for expansion area. The tank shall be furnished
with legs for floor mounting and with a
direct reading level gauge. The fuel tank shall
(single wall)(dual wall) UL listed; single wall non-listed
2.5.2 ENGINE CONTROLLERS:

The automatic engine controller shall be (UL listed)(FM approved)
- 195 -

specifically for fire pump service. The controller must

be capable of performing or contain the following
features:
-- built in battery charger
--time clock for weekly automatic test
--system pressure recorder
--timing relay for automatic stop
--power failure start
--low fuel level switch
--pump room alarm audible and visual signals
--The controller shall be wired to the corresponding
engine function terminals and shall be mounted on a common base with the
engine and pump. A complete running test of the base mounted
controller, engine and pump shall be performed by the pump manufacturer
prior to shipment.
--The engine controller shall be floor mounted for electrical connection to the
engine by the equipment installer.
- 196 -

2.6
JOCKEY PUMPS
2.6.1 THE JOCKEY TURBINE TYPE WITH CAPACITY PUMP SHOULD BE

VERTICAL ,AND
PRESSURE SHALL BE AS INDICATED IN THE PUMP
SCHEDULE ON THE DRAWINGS.
2.6.2 PUMP SHALL BE CLOSE COUPLED, VERTICAL TURBINE, ELECTRICALLY
DRIVEN,
COMPLETE WITH PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE.
2.6.3 PUMP CONTROLLER SHALL BE FACTORY PRE-WIRED AND TESTED.
PRESSURE
SWITCH SHALL SENSE LOW PRESSURE IN THE FIRE PUMP
SYSTEM. SET CUT-IN
PRESSURE 5 PSI ABOVE MAIN FIRE PUMP CUT-IN
PRESSURE. SET CUT-OUT
PRESSURE AT SYSTEM PRESSURE. PROVIDE
MINIMUM RUN TIMER TO OPERATE
THE PUMP FOR A MINIMUM OF 3
MINUTES.
2.6.4ACROSS THE LINE START, H-O-A SELECTOR SWITCH.
2.6.5CONTROL
PANEL TO CONTAIN A FUSIBLE 3-POLE DISCONNECT SWITCH,

MAGNETIC
MOTOR CONTRACTOR AND THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS
WITH EXTERNAL RESET.
ENCLOSURE TO BE WALL MOUNTED WITH
HINGED DOOR.
ACCEPTABLE PRODUCT: PUMP AS IN SUPPLIERS LIST
2.7 PUMPING SYSTEM CONTROL

The controller shall be of the combined manual and automatic auto
transformer type, and shall be complete with :connect switch
quick-break type.
2.7.1
CIRCUIT BREAKER - TIME DELAY TYPE WITH TRIPS IN ALL PHASES SET
FOR 300 OF THE MOTOR FULL-LOAD CURRENT.
2.7,2 MOTOR STARTER, CAPABLE OF BEING ENERGIZED AUTOMATICALLY

THROUGH THE
PRESSURE SWITCH OR MANUALLY BY MEANS OF AN
EXTERNALLY OPERABLE
HANDLE.
2.7.3 PRESSURE SWITCH, OF ADJUSTABLE TYPE.
- 197 -

2.7.4 RUNNING PERIOD TIMER - SET TO KEEP MOTOR IN OPERATION, WHEN

STARTED AUTOMATICALLY, FOR A MINIMUM PERIOD OF ONE MINUTE
FOR EACH 10 HP MOTOR RATING, BUT NOT TO EXCEED 7 MINUTES.
2.7.5 PILOT
LAMP
AVAILABLE.
TO INDICATE CIRCUIT BREAKER CLOSED AND POWER

STARTED AUTOMATICALLY, FOR A MINIMUM PERIOD OF ONE MINUTE
FOR EACH 10 HP MOTOR RATING, BUT NOT TO EXCEED 7 MINUTES.
2.7.8 PILOT
LAMP
AVAILABLE.
2.7.9 AMMETER TEST LINK AND VOLTMETER TEST STUDS.

2.7.10
ALARM RELAY - TO ENERGIZE AN AUDIBLE OR VISIBLE ALARM THROUGH
AN INDEPENDENT SOURCE OF POWER TO INDICATE CIRCUIT BREAKER

OPEN OR POWER FAILURE.
2.7.11 The controller shall be of the combined manual and

automatic auto
transformer type,
2.7.12 DISCONNECT SWITCH - EXTERNALLY OPERABLE, QUICK-BREAK TYPE.
2.7.13 CIRCUIT BREAKER - TIME DELAY TYPE WITH TRIPS
FOR 300% OF THE MOTOR FULL-LOAD CURRENT.
2.7.14 MOTOR
IN ALL PHASES SET
STARTER, CAPABLE OF BEING ENERGIZED AUTOMATICALLY

THROUGH THE
PRESSURE SWITCH OR MANUALLY BY MEANS OF AN
EXTERNALLY OPERABLE
HANDLE.
- 198 -


STARTED
AUTOMATICALLY, FOR A MINIMUM PERIOD OF ONE MINUTE
FOR EACH 10 HP
MOTOR RATING, BUT NOT TO EXCEED 7 MINUTES.
2.7.17
PILOT
LAMP
AVAILABLE.
2.7.18
AMMETER TEST LINK AND VOLTMETER TEST STUDS.
2.7.19 ALARM RELAY - TO ENERGIZE AN AUDIBLE OR VISIBLE ALARM THROUGH

AN
INDEPENDENT SOURCE OF POWER TO INDICATE CIRCUIT
BREAKER OPEN OR
POWER FAILURE.
2.7.20 MANUAL
SELECTION STATION - A TWO POSITION STATION SHALL BE

PROVIDED ON
THE ENCLOSURE MARKED "AUTOMATIC" AND NONAUTOMATIC".
2.7.21 MEANS
ALARM
SHALL BE PROVIDED ON THE CONTROLLER TO OPERATE AN

SIGNAL CONTINUOUSLY WHILE THE PUMP IS RUNNING.
2.7.22
PROVISIONS FOR POWER SUPPLY AT 220 V FOR DIESEL PUMP BATTERY

CHARGERS.
2.7.23 CONTROL EQUIPMENT SHALL MEET ALL REQUIREMENTS OF NFPA NO.

20.
2.7.24 TANK ACCESSORIES
ELECTRONIC WATER
ELECTRONIC
WATER
LEVEL
INDICATOR:
LEVEL INDICATOR SHALL PROVIDE REMOTE

READING OF WATER LEVEL INTO THE
PUMP CONTROL PANEL. AN
ALARM FACILITY SHALL BE PROVIDED FOR
CONNECTION TO
THE FIRE PUMP CONTROL PANEL TO INDICATE LOW WATER LEVEL
AND TO PROVIDE A SIGNAL TO SHUT DOWN THE PUMPS IF THE TANK IS
EMPTY.
- 199 -

2.8
DIESEL TANKS AND ASSOCIATED PIPEWORK
2.8.3
Diesel Tank shall consist of the following:
2.8.3.1
FUEL
2.8.3.2
TANK FILL PIPE WITH OVERFILL PROTECTION OPW 6150.
2.8.3.3
LEVEL SWITCH
ENGINE.
2.8.3.4
EXTERNAL SIGHT GLASS.
2.8.3.5
(50MM) VENT PIPE TO THE OUTSIDE TERMINATING WITH OPW

523 VAPOUR VENT AND OPW 524 BALL FLOAT VENT VALVE
INSIDE TANK.
2.8.3.6
THE TANK ITSELF SHALL

GAUGE THICKNESS.
FILL
CONNECTION
CONTAINMENT.
WITH
WITH
HIGH/ LOW
OPW
1-2100
SPILL
OUTPUT TO START/ STOP
BE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION.
14
2.8.4
Diesel piping:
2.8.4.1
PIPING
2.8.4.2
ALL FITTINGS SHALL BE MALLEABLE IRON CLASS 150, ASTM

B16.3 WITH A PRESSURE RATING OF 510 PSIG.
2.8.4.3
SHALL BE SEAMLESS ASTM

PRESSURE RATING OF 1215 PSIG.
53 STEEL
PIPING WITH A
ALL BALL VALVES SHALL BE OF BRONZE CONSTRUCTION WITH

A PRESSURE RATING OF 400 PSIG.
- 200 -

3.0
EXECUTION
3.0.1
The fire pumps shall be provided with a supervised

isolating valve, flow meter and throttling valve
on the test piping. Test
piping shall
discharge water to the fire water tank through a
galvanized steel diffuser pipe.
3.0.2
Each pump, whether diesel or electric driven shall be

complete with suction and discharge pressure
gauges, circulation relief valve, closed relief cone,
automatic air release valve, drain valves coupling
guard and its own control panel.
3.0.3
Provide remote annunciation panel for each pump

which shall be located in the Managers office and
shall provide the following features: diesel and
electric pump status indicating lights and trouble
light for each pump. Wiring between control panel
and remote control panel shall be by Division 16
installed in conduit as described in section 16434.
3.0.4
Batteries shall be furnished in a dry charge condition,

with electrolyte liquid in a separate container.
Electrolyte shall be added and the battery given a
conditioning charge at the time that the engine is put
into service. Batteries shall be located so as to be
readily accessible for servicing and at least 300mm
above floor level.
3.0.5
The electric motor driven unit shall have the pump,

electric motor and control panel mounted on a
common base. The entire unit will be factory tested
prior to shipping.
3.0.6
The automatic engine control panel and the electric

motor driven unit control panel shall be specifically
designed for fire pump service. All wiring between
pump, pump devices and controller shall be factory
wired and tested. Wiring between controller and the
building fire alarm system shall be by Division 16.
Power wiring for the electric fire pump will be by
Division 16.
- 201 -

3.0.7
The control panels shall be securely mounted in an

enclosure which will protect the equipment against
mechanical injury and falling drops of water. All
switches required to keep the controller in the
"automatic" position shall be within the locked
cabinet. Emergency access to the switch shall be by
breaking the glass panels.
3.0.8
A wiring diagram shall be provided and permanently

attached to the inside of the each enclosure showing
exact wiring for the controller, including a legend of
identifying numbers of individual components. All
wiring terminals shall be plainly marked to
correspond with the wiring diagram furnished.
3.0.9
Wiring elements of the controllers shall be designed

on a continuous-duty basis. All wiring leading from
the panel to the engine and to the batteries shall have
adequate carrying capacity. Such wiring shall be
protected against mechanical injury by metal conduit.
3.0.10
Each operating component of the controllers shall be

marked to plainly indicate an identifying number
referenced to the wiring diagram. The markings shall
be located so as to be visible after installation.
3.0.11
Complete instructions covering the operation of the

controllers shall be provided and conspicuously
mounted on the controllers.
3.0.12
Prior to shipment, the electric pumps and control

panels shall be thoroughly shop-tested as a unit by
the pump manufacturer. A characteristic curve
showing the pump performance based upon the
results of the shop test shall be submitted to the
Consultant prior to shipment, and shall include the
performance of the pump and engine at the setgovernor's speed. Absence of these test reports,
indicating that the complete unit has been tested in
the factory by the driver, will be ample grounds for
the rejection of the equipment. The contractor shall
include in his price the cost and expenses of having
one representative of the Owner to witness the
complete factory test prior to shipment.
- 202 -

3.0.13
3.0.13.1
PUMPS OPERATION CONTROL

THE ELECTRIC FIRE PUMP SHALL BE THE LEAD FIRE PUMP.
THE
DIESEL ENGINE DRIVEN PUMP SHALL BE BACKUP
FIRE PUMP AND WILL ONLY OPERATE IF THE LEAD FIRE

PUMP CANNOT MAINTAIN
SYSTEM PRESSURE.
3.0.13.2
SET
JOCKEY PUMP PRESSURE CONTROLS TO MAINTAIN

SYSTEM
PRESSURE.
3.0.13.3
FOR PRESSURE SIGNAL TO OPERATE THE JOCKEY PUMP, FP3P WILL OPERATE BEFORE FP-3S.
3.1.13.4
For any signal to operate the electrical or diesel pump
FP-1P & FP-2P will operate FP-2S & FP-3S.
3.0.14
Field Acceptance tests:
- 203 -

3.0.14.1
THE
3.0.14.2
OVERHEATING: THE
3.0.14.3
3.0.14.4
3.0.15
FIELD ACCEPTANCE TEST RESULTS SHALL BE AS GOOD

AS THE MANUFACTURER'S
CERTIFIED SHOP TEST
CHARACTERISTIC CURVE FOR THE PUMP BEING TESTED
WITHIN THE ACCURACY LIMITS OF THE TEST EQUIPMENT.
PUMP SHALL OPERATE AT PEAK LOAD
CONDITIONS WITHOUT OBJECTIONABLE HEATING OF THE
BEARINGS
OR OF THE PRIME MOVER. THE OPERATING
PUMP SPEED SHALL
BE THE SPEED AT WHICH THE
PUMPING UNIT WOULD BE
EXPECTED TO OPERATE
DURING A FIRE.
THE
ENGINE SHALL NOT SHOW SIGNS OF OVERLOAD OR

STRESS AND ITS GOVERNOR SHALL PROPERLY REGULATE
THE SPEED.
CONTROLLER:
THE AUTOMATIC CONTROLLER SHALL BE PUT THROUGH NOT
LESS THAN
TEN AUTOMATIC AND TEN MANUAL OPERATIONS.
A
RUNNING INTERVAL OF AT LEAST FIVE MINUTES AT FULL

SPEED SHALL
BE ALLOWED BEFORE REPEATING THE
STARTING CYCLE.
AUTOMATIC
OPERATION OF THE CONTROLLER SHALL START

THE PUMP
FROM ALL THE PROVIDED STARTING FEATURES,
SUCH AS PRESSURE
SWITCHES, VALVES, ETC.
THE
PUMP SHALL BE IN OPERATION NOT LESS THAN ONE

HOUR
(TOTAL TIME) DURING THE FOREGOING TESTS.
The pump, driver, and all controls and necessary

attachments, specified herein, shall be purchased
under a unit contract. Field wiring of remote panels,
installation and wiring of water level indicators and
fuel piping and wiring from the main storage tank to
the local tank shall be provided by the Contractor.
The pump manufacturer shall assume unit
responsibility and shall provide the services of a
qualified Engineer to supervise the installation and
alignment of equipment. Field tests shall be
conducted in the field to satisfy Local Authorities
having jurisdiction of satisfactory operation of
pump,
driver
and
controller.
The
pump
- 204 -

manufacturer's engineer shall be at the job site,

supervising the test. The control manufacturer shall
have their representative at the job site to train
operators in the use of the controls.
3.0.16
Spare parts and tools necessary for two years

operation, as recommended by the manufacturer,
shall be provided as a part of the contract for the
engine. A list of these spares shall be included in the
offer.
3.0.17
Provide and install water relief valve and test

discharge piping and all discharging water back to
the fire water tank.
3.0.18
Provide and install all water cooling piping, valves,

controls for the engine, silencer and gear box
cooling heat exchangers.
3.0.19
Contractor shall provide exact head calculations

based on shop drawings before final selection of
pumps.
-End of Section-
- 205 -

3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
3.06
A.
Manufacturer's Field Service:

Provide services of supplier's service
representative to supervise field assembly of components, installation of fire
pump units and pressure-maintenance pump units, including piping and
electrical connections, field acceptance tests. Report test results in writing.
B.
Check suction line connections for tightness to avoid drawing air into pumps.
C.
Perform field-acceptance tests for each fire pump unit (fire pump, driver, and
controller) and system piping when fire pump unit installation is complete.
Comply with operating instructions and procedures of NFPA 20 to demonstrate
compliance with requirements. Where possible, field-correct malfunctioning
equipment, then retest to demonstrate compliance. Replace equipment that
cannot be satisfactorily corrected or that does not perform as specified and as
indicated, then retest to demonstrate compliance. Verify that each fire pump
unit performs as specified and as indicated.
COMMISSIONING
A.
B.
Startup Services: Provide services of supplier's service representative to provide

startup service and to demonstrate and train Owner's maintenance personnel as
specified below.
1.
Test and adjust controls and safeties.

malfunctioning controls and components.
Replace damaged and
2.
Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules related

to startup and shutdown, troubleshooting, servicing, and preventive
maintenance.
3.
Review data in the "Operating and Maintenance Manual". Refer to

Division 1 Section "Project Closeout".
4.
Schedule training with at least 7 days' advance notice.
5.
Provide fire hoses in number, size, and of length required to reach a storm
drain or other acceptable location to dispose of fire pump test water.
These fire hoses are for field acceptance tests only and are not intended to
become property of the Owner.
Final Checks Before Startup: Perform the following preventive-maintenance

operations and checks before startup:
1.
Lubricate oil-lubricated bearings.
2.
Remove grease-lubricated bearing covers and flush bearings with kerosene

and thoroughly clean. Fill with new lubricant according to manufacturer's
recommendations.
3.
Disconnect coupling and check electric motor for proper rotation direction
marked on pump casing.
- 206 -

4.
Check that the pump is free to rotate by hand. Do not operate the pump if
it is bound or if it drags even slightly until cause of trouble is determined
and corrected.
C.
Starting procedure for pumps:

1.
Prime pump by opening suction valve and closing drains, and prepare
pump for operation.
2.
Open sealing liquid supply valve if pump is so fitted.
3.
Start motor.
4.
Open discharge valve slowly.
5.
Observe leakage from stuffing boxes and adjust sealing liquid valve for
proper flow to ensure lubrication of packing. Do not tighten gland
immediately, but let packing run in before reducing leakage through
stuffing boxes.
6.
Check general mechanical operation of pump and motor.

END OF SECTION
- 207 -

1.0 FIRE FIGHTING SYSTEM
Scope of Work
The MEP sub-contractor shall include in his tender for the complete installation,
testing and commissioning of the systems detailed on the tender drawings and in this
specification to the standards and approval of Civil Defense Fire Rescue
Department. The MEP sub-contractor shall include for all labor, materials, tools and
tackle, complete with all supports and fixings back to approve building structural
members. The MEP sub-contractor shall be responsible for all dimensions and
location of other services, and the correct setting out of the installation.
Fire Protection General
The Specialist Contractor shall be responsible for the compliance of the fire
protection installation with the current rules of NFPA 13-Automatic Sprinkler System,
NFPA 14- Standpipe, NFPA 2001 Clean Agent Gas Extinguishing and other systems
complying with relevant NFPA codes.
Fire Protection to the building consists of the following:
- Standpipe (Landing Valve, Hose Reel & Hose Rocks)
- Portable Fire Extinguishers
- Wet Pipe Automatic Sprinkler System
- HFC 227 ea Clean Agent Gas Extinguishing System
- External Fire Hydrant Pillar Type, 3 way, Dry Barrel.
Pipe Work
Fire water pipes shall be Steel pipes to ASTM A53 or ASTM A795 Sch. 40, Grd. B.
Complying with Annex C enclosed with Tender specification.
A 25 mm diameter automatic air relief valve shall be fitted to the top of each riser at
roof level.
Portable Fire Extinguishers
Provide and install fire extinguishers as indicated on the drawings. Extinguishers
shall be of the following sizes:
(a) Carbon Dioxide Portable Extinguisher
(b) Dry Chemical Powder Stored Pressure
(c) Water Extinguisher Stored Pressure
The physical dimensions of the extinguishers shall be such that they housed within
the cabinet if necessary. Extinguishers shall comply with Annex I enclosed with
tender specification.
- 208 -

Piping System / Annex C
(a) Requirements for Design of Pipes & Valves Fire Water Service
a.1) Above Ground Piping
Steel Pipes Size - 2 inch NB & smaller
Pipe
BLACK (where welded pipes are to be installed) Mill galvanized (where grooved
couplings are permitted), conforming to ASTM A53 Gr. B / ASTM A 795 Gr. B, ERW
pipes.
Threaded Fittings
Malleable Iron, mill galvanized conforming to ANSI B16.3.
Steel Pipes - 2.5 inch size & larger
Fittings
a) Butt welded fittings conforming to ASME B 16.9 [ANSI B 16.25 Ends]
b) Pipe Flanges conforming to ASME B 16.5
a.2) Underground Piping (6 inch and Larger)
Ductile Iron Pipes
a) Pipe
b) Fittings
c) Joints
d) Anticorrosive Protection
- conforming to AWWA C 151

Steel Pipes
a) Black or mill galvanized , ASTM A 53 , ERW, Schedule 40 , with epoxy coat
and anticorrosive surface protection . Proposed materials shall be submitted for
approval.
b) The fittings shall be butt welded or socket welded. Joints shall be flanged .
Non Metallic Pipes
Use of Non metallic pipes CPVC and others shall be used for sprinkler system in
accordance with provisions of NFPA 13 D & 13 R.
Valves
General
All isolating on off valves shall be OS & Y type and Listed unless otherwise
specified. The Valve downstream of Flow Meter shall be Globe Type to for ease of
- 209 -

throttling. Valves upstream of Alarm Control Valve & isolation valves on each wet
riser shall be provided with supervisory switch for remote monitoring. Valves shall be
rated for pressure and temperature service.
Technical Submittals
Manufacturers Technical Data Sheet with material specification and pressure ratings
Listings and Approval Certificates shall be submitted for review and acceptance.
2.0 CLEAN GAS FIRE EXTINGUISHING SYSTEM (FM 200)
General
The Server Room shall all be protected with a Clean Agent Fire Extinguishing
System. The MEP sub-contractor shall employ a specialist manufacturer to design
and install the clean agent fire extinguishing system to the approval of the Civil
Defence
Design Codes
The clean agent fire extinguishing system shall comply with the latest edition of the
following standards:
NFPA 2001 - Clean Agent Gaseous Extinguishing Systems
NFPA 72 - National Fire Alarm Code
Submittals
The specialist installer shall prepare detailed installation drawings for each area
indicating the agent storage tanks, location of all plant and equipment, pipe runs
including sizes and lengths, control panels including terminal wiring ports, detectors,
conduit runs, manual pull stations, abort stations, audible and visual alarms, etc.
The specialist installer shall provide auxiliary details and information such as
hydraulic flow calculations from a UL listed computer program, operation and control
documentation, alarm devices, shutdown functions, remote signaling.
Pipe and Fittings
Pipes shall comply with NFPA 2001, section 2-2.3, seamless mild steel schedule 40
to ASTM (A53) Grd. B. Non-metallic pipes shall not be allowed.
Pipes fittings shall comply with NFPA 2001, section 2-2.3, malleable iron rated at 20
bar to ASTM A-197. All fittings shall be threaded.
- 210 -

Gas Cylinders
Cylinders shall be DOT approved. The cylinders shall be manufactured.
Agent Cylinder Arrangement
Provide for each protected area a separate cylinder bank as required complete with
independent discharge pipework arrangements.
Discharge Nozzles
Provide agent discharge nozzles 360O / 180 discharge pattern. Nozzles shall be
listed and certified for use by Designed Manufacturer.
3.0 FIRE RATED DOORS - D
Fire & Smoke Control Doors
The rating of Doors shall be selected for each occupancy classification as per NFPA
101. The ratings vary depending on whether the building is fully equipped with
sprinklers.
Fire rated Doors Protected stairway
a) A fire door forming part of the enclosure of protected stairway must be 1 hour fire
rated including frame and ironmongery.
b) All doors shall have self closing device.
c) All doors shall be provided with insulated vision panel.
d) Final exit door at the ground floor shall have panic bolt or panic latch and should
have the words PUSH BAR TO OPEN.
e) A notice with the words Fire door keep shut in lettering of appropriate size [both
English & Arabic] should be permanently displayed at eye level on both the faces of
the doors.
Smoke control Doors Doors Sub-dividing corridors (where applicable)
a) Smoke stop doors shall be double swing opening and must be 20 min. Fire rated.
b) Leakage rate shall not exceed 3m /h / m at 25pa or the threshold gap should not
exceed 3mm at any point.
c) Doors shall be provided with insulated vision panel.
Other Doors
Details of door shall be submitted for comments / approval.
- 211 -

APPROVALS:
a) The local Agent / Distributor shall have a valid certificate from Dubai Civil Defense.
b) Fire doors should be clearly and permanently marked with the fire rating
established by recognized Test Houses. The Door Rating refers to door with frame
and ironmongery.
Note: All doors that having electrical locks must be integrated with fire alarm system
and BMS system according to the fire sinaryo and subject to Civil Defence approval.
- 212 -

Mechanical Specifications

Diunggah oleh

Informasi Dokumen

Hak Cipta

Format Tersedia

Bagikan dokumen Ini

Bagikan atau Tanam Dokumen

Opsi Berbagi

Apakah menurut Anda dokumen ini bermanfaat?

Apakah konten ini tidak pantas?

Hak Cipta:

Format Tersedia

Mechanical Specifications

Diunggah oleh

Hak Cipta:

Format Tersedia

Project: Demolition of existing building, Construction, Completion and Maintenance of

ABU DHABI COMMERCIAL ENGINEERING SERVICES L.L.C

Po. Box: 3414, Abu Dhabi

Project: Demolition of existing building, Construction, Completion and Maintenance of

Volume 4 : Part 1: Architectural & Structural Drawings

Project: Demolition of existing building, Construction, Completion and Maintenance of

Volume 1 Part 1 Contents:

Project: Demolition of existing building, Construction, Completion and Maintenance of

Project: Demolition of existing building, Construction, Completion and Maintenance of

Tags and Directory

Avoidance of Tree Roots

General Requirements for Piping and Fittings

Fixing Steel Work

Inspection, Testing and Adjustments

Testing of Piping & Accessories

Operation & Maintenance Manuals

Guarantee & Warrantees

Regulations for Ventilation and Air-conditioning

Access Panels and Doors

Project: Demolition of existing building, Construction, Completion and Maintenance of

Pipe and Cable Trays/Ducts Hangers and Supports

Access to Valves, etc.

Installation of Pipes, Conduits and Ductwork

Pipe and Duct Sleeves

Unions, Flanges and Valves

Piping Joints Capillary

Drainage Piping Requirements

Fixing of uPVC Pipe work Installations

Cleaning Drains on Completion

Disinfection of Water System

Cable Ducts Laying

Test: Low and Medium Voltage

Project: Demolition of existing building, Construction, Completion and Maintenance of

2.0 QUALITY OF PRODUCTS

Project: Demolition of existing building, Construction, Completion and Maintenance of

5.0 TAGS AND DIRECTORY

Project: Demolition of existing building, Construction, Completion and Maintenance of

Project: Demolition of existing building, Construction, Completion and Maintenance of

8.0 CONCEALED WORK

10.0 EXPOSED WORK

11.0 AVOIDANCE OF TREE ROOTS

12.0 INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT

Project: Demolition of existing building, Construction, Completion and Maintenance of

13.0 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR ALL PIPING AND FITTINGS

Project: Demolition of existing building, Construction, Completion and Maintenance of

Project: Demolition of existing building, Construction, Completion and Maintenance of

Project: Demolition of existing building, Construction, Completion and Maintenance of

16.0 FOUNDATION FIXING

17.0 FIXING TO WALL

Project: Demolition of existing building, Construction, Completion and Maintenance of

21.0 NOTES ON INSTALLATION

Project: Demolition of existing building, Construction, Completion and Maintenance of

Project: Demolition of existing building, Construction, Completion and Maintenance of

22.0 INSPECTION TESTS AND ADJUSTMENTS

Project: Demolition of existing building, Construction, Completion and Maintenance of

23.0 TESTING OF PIPING & ACCESSORIES

Project: Demolition of existing building, Construction, Completion and Maintenance of

24.0 TESTING ON SITE

Project: Demolition of existing building, Construction, Completion and Maintenance of

25.0 OPERATION & MAINTENANCE MANUALS

Project: Demolition of existing building, Construction, Completion and Maintenance of

27.0 REGULATIONS FOR AIRCONDITIONING ANDVENTILATION

Project: Demolition of existing building, Construction, Completion and Maintenance of

29.0 PIPE AND CABLE TRAYS/DUCTS HANGERS AND SUPPORTS